Qx IP I SDIUSER MANUAL
Software Release 4.8

Manual Revision 22a

Preface
About this ManualThis User Manual is a guide to the functions provided by your Qx Series instrument.
For further information on PHABRIX products, please refer to the PHABRIX web page:https://www.phabrix.com/products

Notice
The information in this document has been produced by PHABRIX Ltd with care and is believed to beaccurate. PHABRIX Ltd does not assume responsibility for loss or damage resulting from errors,omissions or inaccuracies herein. This document is subject to change, and revisions may be madeand issued to include such changes.
No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any formor by any means, electronic, mechanical, recorded or otherwise without the prior written consent of
PHABRIX Ltd.
Copyright © PHABRIX Ltd. All rights reserved. Software products licensed are owned by PHABRIX
Ltd and are protected by international treaty provisions and national copyright laws.
PHABRIX® Limited
Omega HouseEnterprise Way,
Thatcham, Berkshire
RG19 4AE
United Kingdom

Page ii

Phone: + 44 (0)1635 873030
Email: support@phabrix.com
Web: https://www.phabrix.com

PHABRIX Qx User ManualTrademarks
Dolby and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. The following are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation:l

Dolby®

l

Dolby Atmos®

l

Dolby Digital®

l

Dolby Digital Plus™

l

Dolby E™

l

Dolby ED2™

HDMI® is the registered trademark of HDMI Licensing and is used within the document for
identification purposes only.
RealVNC® and VNC® are registered trademarks of RealVNC Ltd.
PHABRIX® is the registered trademark of PHABRIX Limited, A Leader Company.
RTE™ (Real-Time Eye) is a trademark of PHABRIX Limited, A Leader Company.

Acknowledgments
The Dolby Decoder available with the Qx is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page iii

Revision
This manual is a revision controlled document. Any changes to any page content will be reflected in
the overall revision status of the whole manual.
ReleasePage iv

Date

SoftwareVersionUpdates Include:

22a

January2023

4.8

Advanced waveforms; new window slider control in NMOS SDP Rx displays.

21a

July 2022

4.7

Support for: browser remote access using noVNC; Rx of up to four 2110-30/31 audio flows; generation of EUHD Formats in 2110 mode, exFAT formatted USB sticks.

20a

March 2022

4.6

Support for Dolby® E Audio by optional Dolby Decoder in Analyzer - Audio Meters instrument
and separate Analyzer - Dolby Metadata instrument.

19aMarch 2022

4.5

Enhanced NMOS configuration with NMOS Receiver (SDP and IS05). Optional PCAP Packet capture for IP analysis. Selectable ATC-LTC or ATC-VITC.

18b

September
2021

4.3.1

Support for detection of Dolby ED2 and bug fixes.

18a

May 2021

4.3

Support of additional SDI and IP standards; automatic video format detection and comparison of
SDP and manual override parameters.

17c

February
2021

4.2.2

Minor bug fixes, please see Release Notes

17a

November2020

4.1

Addition of Dual PTP (2110) and Loudness Instruments. Support for DVI KVM Extenders.

16b

June 2020

3.4.1

Remote Qx software upgrade using SFTP. Enhancements to IP and NMOS Date and Input Namein Message Center of Picture and Picture - Copy Instrument.

16aMarch 2020

3.4

Support for Networked Media Open Specification (NMOS) network protocols: AMWA IS-04 Discovery and Registration and AMWA IS-05 Device Connection Management.

15b

April 2020

3.3.1

Eye time cursors available with the SDI Stress Testing toolset. By installing this release, subsequent releases can be installed remotely using SFTP.

15a

March 2020

3.3

Support of closed caption standards CEA-608 and CEA-708 and OP47 (RDD-08); support ofdual language closed caption review in dual picture window (picture and picture copy withsecond language overlay); safe area indicator; ATC timecode extract and on-screen display inpicture window, and SCTE104 trigger indicators – detection and on-screen indication.

14a

12 December
2019

3.2

Enhanced IP ST 2110 Measurement capabilities (PHQXO-IP-MEAS) including: 2110-21 receive
VRX, Cmax measure, advanced video timing, dual port interpacket timing windows, enhanced
PTP (manual selection and crash lock mechanism), Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) support, Source Specific Multicast and PTP timing vs external reference.

13a

11 November
2019

3.1

Suite of new tools for 12G SDI Stress Analysis. Includes control of individual BNC outputs,
USB file manager, automated Eye overshoot measurements, new Jitter waveform histogram,
addition of new high-frequency pathological test signal (CLK).

12k

16 July 2019

3.0

Suite of new tools for SMPTE ST 2110/2022-7 IP analysis.

11e

10 June 2019

2.6

Advanced SDI Stress Toolset: Eye Amplitude Window, Shorth Mean analysis option; Adjustable
Slew rate for generated signal. Support for Quad Link 1.5G Square Division video standards. SLog3 version of ITU-R BT.2111-0 HDR Color Bars test pattern added. PRBS Analysis now supports
SDI SFPs, and ‘auto scan’ mode for BNCs. Dolby E timing line number display in Audio Meters.
Qx Restart GUI selection. SFP Configuration Database Reset.

10

7 Feb 2019

2.5

Generator Configuration (New UI with Video and Audio tabs), enhanced support for user test
image files, 12G-SDI SFP Support for dual Rx, dual Tx and transceivers. Loop SDI In-to-Out (BNC).
ANC Inspector, enhanced ANC Status, AES IO Config, Audio Channel Status, Generator Status(audio status added), OP47 Closed Captions display in Picture. Customizable positioning of Nits
V Scale in Waveform.

9d

10 Sep 2018

2.4

Advanced SDI Stress Toolset: Advanced SDI Generation control & analysis, Jitter Insertion,
PRBS Mode, Pathological Detect with GPI triggering. Sync Bit Removal, SDI output copy, Image
parameter overrides moved to 'Analyzer - Video Standard', input cable length measurement,
extended CRC Analysis features. New Rec. 2020 SDR video standards, new S-Log3 video
standards, new ITU-R test patterns for HDR. Nits graticule for SDR (Gamma), HLG, PQ, SR-Live, SLog3 added to Waveform, Rec.2020 targets in Vectorscope. User markers added to Vectorscope and Waveform; center on Vectorscope markers. Vectorscope Cb Cr markers displayedin Waveform.

PHABRIX Qx User ManualRelease

Date

SoftwareVersionUpdates Include:

8

4 May 2018

2.2

Screen capture, moving test patterns, layout Presets, VNC, SFTP, web browser. New HLG video
standards, new Rec. 2020 support, PsF video standards. Audio monitoring on SDI Instrument
Output. Diffuse White Marker in Waveform for HDR standards. Extended REST API support for2022-6 IP instrument suite.

7

21 Dec 2017

2.0.1

32-channel Audio Generation. Extended REST API support for audio generation, and CRC error
reporting. Cursors linking Picture, Dataview, and Waveform. Qx factory default setting.

6a

6 Nov 2017

2.0

New 2022-6 IP instrument suite. Support for 1.5 & 3G standards over IP. Support for IP Transmit
reference locking. IP Decapsulated SDI timing against reference with Input Measurement Offset. SDI/IP mode firmware switching. CIE Chart pan and zoom.

5

7 Sep 2017

1.0.3

Driver Calibration description

4

21 Aug 2017

1.0.3

HDR Heat-map, CIE 1931 x y Chart, HDR/WCG additions for Waveform and Vectorscope, and
new PQ video standards. REST API for remote control and automation. CRC Analysis framechange detection added.

3

20 Jun 2017

1.0.2

Reference locking support with Output offset adjustment. Input timing against reference with
Input Measurement Offset.

2

21 Mar 2017

1.0.1.227

Addition of Waveform, Vectorscope, HDMI audio and new video standards.

1

23 Jan 2017

1.0.0.196

First release of manual

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page v

General Safety Information
General Safety

Avoiding Personal Injury
Warning: This instrument is designed for use by qualified personnel only.
No internal user-serviceable parts are provided. Units should be returned to your local PHABRIX
agent for servicing.
The Operator must NOT remove the case from the unit as this will invalidate the warranty.
Do not spill any liquid onto the unit or its power adapter.
Warning: Do not look directly into the fiber optic connections of cable as this may cause
permanent damage to the eyes.

Power Supply
Make sure that the unit is connected to the correct power supply voltage. A power supply adapter is
supplied with the unit which may be connected to any AC power supply between 100 and 240 VAC at50-60 Hz. Only the supplied power adapter should be used with the unit. Do not use a damaged AC
cable with the unit as it may cause a shock or fire hazard. Replacement AC cables are available fromyour local PHABRIX agent.

Internal Battery
The unit includes a 3 V Lithium battery (type CR1225) to maintain the system clock and ensure
memory persistence in the event of mains power loss. Return the unit to PHABRIX in the event thatthe battery needs replacing.

Installation Environment
Operating Temperature

Warning: The unit should only be operated between 0 and 40° Celsius, non-condensing. If theunit is operated at a higher temperature, there is a possibility of a fire hazard. If the temperature ischanged rapidly from a cold environment to a hot environment, moisture can be createdinternally which can cause malfunction or damage the unit. Allow the unit to sit for 30 minutes
without power applied to reduce any possibility of condensation. If the internal component
temperature rises above 85° Celsius the unit will switch OFF automatically.

Input / Output Terminals

Do not connect the input or output BNC connectors to external power as this can damage the internal
circuitry and cause the unit to work incorrectly.
Page vi

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

The BNC connectors fitted on this unit are 75 ohm type which are not compatible with 50 ohm plugs.
Warning: The use of 50 ohm plugs will permanently damage the connectors on the unit. The useof 50 ohm plugs is considered to be misuse of the equipment and will therefore invalidate theunit’s warranty.

When Not In Use
Disconnect the unit from the power supply and AC power source when not in use.

Maintenance

Wipe the case gently with a soft, lint-free cloth, lightly dampened with a neutral cleaning agent. A
screen cleaning cloth may be used to clean the LCD. Do not apply force to the LCD when cleaning or
it may be damaged.
Warning: Remove the power supply from the unit and switch OFF before cleaning. Do not allow
any water or other liquid to enter the unit while cleaning.

RoHS 2 Compliance
PHABRIX products are designed and manufactured using only Restriction of Hazardous Substances(RoHS) compliant components and materials. Based on information provided by our suppliers,
therefore, PHABRIX certifies that ALL products that it manufactures are RoHS-5 compliant and thatthey do not exceed the designated levels of lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium,polybrominated biphenyl (PBB) and polybrominated diphenyl ether flame retardants (PBDE) legislated
under the provisions of the “European Parliament and Council Directive” on the “Restriction of the
Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (2011/65/EC)” andassociated regulations collectively known as the RoHS Regulations.

Disposal of Equipment

This product is subject to the European WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment)
directive and should be disposed of according to the regulations of each country.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page vii

Table of Contents
Preface
About this Manual
Noticeii

Trademarksiii

Acknowledgmentsiii

Revision

iv

ii
ii

General Safety Informationvi
vi

General Safety
Avoiding Personal Injury

viPower Supply

vi

Internal BatteryviInstallation Environmentvi

Operating Temperaturevi

Input / Output Terminalsvi

When Not In Use

vii

Maintenancevii

RoHS 2 Compliancevii

Disposal of Equipmentvii

1
Getting Started
Getting Started Quick Reference

1-1
1-1
1-2

What's in the Box?

1-2

Mounting the Unit

1-2

Desktop Mounting

1-2

Rack Mounting

1-2

Overview of the Qx Rear Panel Connectors

1-4

Connecting Essential Cables to the Unit

1-5

Powering-up the Qx

1-7

SDI and IP Connections

1-8

Connecting for an SDI Installation Using BNC Connectors

1-8Connecting for an SDI or IP Installation Using SFP Modules

1-9Powering-down the Unit

1-10

2
Working with the User Interface
Overview of the Product Structure and Options

2-1
2-1
2-2

Introduction

2-2

Toolsets and Instruments

2-2Standard Toolsets

2-3Standard Toolset

2-3

SDI and Reference Toolset

2-3Advanced Qx Toolsets

2-4

Audio and Video Generation Toolset

2-4

Dolby Analysis Toolset

2-4

12G-SDI Physical Layer Analysis Toolset

2-4

SDI Stress Testing Toolset

2-4

IP Toolsets

2-5Standard IP Monitoring Toolset for IP 2110 and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes

Page viii

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

2-5

IP Network Traffic Toolset for Standards ST 2110 and ST 2022-6

2-6

IP Packet Capture (PCAP) Toolset in IP 2110 Boot Mode

2-6

Packet Interval Profile Generator Toolset for Standard ST 2022-6

2-6

Media-related Toolsets

2-7

Advanced HDR Visualization and Analysis Toolset

2-7

UHD Formats Toolset

2-7

Accessing the Qx Instruments

2-8

Overview of the Qx Main Screen

2-8

Using the Instrument Launch Menu

2-9

Using the Instrument Bar

2-11

Using the Instrument Bar Options Menu

2-11

Controlling the Audio Monitoring Source

2-12

System Time and Date Display

2-13

Using System State Presets and the Preset Bar

2-13
2-13

Reordering Presets
Renaming Presets

2-14

Other Preset Tasks

2-15

Overview of the Instrument Windows
Changing the Border Color of Instrument Windows

2-16
2-16

Working with the Qx Instruments

2-17

Selecting Submenu Options and Entering Values

2-18

Resizing an Instrument Window

2-19

Using the Instrument Scroll Bars and Scroll Control Menu

2-20

Using the Window Panel Slider Controls

2-21

Taking Screenshots

2-21

Working with Instrument Tabs

2-21

Instrument Icon Quick Reference3
Configuring and Checking the Unit
Qx Network and Automation

2-23
3-1
3-1
3-2

Overview

3-2

Using Virtual Network Computing (noVNC or VNC) for Remote Access

3-2

Instrument Menu Options

3-3

Setting the Time, Date and NTP Server
Setting-up the Display

3-5
3-6
3-6

Modifying the Display Options

Checking the Unit

3-8

Overview

3-8

Checking the System Health Status

3-8

Checking the Unit Licenses

3-9

Restarting the Unit

3-10

Reverting to Factory Default Settings

3-10

Switching Between Boot Modes

3-11

Resetting the SFP Configuration Database

3-13

Upgrading the Unit

3-15

Upgrading the System Software and Firmware

3-15

Remote Upgrade Using SFTP

3-16

Upgrading the Software Options

3-16

Managing Files with the USB File Manager
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

3-19

Page ix

3-19

Overview
Opening the USB File Manager

3-19

Copying Files from the Unit to USB

3-20

Uploading Files from USB to the Unit

3-21

Deleting Files from the Unit

3-21

Packet Capture (PCAP)

3-22

Overview

3-22

Opening the PCAP Dialog

3-22

Starting a PCAP Recording

3-24

Instrument Menu

3-25

Event Logging on the Unit

3-26

Overview

3-26

SDI Boot Mode

3-27

IP Boot Modes

3-27

Remote Connection to the Unit

3-28

Overview

3-28

Available Functionality

3-29

Using Virtual Network Computing (VNC)

3-29

Enabling VNC on the Unit

3-29

Connecting to the Unit Using noVNC from a Web Browser

3-29

Using a Generic VNC Client to Connect Remotely to the Unit

3-31

Using SFTP

3-31
3-31

Connecting to the Unit Using SFTP

3-32

Using a Web Browser
Connecting to the Unit Using a Web Browser

4
SDI System Setup and Configuration
SDI Connections to the Unit

4-1
4-1
4-2

Overview

4-2

SDI Input and Output Schematic (SDI Boot Mode)

4-3

SDI Input / Output Configurations (SDI Modes)

4-4

SDI Inputs Using BNC Connectors

4-5

SDI Outputs Using BNC Connectors

4-5

Overview of SDI SFP Connections

4-7

SDI Inputs Using SFP Connectors

4-9

SDI Outputs Using SFP Connectors

4-10

System IO for SDI Modes

4-11

Overview

4-11

System IO for SDI Modes

4-11

Instrument Menu Options

4-11

Generator Copy and SDI Out Configuration

4-14

AES IO Config (SDI & IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)

4-17

Overview

4-17

Instrument Menu Options

4-18

Video Timing & System Reference (SDI Mode)

Page x

3-32

4-19

Overview

4-19

Video Timing in SDI Mode

4-19

SDI A vs System Reference

4-19

SDI Co-Timing

4-19

Instrument Menu Options

4-20

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

SFP (A, B) - Info (SDI Modes)

4-21

Overview

4-21

Instrument Menu Options

4-21

5
IP System Setup and Configuration
IP Connectors and Modules

5-1
5-1
5-2

Overview

5-2

IP Input and Output (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

5-3

IP Input and Output (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

5-4

IP Interfaces to the Unit

5-5
5-5

Overview
ST 2110 Input Optical SFP Interfaces (Analyzer - IP 2110 Boot Mode)

5-5

ST 2022-6 Input (Rx) Optical SFP Connection (Analyzer - IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

5-6

ST 2022-6 Output (Tx) Optical SFP Connection (Generator - IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

5-6

System IO for IP Modes

5-7

Overview

5-7

System IO for IP Boot Modes

5-7

SFP IP Network

5-8

Overview

5-8

Instrument Menu Options

5-8

LLDP Information

5-11

Overview

5-11

Instrument Menu Options

5-12

SFP (A, B) - Info (IP Modes)

5-13

Overview

5-13

Instrument Menu Options

5-13

NMOS Status Overview & Configuration (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

5-14

Overview

5-14

Instrument Menu Options

5-17

NMOS Receivers - SDP (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

5-19

Overview

5-19

NMOS Receivers - SDP

5-19
5-21

Saving SDP Records to Disk

5-22

Instrument Menu Options

NMOS Receivers - IS05 (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

5-23

Overview

5-23

NMOS Receivers - IS05

5-23

Instrument Menu Options

5-25

SFP A/B - PTP Info (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

5-26
5-26

Overview
GM Info Tab

5-27

Qx Status Tab

5-28

PTP Messaging Tab

5-28

Instrument Menu Options

5-29

Video Timing & System Reference (IP Boot Modes)

5-32

Overview

5-32

Timing in IP 2022-6 Boot Mode: Decapsulated vs System Reference

5-32
5-33

Instrument Menu Options
Video Timing & Setting External Reference in IP Boot 2110 Mode

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

5-35

Page xiOverview

5-35

External Reference vs PTP Tab

5-35

Instrument Menu Options

5-35

IP Receive - Flow Select5-37

Overview

5-37

Instrument Menu Options

5-39

Multicast Setup (Multicast Requests)

5-41
5-41

Using the Instrument Controls
Flow Protocol Configuration (Flow Config)

5-43

Using the Flow Config Controls

5-43

NMOS Flow Configuration (NMOS Flow Config)

Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

5-46

Overview

5-46

Video Tab

5-46

Audio Tab

5-48

Instrument Menu Options

5-50

Video Timing & System Reference (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

5-52

Overview

5-52

Video Timing in IP 2110 Boot Mode

5-53

Overview

5-53

Media Latency Tab

5-53

Instrument Menu Options

5-55

AES IO Config (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

5-56

Overview

5-56

Instrument Menu Options

5-57

6
Signal Generation Instruments
Generate - Video

6-1
6-1
6-2

Overview

6-2

SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes

6-2

Filtering the Generator Display

6-3

Resetting the Sort Order of the Column Filters

6-4

Test Patterns

6-4

User Test Patterns and Images

6-6

Generator Copy and SDI Out Configuration

6-6

Insertion of SMPTE ST352 Payload IDs

6-6

Pathological Signal Insertion

6-7

Output Offset Adjustment (SDI Modes)

6-8

Generate - Audio

6-9

Overview

6-9

Configuration Table Options

6-10

Instrument Menu Options

6-11

Generator - Status (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes Only)

6-13
6-13

Overview

IP Transmit (SFP B) (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

6-14

Overview

6-14

Instrument Menu Options

6-15

Network Settings

6-15

7Page xii

5-45

7-1

PHABRIX Qx User ManualStandard Analysis Instruments
Analyzer - Video Standard (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes Only)

7-1
7-2

Overview

7-2

Manual Override Tab

7-2

Instrument Menu Options

7-3

Setting the Payload Identifier

7-4

Resetting the Sort Order of the Video Standards Column Filters

7-4

Stats - SDI In A, B, C, D (SDI Boot Mode)

7-5
7-5

Overview

Stats - IP Receive (SFP A) (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

7-6
7-6

Overview

8
Network Analysis Instruments
Analyzer - 2022-7 Status (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

8-1
8-1
8-2

Overview

8-2

Instrument Menu Options

8-4

SFP (A, B) - Network Stats

8-5
8-5

Overview

9
Content Analysis Instruments
Analyzer - Picture

9-1
9-1
9-2
9-2

Overview
Instrument Menu Options

9-3

Using Closed Captions

9-6

Using Dual Picture Instruments

9-7

Monitoring Closed Captions in Dual Picture Instrument Windows

9-8

Picture Cursor

9-9

Using the Picture Safe Areas

9-9
9-11

Displaying the Picture Safe Areas

9-11

Using the Message Center
SCTE 104 Packet Detection

9-12

Defining Source Input Names

9-12

Displaying the Ancillary Time Code (ATC)9-13

On Video Loss (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

9-14

Analyzer - Waveform

9-15

Overview

9-15

About the Display Modes

9-16

Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Scales

9-16

Using Full-width Screen Mode

9-17

Using the Custom Display Mode Configuration Menu

9-18
9-19

About the Waveform Modes
Using the Zoom and Panning Controls with the Mouse Scroll Wheel

9-21

Using Picture and Dataview with the Waveform Instrument

9-22

Using the Vectorscope with the Waveform Instrument

9-24

Instrument Menu Options

9-25

Analyzer - Vectorscope

9-31

Overview

9-31

Instrument Menu Options

9-31

Analyzer - CRC Analysis (SDI Boot Mode)
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

9-34

Page xiii

Overview

9-34

Instrument Menu Options

9-35

10
Audio Signal Analysis Instruments
Analyzer - Audio Channel Status

10-1
10-1
10-2
10-2

Overview
Raw Data Display

10-4

Instrument Menu Options

10-4

Analyzer - Audio Meters

10-5
10-5

Overview
Audio Group Metering (IP 2110 Boot Mode Only)

10-7

Using the Dolby E Decoder

10-9

Instrument Menu Options

10-12

Analyzer - Loudness Monitor

10-16

Overview

10-16

Summary Loudness Monitoring Process

10-18

Audio Assignment for Loudness Monitoring

10-18

Audio Meters for Loudness Inputs

10-20

Understanding the Loudness Meters and Values

10-20

True Peak Value

10-22

Momentary Loudness Value and Error Count

10-23

Short-term Loudness Value and Error Count

10-23

Integrated Loudness Value and Error Count

10-23

Loudness Range Value

10-23

Using the Loudness Controls

10-24

Using the Loudness History Graph

10-24

Resetting Loudness Values and Errors

10-25Managing the Loudness Log Files

10-25

Retrieving the Loudness Log Files

10-26

Renaming the Loudness Logfile Base Name

10-27

Instrument Menu Options

10-28

Analyzer - Dolby Metadata

10-33

Overview

10-33

About Dolby Metadata

10-34

Dolby E

10-34

Dolby ED2

10-35

Instrument Menu Options

10-35

Dolby Program Metadata Display

10-36

Generic Information

10-36

Dolby Gain Metadata

10-37

Dolby Program Metadata

10-37

11
Data Analysis Instruments
Analyzer - Dataview

11-1
11-1
11-2

Overview

11-2

Instrument Menu Options

11-3

Analyzer - Ancillary Status

11-5

Overview

11-5

Instrument Menu Options

11-6

Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector

11-9Page xiv

PHABRIX Qx User ManualOverview

11-9

Instrument Menu Options

11-10

12
IP Network Traffic Measurement
IP Receive - Interpacket Timing

12-1
12-1
12-2

Overview

12-2

Interpacket Timing in IP 2022-6 Boot Mode

12-3

Instrument Menu Options (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode )

12-3
12-4

Interpacket Timing in IP 2110 Boot Mode
Instrument Menu Options (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

Analyzer - 2110-21 Status (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

12-5
12-7

Overview

12-7

Measurements and Instrument Menu Options

12-8

Measurement Prechecks

12-8

Network Compatibility Model Measurement (CINST)

12-8

Virtual Receiver Buffer Measurement (VRX)

12-10

Advanced Media Timing Measurement (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

12-13

Overview

12-13

Using the Advanced Video Timing Tab

12-14

Using the Advanced Media Latency Tab

12-14

Instrument Menu Options

12-16

13
12G Physical Layer Analysis
Eye - SDI In A (Physical Layer Analysis Mode)

13-1
13-1
13-2

Overview

13-2

Instrument Menu Options

13-3

Jitter - SDI In A (Physical Layer Analysis Mode)

13-5

Overview

13-5

Instrument Menu Options

13-6

14
Stress-testing Analysis Instruments
Advanced Generation Tools (SDI Boot Mode - Stress Option)

14-1
14-1
14-2

Overview

14-2

Advanced Generation Tools Options

14-3

Eye - SDI In A (SDI Boot Mode - Stress Option)

14-6
14-6

Overview

14-7

Using the Eye Time Cursors

14-8

Instrument Menu Options

PRBS Analysis (SDI Boot Mode - Stress Option)

14-11

Overview

14-11

Instrument Menu Options

14-11

15
HDR Analysis Instruments
Advanced HDR Toolset

15-1
15-1
15-2

Overview

15-2

HDR Test Patterns

15-2

Transfer Curve and Colorimetry Overrides

15-3

Analyzer - CIE Chart

15-4

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page xv

Overview

15-4

Instrument Menu Options

15-4

HDR Heat-map (False Color Overlay)

15-7

Instrument Options (HDR)

16
Additional System Information
Using the REST API for Remote Access

16-1
16-1
16-2

Activating the REST API

16-2

Connecting Using the REST API

16-2

Using REST API Requests

16-3

Using REST API Requests in SDI Boot Mode

16-3

Using REST API Requests in IP 2022-6 Boot Mode

16-4

Using REST API Requests in IP 2110 Boot Mode

16-4

Driver Calibration

16-6

Overview

16-6

SDI Output Calibration Steps

16-6

A
Technical Specifications

A-1
A-1

Power

A-2

External Locking Reference

A-2

SDI Instrument Output

A-2

HDMI Instrument Output

A-2

USB

A-3

Networking

A-3

Rear panel D26

A-3

GPIO

A-5

AES I/O

A-5

Longitudinal Timecode (LTC)

A-5

Analog Audio Output

A-5

B
Advanced Media Timing Information

B-1
B-1

Overview

B-2

Advanced Media Timing Definitions

B-2

Video IP Packet Timing Schematics

B-2

Measurements in the Video Timing Tab

B-5

Video Timing (First Packet Time) Measurement

B-5

Margin Measurement

B-7

RTP Offset Measurement

B-7
B-8

Measurements in the Media Latency Tab

B-8

Media Latency Measurement
RTP Clock and Timestamps

B-9

RTP Clocks per Timestamp Quotient (RTP / TS)

B-10

Working with Non-integer Frame Rates

B-11

Un-locked Media Sources

B-12

Sources Not Locked to PTP

B-12

C
On-going Development

C-1
C-1

SMPTE UHDTV: SDI Physical Layer Tolerances

D
Page xvi

15-6

C-1
D-1

PHABRIX Qx User ManualSupported SFPs
E
Supported Video Standards

D-1
E-1
E-1

2K/HD Supported Formats

E-1

4K/UHD Supported Formats

E-5

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page xvii

1
Getting Started
This chapter describes how to connect your unit to get it up and running and includes the following
sections:lGetting Started Quick ReferencelWhat's in the BoxlMounting the Unitl

Overview of the Rear Panel ConnectorslConnecting Essential Cables to the UnitlPowering-up the Unitl

SDI and IP ConnectionslPowering-down the Unit

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 1-1

Getting Started Quick Reference
What's in the Box?
On receipt of your shipment, proceed as follows:
1. Check the external packaging for any visible signs of damage.
Should you find any damage, contact the courier immediately.
2. Carefully open the packaging and check that it contains the following standard items:l

One Qx unit; either:ll

PHABRIX Qx chassis: PHQX01-3G (with HD/2K SD / 10 GbE IP Rasterizer, Analyzer
only) or
PHABRIX Qx chassis: PHQX01E-3G (with HD/2K SD / 10 GbE IP Rasterizer, Eye andJitter Physical Layer Analysis, Analyzer only.)l

One XLR power cord.

l

One AC power adapter (90 - 264 VAC, 120 W)l

PHABRIX USB stick containing standard software with any ordered software options andUser Manual in PDF format.

3. Check all optional items against your order form or invoice.
4. If you suspect optional items are missing, contact your Distributor or PHABRIX support at:https://phabrix.com/support/
5. Complete the Product Registration form available at:https://phabrix.com/support/product-registration

Mounting the Unit
You can install the Qx as a standalone unit on a desktop or rack-mount the unit or units using one of
the following optional rack-mounting kits:ll

For a single unit, use both options:l

19 inch rack mount kit (PHQXK1)l

Mounting kit - 9.5 inch rack (PHQXK3)

For two units:l

19 inch rack mount kit (PHQXK2)Desktop Mounting
To desk mount a standalone unit, place it on a clean, level dust-free surface and connect the cables
as described in the section "Connecting Essential Cables to the Unit" on page 1-5. Ensure that the unit
is positioned to allow sufficient airflow for cooling purposes.

Rack Mounting
To rack-mount one or more units in a 19 inch rack, follow the procedure in the instruction guideincluded with the mounting hardware. Ensure that the unit(s) have an unrestricted airflow and accessto the power connectors in the rack.

Page 1-2

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 1-1: Single Rack Mount Tray with Cover (Option PHQXK1)

Figure 1-2: Dual Rack Mount (Option PHQXK2)PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 1-3

Overview of the Qx Rear Panel Connectors

Figure 1-3: Qx Rear Panel Connectors

The Qx rear panel connectors are described in the following table:
Table 1-1 : Key to Qx Rear Panel Connectors
No.

Connector

No.

Connector

1

Generator/Duplicate SDI or Input SDI Loop
Outputs Supported formats: HD, 3G, 6G, 12G.
SDI 75 R BNC Connectors x 47Micro USB
(Factory Service)2

Analyzer SDI Inputs
Supported formats: HD, 3G, 6G, 12G
SDI 75 R BNC Connectors x 4

8

HDMI Instrument Output(To 1080p60)
Also supports auto DVI mode over HDMI toconnect DVI KVM Extenders for remote
installations.

3

SDI In A Eye Signal
Supported formats: HD, 3G, 6G, 12G

9Reference Loop
75R BNC x 2

4Analyzer IP or SDI Inputs and/or Generator IP
or SDI outputs(SFP+ SDI up to 12G, 12 Gbps copper, fiber, or
10G Ethernet).

10

SDI Copy Instrument Output
75R BNC
Formats: 1080p 50, 59.94, 60 3G-SDI

5

AC Power Socket (10 - 18 V)

11

USB 2.0 Ports x2

6

Stereo Audio Out
LTC In, 8x GPI I/O, 4x AES I/O
For details of the connector pinouts, see
Appendix A.

12Control Network / Management Port
10 / 100 / 1000 Base T

Note:
The following interfaces are unavailable in this software release:

Page 1-4l

LTC Inl

SDI instrument output (unavailable in IP 2110 boot-up mode only.)

PHABRIX Qx User ManualConnecting Essential Cables to the Unit
After unpacking your Qx unit, you can get it up and running either as a standalone instrument on adesktop, or mounted in a rack, using the appropriate mounting kit, if ordered.
Proceed as follows to obtain an output to a video display using the connectors shown in Figure 1-4
below:

Figure 1-4: Qx Minimum Rear Panel Connectors

Connect the cables to the rear panel as follows:
1. Connect a suitable 1920 x 1080 capable monitor to either the HDMI instrument output or the
SDI instrument output. Both display outputs carry the selected audio monitoring channel/pair.
The monitor output can be configured for 1080p60, 1080p59.94 or 1080p50 frame rates using
the Display Options submenu available from the Instrument Launch Menu. Either:llConnect an HDMI type A cable to the female HDMI connector on the rear of the Qx andthe other end to your video monitor to obtain the instrument display, orConnect an SDI BNC cable to the SDI Instrument output connector on the rear of the Qx
and the other end to your video monitor to obtain the instrument display.

Note: The HDMI output supports auto DVI mode over HDMI to connect
DVI KVM Extenders for remote installations.
2. Connect USB mouse/keyboard cables to the USB connectors on the rear of the Qx for mouseand keyboard control.
3. Connect an RJ45 cable to the management port. This enables you to access and control theunit remotely and to set the unit time using NTP.
4. Connect the four-pin, XLR power connector, on the power cord supplied with the unit, to thepower socket on the unit.
5. Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to a mains AC power outlet.
6. Switch on the power.
The unit will automatically start to power-up.
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 1-5

These are the minimum connections you need to power-up the Qx, obtain an output to theconnected video display and control the Qx user interface.

Page 1-6

PHABRIX Qx User ManualPowering-up the Qx
Once connected to a power source, press the Power button on the front panel of the unit.
You should see the status LED, behind the power button, light in the following sequence:l

Blue: Initial Start-uplYellow (Blinking): ConfiguringlWhite: Running

When the you first press the Power Button on the front panel, the unit's fans will cycle for 20 to 30
seconds at high speed as the system boots, then settle to their normal operating speed.

Figure 1-5: Qx Front Panel

During standard operation, the Power button LED provides an indication of the current status of theunit. The following table lists some of the LED colors you may see and provides a description of theunit's status at that point.
Table 1-2 : Qx Power LED Status Indicators
LED Color

DescriptionWhite

Qx running well.

Magenta

Qx upgrading software / firmware.

Cyan

Qx busy.

Blue

Qx busy, for example, during Initial start-up sequence.

Yellow

Qx busy, for example, configuring modules and checking licenses. Do notswitch off.

Red

Fault. Contact PHABRIX Support if red LED stays lit or continuously flashes
red.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 1-7

SDI and IP Connections
A key advantage of the Qx is that it includes both Generator and Analyzer, so this guide to the
product considers both toolsets simultaneously.

Connecting for an SDI Installation Using BNC Connectors
For this guide we will assume that you have connected the unit to itself as shown in the following
diagrams for SDI (BNC or SFP) or IP 2022-6 optical SFP use. For dual link SDI standards also connect
SDI Out B to SDI In B, and for quad link SDI standards, connect all four outputs SDI Out A, B, C, D to
SDI In A, B, C, D respectively.

Figure 1-6: Connecting the Internal Qx Generator to the Analyzer Using BNC Connectors

Page 1-8

PHABRIX Qx User ManualConnecting for an SDI or IP Installation Using SFP Modules
For IP 2110 boot mode, both SFP+A and SFP+B are available for decapsulation (reception) and astable source of ST 2059 precision time protocol (PTP) must be available on the network to which
SFP+A is connected.

Figure 1-7: Connecting the Qx Using SFP Modules

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 1-9

Powering-down the Unit
To power-down the unit, press the Power Button on the front panel and the unit will shutdown after 10
seconds. To shutdown immediately, press the power button twice or click the SHUT DOWN NOW
button displayed in the Shutdown window. To stop a shutdown, click Cancel.

Figure 1-8: Unit Shut-down Dialog

Page 1-10

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

2Working with the User Interface
This chapter describes how to use the key features of the user interface and includes the following
sections:l

Overview of the Product StructurelOverview of the Main ScreenlUsing the Instrument Launch MenulUsing the Instrument Barl

Overview of the Instrument WindowslWorking with the InstrumentsllWorking with Instrument Tabs

Icon Quick Reference

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-1

Overview of the Product Structure and Options
Introduction
The Qx is a highly-flexible, modular device, which you can custom-build from a diverse palette of bothstandard and optional components.
This chapter introduces these components - the Toolsets, Instruments and Options available with theQx - which you can combine to create a solution that meets the specific demands of your media test
and measurement environment.

Toolsets and Instruments
In essence, each Qx Instrument is a standalone utility or application designed to provide a specificsolution to a test and measurement task. For example, the Qx provides Instruments to analyze thepicture display or waveform; generate video or audio test signals; decode auxiliary data; provide
status information and so on. You can adapt or modify the functioning of all Instruments using theconfiguration parameters available in the Instrument right-click submenus.
The Qx Toolsets group together Instruments at a higher functional level to assist with defining yourideal configuration.
It is important to note that Toolsets outside the standard Toolset(s) require additional Options(hardware or software) to enable you to install the license for that Toolset. In addition, you may needto restart the unit in a different Boot Mode to activate some of the Toolsets described in the following
sections.
As standard, the Qx offers a flexible, user-defined, Instrument layout displaying up to 16 Instrument
windows simultaneously. Furthermore, by saving different operational layouts for specific tasks as
Presets, you can switch easily between bespoke layouts for rapid fault diagnosis, compliancemonitoring and product development.

Page 2-2

PHABRIX Qx User ManualStandard Toolsets
Standard Toolset
The standard or core Toolset provides the following Instruments and associated utilities:lAnalyzer - Ancillary Statusl

Analyzer - Audio Channel Statusl

Analyzer - Audio MeterslAnalyzer - Loudness MonitorlAnalyzer - Picture and Analyzer - Picture CopylAnalyzer - VectorscopelAnalyzer - WaveformlAnalyzer - DataviewlAnalyzer - Ancillary Inspector .

lEvent LogginglNetwork and Automationl

System IOl

AES IO ConfigurationlSupporting standard utilities:l

USB File Managerl

VNC Remote Connectionl

REST API.

SDI and Reference Toolset
The SDI and Reference Toolset provides the following Instruments:lAnalyzer - CRC AnalysislAnalyzer - Video Standard (SDI)lStats - SDI In A, B, C, DlVideo Timing & System Reference (SDI).

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-3

Advanced Qx Toolsets
Audio and Video Generation Toolset
The Audio and Video Generation Toolset provides the following Instruments:
Note: This Toolset requires the software option: PHQXO-GEN.
l

Generator - Configuration (Includes separate tabs for Video and Audio signal generation)lGenerator - Status .

Dolby Analysis Toolset
The Dolby® Analysis Toolset provides the following Instrument:
Note: This Toolset requires the software option: PHQXO-DOLBY.
l

Dolby Decoder available for selection in Analyzer - Audio Meters instrument.

lAnalyzer - Dolby Metadata

12G-SDI Physical Layer Analysis Toolset
The 12G-SDI Physical Layer Analysis Toolset provides the following Instruments:
Note: This Toolset requires the additional hardware option for Eye and Jitter
analysis PHQXM-01E Mezzanine.
l

Eye - SDI In Al

Jitter SDI In A.

SDI Stress Testing Toolset
The SDI Stress Testing Toolset provides the following Instruments and tools:
Note: This Toolset requires the SDI stress testing software option: PHQXO-SDI-STRESS andmust be run in boot mode: SDI.
l

Advanced Generator Tools (Additional submenu item in Generator - Configuration Instrument)lAdvanced Eye Analysis (Additional submenu item in Eye - SDI In A Instrument)l

PRBS AnalysislPage 2-4

Pathological Detection Tools (Additional submenu item in Generator - Configuration Instrument).

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

IP Toolsets
Standard IP Monitoring Toolset for IP 2110 and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes
The Standard IP Monitoring Toolset for IP 2110 and IP 2022-6 boot modes provides the following
Instruments and tools:
Note: This Toolset requires the software option: PHQXO-IP-STND.

SMPTE Standard Supported
in Each Boot Mode
IP Monitoring Toolset Instruments
IP 2110
Boot Mode

IP 2022-6
Boot Mode

Analyzer - 2022-7 Status

ST 2110

ST 2022-6

Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup

ST 2110

N/A

Analyzer - LLDP Data

Yes

Yes

IP Media Latency tool
(Tab in Video Timing & System Reference Instrument)

ST 2110N/A

IP Receive - Flow SelectST 2110

ST 2022-6

NMOS Group including the following instruments:

ST 2110N/A

SFP A / B - PTP Info

ST 2110N/A

SFP A / B Info

Yes

Yes

SFP A / B - Network Stats

Yes

Yes

SFP IP Network

Yes

Yes

Stats - IP Receive (SFP A)

N/A

ST 2022-6

l

NMOS Status Overview and Configurationl

NMOS Receivers - IS05l

NMOS Receivers - SDP

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-5

IP Network Traffic Toolset for Standards ST 2110 and ST 2022-6
The IP Network Traffic Measurement Toolset for SMPTE standards ST 2110 and ST 2022-6 provides
the following Instruments and tools:
Note: This Toolset requires the software option: PHQXO-IP-MEAS.

SMPTE Standard Supported
in Each Boot Mode
IP Network Traffic Analysis Toolset Instruments
IP 2110
Boot Mode

IP 2022-6
Boot Mode

IP Receive - Interpacket Timing

ST 2110

ST 2022-6

Analyzer - 2110-21 Status

ST 2110

N/A

Advanced PTP Media Timing tool
(Tab in Video Timing & System Reference Instrument)

ST 2110N/A

IP Packet Capture (PCAP) Toolset in IP 2110 Boot Mode
The IP PCAP Toolset for ST 2110 provides the following utility for network analysis:
Note: This Toolset requires the software option: PHQXO-IP-PCAP and is available in ST 2110
boot mode.
l

IP PCAP Capture utility

Packet Interval Profile Generator Toolset for Standard ST 2022-6
The ST 2022-6 Packet Interval Profile Generator Instrument Toolset provides the following
Instrument:
Note: This Toolset requires the software options: PHQXO-GEN and PHQXO-IP-NGT and mustbe run in boot mode: IP 2022-6.
lPage 2-6

IP Transmit (SFP B) (ST 2022-6 Only).

PHABRIX Qx User ManualMedia-related Toolsets
Advanced HDR Visualization and Analysis Toolset
The Advanced High Dynamic Range (HDR) Toolset provides the following Instruments and tools:
Note: This Toolset requires the software option: PHQXO-HDR.
lll

False Color Highlighting (Additional submenu item in Analyzer - Picture and Analyzer - Picture
Copy Instruments)
Analyzer CIE Chart.
HDR Waveform and Gen ( Additional submenu items in Generator - Configuration (Video) andAnalyzer - Waveform Instruments).

UHD Formats Toolset
The UHD Formats Toolset provides the following:
Note: This Toolset requires the software option: PHQXO-UHD.
lSupport for UHD/4K formats for SDI

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-7

Accessing the Qx Instruments
Overview of the Qx Main Screen
On first powering-up the unit, you will see the following screen displayed:

Figure 2-1: Initial Qx Screen Following Start-up

The Instrument Launch Menu gives you access to all the test and measurement instruments available
through your license(s).
To open the Instrument Launch Menu, click the PHABRIX button in the bottom-left corner of theInstrument Bar.

Figure 2-2: PHABRIX Button to Open the Instrument Launch Menu

Page 2-8

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Using the Instrument Launch Menu
The Instrument Launch Menu provides access to the test and measurement Instruments and othersystem menus available with your unit. Open the Instrument Launch Menu by clicking the PHABRIX
button in the bottom-left corner of the screen.

Figure 2-3: Open Launch Menu

The unit includes three possible boot modes and each boot mode includes a different combination of
options in the Instrument Launch Menu. For more information on the different boot modes, see thesection: "Switching Between Boot Modes" on page 3-11.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-9

On start up, you will see the following SDI Instrument Launch Menu, displayed by default:

Figure 2-4: Qx Launch Menu in SDI Boot Mode

Each Instrument available in the menu is listed alongside its designated icon. Options listed at the topof the menu, without icons, provide access to system menus and actions, such as switching the bootmode or reverting to default settings.
When you select an instrument from the Instrument Launch menu, the Instrument window opens andits icon is displayed in the Instrument Bar at the bottom of the screen.
As you select each new instrument, the Qx adds another icon to the Instrument Bar.

Figure 2-5: Qx Instrument Bar Showing Icons for Active Instruments

Page 2-10

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Using the Instrument Bar
As you open an Instrument from the Instrument Launch Menu, the unit adds the corresponding icon
for that Instrument to the Instrument Bar. To identify the Instrument corresponding to an icon, simply
hover the mouse over the icon and the unit displays a tooltip showing the name of that Instrument.
You can use the Instrument icons to bring a particular Instrument window into focus, a useful feature if
you have a number of Instruments overlapping on the display. On finishing with an Instrument, rightclick its icon and select the option Close "Instrument Name".

Figure 2-6: Key Components of the Instrument Bar

To give Instruments in the lower part of the display more screen space, you can hide the Instrument
Bar by left-clicking in any of the blank sections of the Bar. Move the cursor back to the bottom of thescreen, at any time, to redisplay the Instrument Bar.
In addition, the unit displays any configuration presets you define in a Presets Bar, below theInstrument Bar, depending on the setting of the option Auto-hide Presets in the Instrument Bar
Options menu. For more information on saving Presets, see "Using System State Presets and the
Preset Bar" on page 2-13

Using the Instrument Bar Options Menu
Further options to control the Instrument and Preset bars are available by right-clicking in theInstrument Bar to display the Instrument Bar Options menu, shown below:

Figure 2-7: Instrument Bar Options Menu

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-11

You can close all Instrument windows together by right-clicking the Instrument Bar and selecting theoption Close All Windows from the menu. In addition, you can also choose to minimize all open
instruments to icons in the Instrument Bar by selecting the option Minimize All Windows.
When the Auto-hide Presets checkbox in the Options menu is selected, the Presets bar remains
hidden when the Instrument Bar is active. To view any saved Presets, uncheck the Auto-hide Presets
checkbox. For more information on saving system Presets, see the section: "Using System State
Presets and the Preset Bar" on the facing page.

Controlling the Audio Monitoring Source
An icon to control the Audio Monitoring Source is displayed at the right-hand side of the Instrument
Bar, before the time and date display. The audio monitoring icon controls the audio monitoring outputof the unit, whether monitoring over HDMI, SDI instrument monitor output, or 26-way D-type. Clickonce to mute or unmute the audio monitoring source.
The audio monitoring source icon changes to display the current status of the audio source as shownin the following table:
Table 2-1 : Audio Source Monitoring Icon States
Audio Icon State

Description
Standard state, audio source active (unmuted).

Audio source muted (inactive).

Audio source active (unmuted) with volume slider control displayed.

Hover over the audio icon to display a tooltip showing the current audio Source channel/pairselected.
To adjust the volume of the audio monitoring source, right-click the Audio icon to display a sliding
volume control. Drag the slider left or right to adjust the volume of the audio monitoring source as
required.

Figure 2-8: Adjusting the Volume of the Audio Monitoring Source

Use the Analyzer - Audio Meters Instrument to select the target audio monitoring source.

Page 2-12

PHABRIX Qx User ManualSystem Time and Date Display
The system date and time are displayed in the bottom-right corner of the screen.
To modify the system time and/or date, right-click in the time and date display. This displays a button
with the following message:

Figure 2-9: Accessing the Time and Date Adjustment Dialog

Click the Set Time & Date button to open the Time and Date dialog. For more information on setting
the system time and date, see the section: "Setting the Time, Date and NTP Server" on page 3-5

Using System State Presets and the Preset Bar
Note: It is not possible to transfer System State Presets between Qx and QxL units as they will
not be recognized.
Whenever you work with the Qx, you can save your current screen layout and settings as an
Instrument Preset for ease-of-use and convenience. If you decide to start a different task, you canlaunch a Preset from the Preset Bar with a single click, rather than opening and adjusting individual
Instruments.
You can save multiple Presets as required, giving you a library of bespoke layouts tailored to specificoperational tasks. The unit saves each Preset to the Preset Bar, located below the Instrument Bar,and automatically labels each Preset sequentially as New Preset 1, New Preset 2, etc.
Once you have organized the display with your required Instruments, save as a Preset by rightclicking the Instrument Bar and selecting the option Save System State As Preset from the menu.

Figure 2-10: Save System State as Preset

A saved system state Preset saves the following items:lLayout of currently active InstrumentslAll user-defined settings in the active Instruments.

l

All user-defined System settings, for example, Display Brightness.

On saving a Preset, the Preset Bar opens below the Instrument Bar, with the current screen layout
saved with the default name New Preset n.
To save other layout Presets, organize the display as required, and repeat as above.

Reordering Presets
You can change the order in which your saved presets are saved in the Presets Bar. To do so, rightclick in the Presets Bar and select the option Re-order Presets... to open the Re-order Presets
dialog.
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-13

Figure 2-11: Reorder Presets Dialog

Select a preset, then use the Up and Down arrow keys to change the displayed position of the presetin the Presets Bar. Moving a preset up the list moves the preset towards the left of the presets Bar anddown the list moves the preset to the right of the Presets Bar. Press OK to accept your changes andclose the dialog.

Renaming Presets
Note: You will need to connect a USB keyboard to one of the USB ports of the unit before you
can change the name of a preset. If a USB keyboard is not connected, the option Rename Preset
is not available. An on-screen keyboard is not provided for this function in this software version.
To rename a Preset, connect a USB keyboard then right-click the preset name and select the option
Rename Preset. The Preset Rename dialog is displayed, enabling you to rename the Preset using theconnected USB keyboard.
When entering a new name for a preset, do not use any of the following special characters as they will
be automatically removed from the name on saving:# < > ` * ' | " $ & , . / : \ ; = ? @, tab or carriage return

Figure 2-12: Preset Options Menu

Page 2-14

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 2-13: Rename Preset Dialog

After entering a new name for the preset, select OK to save your changes.
Note: If you use the File Manager utility to upload presets from another unit, make sure that you
reboot the unit after uploading the presets to ensure that the presets are registered on the newunit. Once the presets have been registered, you can rename them as previously described.

Other Preset Tasks
To delete a Preset, right-click the Preset, select the option Delete Preset and confirm the deletion. If
you no longer wish to delete the preset, select Cancel.
To update an existing Preset with a changed screen layout, right-click the Preset, select the option
Update Preset and confirm that you are happy to overwrite that preset. Your layout changes are
saved to the same name and the previous settings are overwritten.
To hide the Preset bar automatically from view, right-click the Instrument Bar or Preset Bar and check
the Auto-hide Presets checkbox. To display the Preset Bar, uncheck the checkbox.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-15

Overview of the Instrument Windows
Each Qx Instrument window border and its corresponding icon is assigned a color and the icon andInstrument border are displayed in the assigned color to indicate that it is part of one of the following
groups of Instruments:lll

System: Instruments used to configure various elements of the Qx system. Default bordercolor: white.
Analyzers: Instruments used to analyze characteristics of the video signal and its associatedcomponents. Default border color: orange.
Generators: Instruments used to generate a video or audio signal. Default border color: cyan.

The color-coding provides easy identification of the Instrument type. You can enable/disable theInstrument borders or modify the assigned color in the Display Options submenu, selected from theInstrument Launch Menu. For more information on setting-up the display, see the section: "Setting-up
the Display" on page 3-6.

Figure 2-14: Full Screen with Active Instruments

Changing the Border Color of Instrument Windows
If desired, you can change the border color of Analyzer and Generator Instruments as described in
the Section: "Setting-up the Display" on page 3-6.
Note: The borders and icons of System Instruments are always colored white.
Instrument borders automatically merge by group color. If you position one Analyzer instrument, forexample, next to another Analyzer, then the border will outline all instruments in the common group,in contact with each other, to aid group recognition.
In addition, signal connectors displayed in instrument windows (for example, in the System
IO instrument) are displayed in the Analyzer color to indicate an input or the Generator color toindicate an output, when they are active.
Page 2-16

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Working with the Qx Instruments
Each Qx Instrument includes a pop-up submenu, displayed by right-clicking the mouse in the window,
which gives you access to the configuration parameters of that Instrument.
Once open, you can move the submenu to any position on the screen by clicking the gray bar at the
top of the menu and dragging it to a new position.
In addition to listing the Instrument-specific parameters, the submenus include the following
operational commands:lTake Screenshot: Saves an image of the current active display to the unit's SSD storage.

lDismiss Menu: Closes the submenu.

llMinimize "Instrument": Minimizes the target Instrument to an icon in the Instrument Bar, removing it from the display. You can click the minimized icon to restore the Instrument to its original
location, at its original size and containing the actual content.
Close "Instrument": Closes the Instrument, removing it from the display.

The following figure shows an example of a pop-up submenu displayed by right-clicking in the
Generator - Configuration Instrument:

Figure 2-15: Instrument Pop-up Submenu Displayed

Other dialog windows (About, False Color Ranges, Driver Calibration, etc.) also include right-click
menus with options to take a screenshot, dismiss the menu, and close the dialog window.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-17

Selecting Submenu Options and Entering Values
You can select most options in the Instrument submenus by selecting one of the options in a
dropdown listbox. For example, you might enable or disable a parameter by selecting Enable or
Disable from the dropdown list.
Other parameters require you to enter a numeric value, for example, the number of Eyes displayed in
the Eye - SDI In A Instrument, or the zoom factor in the Analyzer - Vectorscope Instrument.

Figure 2-16: Adjusting Numeric Values in the Analyzer - Vectorscope Instrument

You can adjust a numeric value using one of the following methods:lllClick the slider button and drag left or right to decrease or increase the value, respectively.
Click the cursor in the numeric field and scroll the mouse wheel backward or forward to
decrease or increase the value, respectively.
Connect a USB keyboard to the unit, click in the numeric field and enter the new value using
the keyboard.

Figure 2-17: Manual Entry of a Static IP Address in the Qx Network & Automation Instrument

One further method to enter numeric data is encountered when you choose to enter a static IP
address manually into the unit using the Qx Network & Automation Instrument.
If you select the IP addressing mode Static from the dropdown list, the unit displays a numeric
keypad.
To enter an IP address, simply click the numbers on the keypad, then click OK to save the address.

Page 2-18

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Resizing an Instrument Window
Double-click in any Instrument window to cycle through a set of standard instrument window sizes.
In many cases, you can manually adjust the size of a window further to suit your requirements. To doso, hover the cursor over either the right-hand or bottom borders until a double-headed arrow isdisplayed, then drag the border until the Instrument reaches the desired width or height.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-19

Using the Instrument Scroll Bars and Scroll Control Menu
For those Instruments displaying a large amount of data, vertical and horizontal scroll bars areprovided to help navigate through the data. A scroll control menu, accessed by right-clicking thescroll bar provides further scrolling or paging options.

Figure 2-18: Instrument Scroll Bar Control Menu

Page 2-20

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Using the Window Panel Slider Controls
In Instruments with two active panels, for example, .the NMOS single interface Receiver SDP and IS05
windows, a vertical slider enables you to change the size of either panel for improved viewing. Simply
move the slider up or down to adjust the viewable area of either panel.

Figure 2-19: Window Panel Slider Controls

Taking Screenshots
Note: Before taking a screenshot, first disable VNC in the submenu of the Network &Automation Instrument and set the display brightness to its maximum setting using the Display
Options in the Launch menu.
To capture an image of the entire display, open the Instrument Options menu and simply select Take
Screenshot. The image is saved to the SSD as a portable network graphic (.PNG) format file.
Alternatively, connect a USB keyboard to the unit and press [Shift] + [PrtScn] to capture the display.
You can retrieve your saved screenshots, in PNG format, from the SSD using the USB File Manager ora remote connection method, as required. For more information on retrieving the file from the unit,
see the section "Managing Files with the USB File Manager" on page 3-19.

Working with Instrument Tabs
Some of the Qx configuration Instruments feature tabs along the top of the window which provide
quick and easy access to different functional groups within a single Instrument.
The Instrument submenus are reserved for auxiliary settings relating to each available tab.
The following figure shows the Generator - Configuration Instrument, which includes a tab for video
generation and a separate tab for audio generation.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-21

Figure 2-20: Example of Tabs in the Generator - Configuration Instrument

The unit also uses tabs to present alternative displays of analyzed data. For example, the Analyzer Ancillary Status Instrument, provides tabs that enable you to switch between the Grid or List dataviews.

Page 2-22

PHABRIX Qx User ManualInstrument Icon Quick Reference
The icons shown below each represent a different Instrument (some optional) and are displayed in
the Instrument Bar when the corresponding Instrument is active.
AES IO Config

Analyzer - CIE Chart

System IO

Analyzer - CRC Analysis

SFP A - Info

Analyzer - Data View

SFP B - Info

Analyzer - Picture /Analyzer - Picture Copy

Eye - SDI in A

Analyzer - Vectorscope

Jitter SDI in A

Analyzer - Waveform

PRBS Analysis

Generator - Configuration

Stats - SDI in A

Generator - Status

Stats - SDI in B

Event Logging

Stats - SDI in C

Qx Network & Automation

Stats - SDI in D

SFP A - Network Stats

Video Timing & System Reference

SFP B - Network Stats

Analyzer - Video Standard (SDI &2022-6)

IP Receive - Flow SelectAnalyzer - Ancillary Inspector

IP Receive - Interpacket Timing

Analyzer - Ancillary Status

Stats - IP Receive (SFP A)

Analyzer - Audio Channel Status

IP Transmit (SFP B / 2022-6)

Analyzer - Audio Meters

SFP IP Network

SFP A / B - PTP Info

Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup

Analyzer - 2022-7 Status

Analyzer - LLDP Data

Analyzer - 2110-21 Status

Analyzer - Dolby Metadata

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 2-23

Page 2-24

Analyzer - Loudness Monitor

NMOS Status and Configuration

NMOS Receivers - IS05

NMOS Receivers - SDP

PHABRIX Qx User Manual3
Configuring and Checking the Unit
This chapter describes how to set-up some fundamental parameters and check that the unit isworking correctly; it includes the following sections:lQx Network and AutomationlSetting the Time and NTP ServerlSetting-up the DisplaylChecking the Unitl

Checking the System Health Statusl

Checking the Licensesl

Restarting the Unitl

Reverting to Factory Default Settingsl

Switching Boot Modesl

Resetting the SFP Configuration DatabaselUpgrading the Software, Firmware and OptionslManaging Files with the USB File ManagerlPacket Capture (PCAP) (Option: PHQXLO-IP-PCAP)lEvent Logging on the UnitlRemote Connection to the Unit

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-1

Qx Network and Automation
Overview
The Qx Network & Automation Instrument provides all the control network information and facilities
you need to connect remotely to the unit and control its interface.
Once the unit is powered on and an RJ45 Ethernet connector inserted in the management port, you
can access the unit remotely and set its date and time from an NTP server.
You can control the unit from a remote location using a number of methods, including:lVirtual Network Computing (VNC)lREST API (for automated testing).

Figure 3-1: Qx Network & Automation Instrument

Using Virtual Network Computing (noVNC or VNC) for Remote Access
The virtual network computing or VNC facility enables you to connect to the unit from a remotelocation and provides you with direct screen control of the unit.
When you enable the VNC Server parameter in the Options menu, the unit allows remote access to
its noVNC client from a standard web browser across a dedicated network socket. In addition, you
can also connect remotely using a suitable, locally installed VNC client viewer (for example,
VNC® Connect, etc.)
For more information on establishing a remote connection using noVNC or from a VNC client to theunit, see the section: "Using Virtual Network Computing (VNC)" on page 3-29.

Page 3-2

PHABRIX Qx User ManualInstrument Menu Options

Figure 3-2: Qx Network & Automation Instrument Menu Options

The following table lists the configurable parameters in the Qx Network & Automation instrument
submenu:
Table 3-1 : Qx Network & Automation Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

IP addressing mode

Dynamic
StaticFor remote access to the unit, you can assign the IP
address of the unit either dynamically, on a DHCP
enabled network, or specify a static IP address manually.
When assigned dynamically using DHCP, the following IP
address fields are automatically populated and cannot beedited.

Ethernet IP addr andmaskEnter static IP address and mask
(range: 8 to 31) as required.

Only active when the static IP addressing mode is selected. Use the dropdown list to select the Mask. The unit
uses CIDR notation; with a default value of /24. Use eithera USB keyboard or click the keypad icon to enter theaddress using the numeric keypad.

Gateway IP Addr

Enter the IP address of the Gateway as required.

Only active when the static IP addressing mode is selected. Use either a USB keyboard or click the keypad icon
to enter the address using the numeric keypad.

DNS Server IP Addr

Enter the IP address of the DNS
Server.

Only active when the static IP addressing mode is selected. Use either a USB keyboard or click the keypad icon
to enter the address using the numeric keypad.
After entering all required static IP parameters, click
Apply IP Parameters.

Default Gateway

Via Mgmt Port (Default)
Via SFP A
Via SFP B

Select the preferred network interface for network traffic.
This can either be the default management port asassigned by the operating system or either SFP A or
SFP B.

REST API

EnabledDisabled (Default)

When enabled allows remote connection to the unit using

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-3

Item

Options

Description
the REST API. The Qx Network & Automation window contains all the information on the unit required to submit a
REST request. It is recommended to use the IP Address(or mDNS Hostname if your client’s host supports it) as therecipient of the request, and the REST API Port is the port
towards which requests need to be directed. The REST
API supports four HTTP methods: GET, PUT, DELETE, and
POST. Use GET requests to retrieve information and navigate the submenus and PUT requests to modify and control the unit's behavior and actions. Use a web browser toretrieve information from the unit using GET requests.
You can use any HTTP/1.1 compliant application to control
the unit using GET and PUT requests. In addition, PUT,
GET, DELETE, and POST requests can be scripted forautomated testing.

VNC Server

EnabledDisabled (Default)

When enabled allows remote connection to the unit fromeither:l A standard web browser using noVNC to connect
to the noVNC client on the unit by way of a
dedicated network socket, orl A locally installed VNC client viewer (for example,
VNC® Connect).
The VNC Server field of the Network & Automation
window shows the number of current VNC connections
to the unit. Once a connection is made, or ended, thisnumber is automatically updated. For more information
on using VNC to connect remotely to the unit, see thesection "Using Virtual Network Computing (VNC)" onpage 3-29.

Note: The mDNS Hostname has the following case-sensitive syntax:
qx-<serial number>.local. For example: qx-123456.local

Page 3-4

PHABRIX Qx User ManualSetting the Time, Date and NTP Server
The Qx displays the system date and time in the bottom-right corner of the screen.

Figure 3-3: Date and Time Display

You can configure the unit to use a date and time transmitted by a target Network Time Protocol(NTP) server or set the time and date manually in the Time and Date dialog.
Configure the date and time as follows:
1. Right-click on the time/date display in the bottom-right corner of the screen.
2. Select: Set Time & Date.
This opens the Time and Date dialog.

Figure 3-4: Time and Date Dialog

3. To use the automatic time and date from an NTP server:a. Select the Automatic checkbox.
b. Enter the address of the NTP Server using a USB keyboard.
For example: pool.ntp.org
c. Select your local time zone from the Time Zone list box.
d. Click Update Now and confirm that you are happy with the updated settings.
e. Click Apply to save your changes and quit the dialog.
To discard your changes, click Cancel
4. To set a time and date for the unit manually:a. De-select the Automatic checkbox.
This displays the manual date and time fields.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-5

Figure 3-5: Manual Date and Time Fields

b. Adjust the date and time by clicking the target item and either increase or decrease thesetting using the mouse scroll wheel or the up/down arrow buttons at the right of the
fields.
c. Click Apply to save your changes and quit the dialog.
To discard your changes, click Cancel

Setting-up the Display
Modifying the Display Options
The unit's Display options enable you to set the display brightness and output frame rate, or modify
the appearance of the Instrument windows on the screen.
Configure the display to which the unit is connected as follows:
1. Click the PHABRIX button to open the Instrument Launch menu.
2. Select: Display Options.
This opens a submenu listing the configurable display options.

Figure 3-6: Display Options in Instrument Launch Menu

3. Select the desired frame rate from the Output Rate dropdown list:
l

50 Hz

l

59.94 Hzl60 Hz

4. Drag the Brightness slider left or right to decrease or increase the display brightness to a comfortable level.
Note: When using the Screenshot function to capture the display, it is recommended to set
the brightness to the maximum setting to increase the clarity of the saved image.
5. Choose whether to display a border around the Instruments by enabling or disabling the option
Window Frames.
When disabled, you switch off the border color differentiation between Analyzer and Generator Instruments.
Page 3-6

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

6. When the option Window Frames is Enabled, you can change the border color of Analyzer orGenerator instruments as follows:a. Select the dropdown color selector corresponding either to the Analyzer or Generator.
This opens the Hue, Saturation, Value (HSV) tool shown below.
Note: The borders and icons of System Instruments are always colored white.

Figure 3-7: Selecting Analyzer and Generator Border Colors in the HSV Windowb. Click at a point in the left-hand color box of the HSV tool to select the hue (horizontal)
and saturation (vertical) settings of the new border color.
c. Click at a point in the right-hand vertical bar to select the color lightness value.
This will change the displayed borders of all Instruments of that type.
d. Repeat the previous steps for the second Instrument type, if desired.
e. Close the HSV menu.
7. Click anywhere outside the menus to quit and save your new display settings.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-7

Checking the Unit
Overview
Your Qx unit should now be powered on in the default boot mode (SDI), with the correct date andtime showing, and at least the basic screen displayed with any of your modifications. At this point you
should confirm that the unit is healthy and running correctly, as expected, by checking the following:lSystem HealthlLicensing and ordered licensed optionsl

Software and firmware versions

These items are described in the following sections.

Checking the System Health Status
You can check the current health status of the unit in the System Health dialog as follows:
1. Click the PHABRIX button to open the Instrument Launch menu.
2. Select: System Health.
This opens the System Health dialog displaying the current hardware health of the unit, including: CPU and FPGA temperature, voltage (DDR and 5.5 V), and cooling fan revolutions.

Figure 3-8: System Health Information

Table 3-2 : System Health Recommended Thresholds
Item

Page 3-8

Safe Range

Description

CPU Temperature

From 0° to 85°C

Unit will issue a high temperature warning at 80°C andswitch off at 85°C

FPGA Temperature

From 0° to 85°C

Unit will issue a high temperature warning at 80°C andswitch off at 85°C

5.5 V

5.030 to 5.734 V

Hardware switches off the unit if the voltage moves
outside the safe range.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Safe Range

Description

DDR Voltage

1.283 to 1.580 V

Hardware switches off the unit if the voltage moves
outside the safe range.

Cooling Fans

3000 to 9500 rpm

Speed of fans varies with the temperature of the unit.
Three cooling fans are located in the front of the unit in left (L), center (C) and right (R) positions.

Checking the Unit Licenses
It is important at this point to confirm that your unit has been shipped with the software options andcorresponding licenses documented in your original order.
Check the licensing details and other system information in the About dialog as follows:
1. Click the PHABRIX button to open the Instrument Launch menu.
2. Select: About.
This opens the About dialog listing detailed information about the system, including:lSoftware version and buildlSerial numberlLicense detailsl

Build IDl

Mezzanine IDl

FPGA detailslCalibration detailsl

QT OS version.

Figure 3-9: Serial Number and License Information

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-9

Figure 3-10: Mezzanine ID in About Dialog

Restarting the Unit
If at any time you want to restart the unit, you can do so from the System Settings options, accessedfrom the Instrument Launch menu, without powering-down the unit.
Restart the unit as follows:
1. Click the PHABRIX button to open the Instrument Launch menu.
2. Select: System Settings.

Figure 3-11: System Settings Option Menu

3. Select: Restart Qx.
This opens a Restart confirmation dialog.

Figure 3-12: Display Options in Instrument Launch Menu

4. Click: OK to confirm the restart or Cancel to quit without restarting.
When you confirm the restart, the unit immediately enters boot mode and displays its statususing the LED behind the On switch.

Reverting to Factory Default Settings
If you make configuration changes to the unit which you would rather discard, you can restore the unit
to the factory default settings at any time.
Restore the factory defaults as follows:

Page 3-10

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

1. Click the PHABRIX button to open the Instrument Launch menu.
2. Select: Apply Default Settings.
This opens a confirmation dialog, shown below, where you are prompted to confirm yourchoice before the factory defaults are restored.
Note: If you restore the factory settings, all your Presets and other configuration changes
will be removed from the unit. It is recommended first to copy all your saved Presets to a
USB memory stick before restoring factory defaults.

Figure 3-13: Confirmation to Restore Factory Default Settings

3. Click: Restore Defaults to confirm or Cancel to quit.
Alternatively, make sure that no USB sticks are inserted in any of the USB ports, then press the power
button twice in quick succession. The power button changes color to magenta and the unit restarts
with the factory default settings restored.

Switching Between Boot Modes
The unit includes three possible boot modes, with each boot mode featuring a different combinationof options in the Instrument Launch Menu. The available firmware boot modes are as follows:l

12G SDI Boot Mode (Default boot mode. including SDI Stress tools)l

IP 2022-6 Boot Mode (optional)l

IP 2110 Boot Mode (optional), supporting:ll

SMPTE ST 2110 decapsulation (reception) of video (2110-20), audio (2110-30/2110-31), andancillary (ANC) (2110-40) flows.
SMPTE ST 2022-7 SIPS and dual ST 2059 (PTP).

On start up, you will see one of the following Instrument Launch Menus, depending on the boot modeand licenses applied to the unit:

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-11

Figure 3-14: Launch Menus for SDI (Default), IP 2022-6, and IP 2110 Boot Modes

Each Instrument available in the menu is listed alongside its designated icon. Options listed at the topof the menu, without icons, provide access to System menus and actions, such as switching the bootmode or reverting to default settings.
When you select an instrument from the Instrument Launch menu, the Instrument window opens andits icon is displayed in the Instrument Bar at the bottom of the screen.
Depending on your product license(s), you can switch boot mode from the Instrument Launch menu.
Switch the Qx boot mode as follows:
1. Click the PHABRIX button to open the Instrument Launch menu.
2. Select: Switch Mode To....
This opens a submenu listing the available boot options.

Figure 3-15: Switching Between Qx Boot Modes

3. Select the desired option from the list (assuming that you are starting from the default SDI bootmode):

Page 3-12

PHABRIX Qx User Manuall

IP 2022-6l

IP 2110

4. In the Switch Firmware dialog displayed, click Switch to confirm the mode switch.
Switching to a different boot mode can take about a minute to complete.

Figure 3-16: Qx Switch Firmware Dialog

5. In the Mode Configuration dialog, select the checkbox Reboot when complete to reboot theQx automatically into the new mode.

Figure 3-17: Qx Automatic Reboot Dialog

The Power Button light changes to a fixed yellow color (instead of white) once thereconfiguration request is complete, indicating that a mode switch request has beensuccessful. The Qx unit restarts automatically in the requested mode.
6. If you do not select the Reboot when complete checkbox as described above, the unit pauses
on completing the mode reconfiguration and displays a Completion dialog featuring a Reboot
button.
To continue with the mode switch, click Reboot.

Figure 3-18: Qx Reconfiguration Dialog

Resetting the SFP Configuration Database
By default, the unit's SFP Configuration Database contains configuration details for the approved,
factory supplied SFPs.

Note: If you have previously modified the SFP Configuration Database manually to include SFPs
that were not approved, be sure to copy your current list from the unit before you reset the
database values. By doing so, after reset, you can then add your user-defined SFPs to the
database again if they are not automatically recognized by the unit. Contact PHABRIX Support for
details on SFP configuration procedures.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-13

Update the SFP Configuration Database with the latest standard list of PHABRIX approved SFPs forthe current software release as follows:
1. Click the PHABRIX button to open the Instrument Launch menu.
2. Select: System Settings.
3. Select: SFP Configuration Database from the submenu.

Figure 3-19: Resetting the SFP Configuration Database

4. Select: Reset to Factory Values.
5. Select Reset in the confirmation dialog.
You are warned that the database will revert to the factory defaults. Any user-defined SFP
entries in the database will be deleted. To quit the reset process, select Cancel.

Figure 3-20: Resetting the SFP List to Factory Defaults

Note: If you have not previously modified the database, but have unsupported SFPs that you
wish to use after reset, contact PHABRIX Support for information on how these might be added
to the SFP database.

Page 3-14

PHABRIX Qx User ManualUpgrading the Unit
Upgrading the System Software and Firmware
New software releases will be made available regularly as the product is developed.
Software downloads are approximately 100 MB in size and can be found in the Support area of the
PHABRIX website currently located at: https://www.phabrix.com/support/product-softwaredownloads/
1. Complete and submit the access request form.
2. Click the generated link to download the latest software.
3. Download the .zip file for the selected software release.

Figure 3-21: Downloading the Software Bundle from the PHABRIX Software Downloads Page

Note: Once you have upgraded your Qx to at least software version 4.1 using the filephab_qx_upgrade.bin, you will be able to install further updates using the downloaded.zip file.
4. Copy the .zip file to the root directory of a FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB stick.
5. Make sure that the unit is switched OFF before upgrading.
6. Insert the USB stick into the USB port on the front panel of the unit.
7. Press the power button twice in quick succession. The power button changes color to magenta
when the upgrade procedure starts. If the button does not show the magenta color, thenrepeat the previous steps.
The power button will flash several colors and the fans will be on full throughout the upgrade process.
Please wait approximately four minutes as the unit upgrades. It will automatically display the menu
screen when complete.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-15

Remote Upgrade Using SFTP
From software version 3.4.1 you can upgrade the software on your unit(s) from a remote location using
a standard SFTP client (e.g., FileZilla, etc.) as follows:
1. Complete and submit the access request form.
2. Click the link to download the .zip file for the desired software release, see above.
3. Log on remotely to a unit to be upgraded using SFTP, enter:sftp qxuser@<Qx_IP_Address>.
For more information, see the section "Using SFTP" on page 3-31.
4. Enter the password for the qxuser: phabrixqx
You should see the message Connected to qxuser@<Qx_IP_Address>
5. Use the SFTP put command to upload the upgrade .zip file to the upgrade directory of the unit:/transfer/upgrade.
You should see the percentage completion and time remaining for the transfer displayed at theright of the terminal window.

Figure 3-22: Uploading the Upgrade File Remotely to the Unit

6. On completion of the upload the unit automatically detects the presence of the upgrade fileand starts its upgrade cycle.
Note: The remote upgrade function requires software version 3.3.1 or higher to be installed on
the target unit. When this software version is available you can choose to install any available
version of the software. If, however, you install a version below 3.3.1, the remote upgrade facility
will no longer be available on that unit.

Upgrading the Software Options
You can order and install optional software toolkits at any time after purchasing your unit. You will
receive an email from PHABRIX with an encrypted file attachment:
encrypted_license_file.enc.
Install the software for a toolset option as follows:
1. Make sure that the unit is powered on.
2. Download the email attachment and copy to a blank, FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB memory
stick.
3. Insert the USB memory stick into any of the USB ports on the front or rear of the unit.
The unit detects the software package and displays a dialog box listing the licenses currently
installed alongside the new licenses available with the option upgrade.

Page 3-16

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 3-23: Confirmation Dialog for Software Option Upgrade

4. Make sure that the new option(s) you have purchased are listed in the New License column
with a green check mark then click OK to update the license.
After updating the option licenses, the unit opens a further dialog box requesting you to restart
to apply your changes and activate the new option(s).

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-17

Figure 3-24: Requesting a Reboot to Activate the New Option(s)5. Confirm that all expected licenses have been updated, then click Reboot.
The unit reboots and the upgraded options will be available for use (depending on the Boot
mode.)
6. Open the About... dialog from the PHABRIX Launch menu and confirm that the new toolkit
license(s) are available.

Page 3-18

PHABRIX Qx User ManualManaging Files with the USB File Manager
Overview
To transfer and manage your files, the unit provides a USB File Manager which enables you to
download files from the unit to a FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB memory stick or to upload files fromUSB to the unit. To display the USB File Manager, simply insert a USB memory stick into one of theUSB connectors on the front or rear panels of the unit. When displayed, the USB File Manager
window is divided into two panes – the left-hand pane displays files available on the unit and theright-hand pane displays files and folders on the USB stick. You can either select files and thenchoose a copy option from the right-click menu or drag selected files and drop them into the desired
target window.
Note: The unit supports a single inserted USB memory stick at any one time. If a second stick isinserted, it will not be recognized until the first USB stick is removed.
With the USB File Manager you can:l

Select files on either devicel

Copy selected files in two directions (from unit to USB or USB to unit)lDrag and drop selected files between the unit and USB device(s)lRename files on the USB stick.

lCreate folders on the USB sticklDelete files from the unit or USB stick.

You can upload or download the following file types to or from the unit:lTest patternslScreenshotslPresetsl

Logfilesl

TIFF image files.

The USB Device drop-down menu in the top-right of the window allows you to select either of up to
three USB devices that may be connected to the USB ports. Available space on both the unit andUSB stick is displayed at the bottom of the File Manager window.
Note: When using the File Manager over a remote connection (for example, when using noVNC)
you will need physical access to the unit both to insert the USB and to remove it after ejecting.

Opening the USB File Manager
To open the USB File Manager:lInsert a USB memory stick into one of the USB ports on the front or rear panel of the unit.
This automatically opens the following file manager dialog:

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-19

Figure 3-25: USB File Manager Window

Alternatively, you can launch the File Manager from the Instrument Launch Menu as follows:lClick PHABRIX, then select File Manager from the menu.

If you unintentionally close the File Manager by clicking on another window or instrument, you can reopen it from the Instrument Launch Menu as described above.

Copying Files from the Unit to USB
Copy files from the unit as follows:
1. Insert a USB stick into one of the USB ports and wait for the USB File Manager window to open.
2. Select the files to download in the left-hand pane, or choose Select All from the right-clickmenu.
To deselect a file, simply click it again. You can also choose Clear Selected Files from the right-clickmenu to deselect multiple files. To open a folder, double-click the folder icon.

Figure 3-26: Copying Selected Files from the Unit to a Connected USB Stick

Page 3-20

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

3. Right-click anywhere in the File Manager window and select Copy from Qx to USB... from themenu. This opens the Copy Source Files dialog.
4. Check that the selected files and destination are correct then click Copy to confirm.

Uploading Files from USB to the Unit
Upload files to the unit as follows:
1. Insert a USB stick into one of the USB ports and wait for the USB File Manager window to open.
2. Select the files you want to upload in the right-hand pane, or choose Select All from the rightclick menu.
3. Select the target folder on the unit in the left-hand pane for the uploaded files.
4. Right-click anywhere in the File Manager window and select Copy from USB to Qx... from themenu. This opens the Copy Source Files dialog.
5. Check that the selected files and destination folder are correct then click Copy to confirm.
Note: If uploading screen Presets from another unit, always reboot the unit to register the Presets
on completion of the upload.

Deleting Files from the Unit
Delete files on the unit as follows:
1. Launch the USB File Manager from the Instrument Launch Menu.
2. Select the files you want to remove in the left-hand pane, or choose Select All from the rightclick menu.
3. Right-click anywhere in the File Manager window and select Delete selected files... from themenu. This opens the Delete Files dialog.
4. Check that you have selected the correct files then click Delete to confirm.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-21

Packet Capture (PCAP)
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND and PHQXO-IP-PCAP

Overview
The Packet Capture (PCAP) function enables you to capture a snapshot of all live IP network traffic oneither one, or both, of the media interfaces. You can control the PCAP function either locally from theunit's interface, or remotely, using either noVNC or a suitable VNC client viewer, for details, see"Using Virtual Network Computing (VNC)" on page 3-29.
The PCAP data is saved to a FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB memory stick and can be transferred
remotely, by browser, for offline analysis using third-party network analysis tools to investigate any
issues.
Note: This function is available in IP ST 2110 mode only.
You can analyze the downloaded PCAP file to assist with:lMonitoring network trafficlIdentification of network setup and performance issueslIdentification of network security vulnerabilities.

The PCAP function saves network packet data in the PCAP next generation (PCAPng) format using
the following syntax:lpcap.pcapng (When Filename Append Date Time disabled)lpcap_<date_time>.pcapng (When Filename Append Date Time enabled)

Note: When using PCAP all other instruments are disabled and then re-enabled once the PCAP
has completed.

Opening the PCAP Dialog
Note: The unit supports a single inserted USB memory stick at any one time. If a second stick isinserted, it will not be recognized until the first USB stick is removed.
To open the PCAP dialog:
1. Insert a USB memory stick into one of the USB ports on the front or rear panel of the unit, thenclose the File Manager.
2. Open the PHABRIX Start menu and select PCAP.
This automatically opens the following PCAP Capture dialog:

Page 3-22

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 3-27: PCAP Capture Window

3. Set the desired PCAP parameters in the PCAP dialog as defined in the following table:
Table 3-3 : Parameter Settings for the PCAP Capture Instrument
Parameter

Options

Description

Capture Interface

SFP A (Default)
SFP B
SFP A+B

Define the SFP interface for the PCAP recording. This canbe one or both media interfaces at a line rate of 10 Gbps.

Packets to Capture

No Limit (Default)
1 to 50 million

Set a limit for the number of data packets to be captured
for analysis in the PCAP session.

Max File Size

100 KB
500 KB
1 MB
5 MB
10 MB
50 MB
100 MB500 MB
1 GB (Default)

Set a limit for the maximum size of the recorded PCAP file.

Max Capture Time

No Limit
1 second (Default) to9999 seconds

Set a limit for the maximum recording duration over which
to record live network traffic.

Packet Capture Size

12 to 1518 bytes

Set the maximum size, in bytes, of each captured data
packet recorded. This enables you, for example, tocapture more smaller packets or fewer larger packets.
(Note: Jumbo packets are truncated.)

Time Reference

PTP (Default)Internal clock

Specify whether to use PTP or the unit's internal clock as
the reference time source for the PCAP timestamps.

Capture Filename

pcap.pcapng (Default)
Or enter filename andIf making multiple captures, this function enables you tochange the capture filename to ensure that the previous

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-23

Parameter

Options

Description

extension using aconnected USB keyboard.

packet capture file is not overwritten.

Filename Append Date
Time

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

Include the current system date and time to the
PCAP filename.

File Location

None
sda1

Identifies the target USB slot to which to save the PCAP
file, as follows:
sda1 - First inserted USB memory stick (USB sticks
inserted subsequently are not recognized.)
Options are displayed only when a USB stick is inserted.

Capture Start Delay

No Delay (Default)
5s
10 s
30 s
60 s

Choose to delay the start of the PCAP capture for up to
60 seconds. When you specify a delay, the counter starts
once you click the Start button. A countdown timer is displayed in the unit's status bar.

Starting a PCAP Recording
Once you have set the PCAP recording parameters, start a recording as follows:
1. Start PCAP recording by pressing the Start Capture control or, if you have set one, wait for thestart delay counter to count-down.
You will see the message: Capture started... displayed in the bottom-left corner of the dialog.
2. Press the Stop Capture control or, if you have set a maximum file size, capture time, or numberof packets, wait for the first threshold to be reached and the capture will stop automatically.
You will see the message: Capture being stored displayed in the bottom-left corner of the
dialog as the unit transfers the captured data to the USB stick.
You can cancel the packet capture at any point by pressing the Abort PCAP button.
Note: The PCAP file may take some time to save to the USB stick.

Figure 3-28: PCAP Recording Controls

3. On completion, click Close to quit the dialog.
4. Open the File Manager and eject the USB stick or use a web browser to download it remotely
to a PC.

Page 3-24

PHABRIX Qx User ManualInstrument Menu

Figure 3-29: PCAP Menu

The following table lists the parameters in the PCAP menu:
Table 3-4 : PCAP Menu Items
Item

Options

Description

USB Website
Visibility

None (Default)
sda1

Select the USB slot containing the target USB stick toallow the contents of the USB stick to be displayed in abrowser.
To access from your browser, enter:
http://qx-<Serial_Number>.local or
http://<IP_Address>
Select the usbDrives folder then the active USB port (e.g.,
sda1 or other identifier). Drill down to the PCAP
file(s) saved on the USB stick.

File Manager

N/A
Active Control

Select to open the File Manager directly, instead ofthrough the launch menu. This enables you to manage
and delete files on the USB stick on completion of apacket capture, or to make space for the packet capture
file.

Store Last Capture

N/A
Active Control

Select to save the last PCAP file, held in the unit's
memory, to a USB stick.
In the event of a failure preventing the PCAP file saving toUSB at the first attempt, this feature ensures that you cansave the last recorded PCAP file to a USB stick. A
PCAP file is retained in RAM until either the unit ispowered down or the next PCAP, whichever comes first.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-25

Event Logging on the Unit
Overview
Event logging on the unit enables you to view the logs in the Event Logging Instrument window. The
unit allocates 500 lines for logging detail before overwriting log data. It will also recall the log data lastcaptured if the unit is started from cold. The setting for logging data will need to be re-entered from acold start using the right-click submenu. You can also access and save Logs using the REST API.

Figure 3-30: SDI Mode Event Logging and Options Menu

Figure 3-31: IP Mode Event Logging and Menu Options

Page 3-26

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

SDI Boot Mode
In SDI boot mode, right-click the mouse in the instrument window to enable or disable the following
logs in the Options menu:lRecord Jitter Timing Logsl

Record Jitter Alignment Logsl

Record SDI Input Standard Logsl

Record SDI Input Rate Logsl

Record SCTE104 Logsl

Record REST API Request Logsl

Record Reference Locking Logsl

Record SFP Logsl

Record Audio Input Presence Logsl

Clear logs

Select the Clear logs control to clear the contents of the currently active logs.

IP Boot Modes
In IP boot modes, right-click the mouse in the instrument window to enable or disable the following
logs in the Options menu:lRecord IP Tx Logsl

Record IP Rx Logsl

Record IP Interfaces Logsl

Record PTP Logs (IP 2110 only)l

Record SCTE104 Logsl

Record REST API Request Logsl

Record Reference Locking Logsl

Record SFP Logsl

Record Audio Input Presence Logsl

Clear logs

Select the Clear logs control to clear the contents of the currently active logs.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-27

Remote Connection to the Unit
Overview
Various methods are provided to enable you to establish a remote connection with a Qx system,
depending on your requirements, for example you could establish a remote connection using one of
the following methods:lnoVNC or standard VNC clientl

REST API

l

SFTP

l

Web browser.

For further information on the REST API, see the section "Using the REST API for Remote Access" onpage 16-2
Note: If you need to transfer files to or from a unit and you have direct access to the unit, it isrecommended to use the USB File Manager available from the Instrument Launch Menu.

Figure 3-32: Remote Connectivity Overview

Page 3-28

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAvailable Functionality
Remote Operational Control:lll

noVNC: View the screen and control the user interface from a remote location from a standard
web browser using noVNC.
VNC: View the screen and control the user interface from a remote location using a suitable
VNC client installed on your PC.
REST API: Remotely send operational control commands and retrieve data and status information.

Remote File Management:ll

SFTP: Upgrade the unit from a remote location; available from software version 3.4.1. Retrieve
Log, Preset, and Screenshot files. Delete these files. Add saved presets from a different unit.
Add, retrieve, and delete user-created test pattern files.
Web Browser: View and retrieve, Log, Preset, Screenshot, and User Test Pattern files. Alternatively, use the USB File Manager function to transfer files.

Note: In the setup directions that follow, 192.168.0.70 and qx-020094.local are used as
examples only. Be sure to use the IP Address or mDNS Hostname specific to your unit.

Using Virtual Network Computing (VNC)
The virtual network computing or VNC facility enables you to connect from a remote location andprovides you with direct screen control of the unit.
When you enable the VNC Server parameter in the Qx Network & Automation instrument, the unit
allows remote access from either:ll

A standard web browser using noVNC to connect to the noVNC client on the unit by way of a
dedicated network socket, orA locally installed VNC client viewer (for example, VNC® Connect).

For more information on establishing a remote VNC connection to the unit, see the section: "Qx
Network and Automation" on page 3-2.

Enabling VNC on the Unit
From the Qx Network & Automation Instrument, enable the submenu parameter VNC Server.
When enabled, the VNC Server field displays the number of current VNC connections to the unit.
Once a connection is made or ended, this number is automatically updated.

Connecting to the Unit Using noVNC from a Web Browser
The following are the minimum versions of web browsers supported for use with noVNC:l

Chrome 64lFirefox 79lSafari 13.4

lEdge 79

Note: The Opera web browser is not supported for use with this unit.
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-29

Once the VNC Server is enabled on the unit, you can access the unit using noVNC from a standard
web browser on your local PC as follows:
1. Enter either of the following URLs into a new browser tab:
http://<Unit_Serial_Number>/novnc
For example: http://qx-020480/novnc
http://<IP_Address>/novnc
For example: http://192.168.1.72/novnc
See the Qx Network & Automation instrument for the serial number or IP address of the target
remote unit.
2. Click Connect in the noVNC title screen.

Figure 3-33: noVNC Connect Button

3. Enter the unit's password: phabrixqx
4. Switch the display to full-screen mode using the noVNC side menu.

Note: You may need to reconnect to the unit after a mode switch and reboot.

Page 3-30

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Using a Generic VNC Client to Connect Remotely to the Unit
Make a remote connection to the unit using a locally installed VNC Client viewer, as follows:
1. From the Instrument Launch menu, open the Instrument Qx Network & Automation and rightclick to open the Options menu.
2. For the option VNC Server select Enabled.
This enables the VNC server on the unit. The Network & Automation instrument displays thenumber of current VNC server connections.
3. Install a VNC client viewer of your choice (for example, VNC® Connect) on the remote PC andlaunch the viewer.
4. Initiate a connection to the unit by entering the IP address of the unit (displayed in the Qx Network & Automation instrument) or its mDNS Hostname (if mDNS is enabled on your computer.)
5. When required, enter the password: phabrixqx
A view of the Qx desktop will open on your computer screen. You can now control the unit withyour local mouse and keyboard. You should see that the number of current VNC server connections displayed in the Network & Automation instrument has increased by one.
You can now set the unit's date and time to that of an NTP server as described in the section: "Setting
the Time, Date and NTP Server" on page 3-5.
Note: Remote monitoring of the audio output from the unit is not available over VNC.

Using SFTP
You can use a standard SFTP client (e.g., FileZilla, etc.) to perform the following tasks on the unit:lUpgrade the software from a remote location, see "Upgrading the Unit" on page 3-15.

lRetrieve event logs, presets, screenshots and user-defined test pattern fileslDelete event logs, presets, screenshots and user-defined test pattern fileslUpload saved presets from another unit and user-defined test patterns.

Connecting to the Unit Using SFTP
Run your chosen SFTP client application on the computer from which you will connect to the unit
(your SFTP server).
Enter the unit's host address using the specific IP Address of your unit or its mDNS Hostname (if mDNS isenabled on your computer), in one of the following formats:lsftp://192.168.0.70

lsftp://qx-020094.local

In addition, enter the following details:lUsername: qxuserlPassword: phabrixqxlPort: 22Once connected, open the transfer directory to access the following folders on the unit:lcommon licenses

llog - for the Event Loglpresets
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 3-31

lscreenshots

l

sfp

l

testPatternslupgradel

userTestPatterns

You can download or delete files from any of these folders. In addition, you can add or upload files tothe presets, upgrade and userTestPatterns folders.

Using a Web Browser
You can use a standard web browser to view and retrieve Event Log, Screenshot, Preset, and User
Test Pattern files. In addition, you can access and retrieve PCAP files saved to a USB stick inserted in
one of the USB ports on the front or rear panel of the unit.

Connecting to the Unit Using a Web Browser
In the web browser of your choice on your computer, enter the IP address of your unit or serial
number, in either of the following formats:l

http://192.168.0.70 orl

http://qx-<Serial_Number>.local

Once connected, you can access any of the following folders:luserTestPatternslpresets

l

logs

l

screenshotsl

usbDrives

View and save files to your computer as required.
Note: Files cannot be deleted using the web browser.

Page 3-32

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

4
SDI System Setup and Configuration
This chapter describes the System Instruments used to set-up and configure the unit in SDI bootmode for your desired test and measurement functions and includes the following sections:l

SDI Connections to the Unitl

SDI Input and Output Schematicl

SDI Input / Output Configurations (SDI Boot Modes)l

SDI Inputs Using BNC Connectorsl

SDI Outputs Using BNC ConnectorslOverview of SDI SFP Connectionsl

SDI Inputs Using SFP Connectorsl

SDI Outputs Using SFP ConnectorslSystem IOl

AES IO ConfiglVideo Timing & System Referencel

SFP (A, B) - Info

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-1

SDI Connections to the Unit
Overview
A choice of two SDI connector types – BNC and SFP+ – is available for the transmission of SDI signals
in to and out of the unit as shown below.

Figure 4-1: BNC SDI Input / Output Connectors

Figure 4-2: Optical Fiber Connector and 1.5G to 3 G SFP+ Optical Transceiver Module

Page 4-2

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

SDI Input and Output Schematic (SDI Boot Mode)
The following graphic shows a schematic view of the SDI and IP inputs and outputs to and from theAnalyzer and Generator circuitry, using either BNC or SFP connectors.

Figure 4-3: SDI Input / Output Connectors to Analyzer / Generator Circuitry

Where:l

EQ = SDI Cable EqualizerlTx = Signal Transmitterl

EYE = RTETM Real-time Eye Processing Circuitryl

MSA = Multi-source Agreement standard

For SDI Inputs:l

BNCs: Lead with Input Al

SFPs: Use any input

Note: The SDI BNC Loop feature is available with SDI connector configuration: BNC In / BNC Out
only.

Note: It takes marginally longer for the unit to lock-on to SDI Input signals received over SFP
connectors than signals received over BNC connectors.
For SDI Outputs:l

BNCs: Generator Output Copy is optional in combination with SDI BNC Loop configurationl

SFPs: Generator Output copy functionality is always on.
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-3

SDI Input / Output Configurations (SDI Modes)
You can choose different combinations BNC and SFP+ connector types for input / output, to and fromthe unit, from the following:l

BNC In / BNC Out (Default)l

SFP In / SFP Outl

BNC In / SFP Outl

SFP In / BNC Out

Select the SDI connector configuration you require in the System IO Instrument submenu (SDI Input
Source and SDI Out). For more information, see: "System IO for SDI Modes " on page 4-11.
Note:
Use only SDI SFPs recommended by PHABRIX. The unit displays an error
message if you insert an incompatible SFP. For more information, pleasecontact PHABRIX Support at: https://www.phabrix.com/support

Page 4-4

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

SDI Inputs Using BNC Connectors
The Physical Layer input connection for eye and jitter is the right-most BNC connector (when viewed
from the rear) fitted with a black- or red-colored nut. This provides the multirate eye and jitterconnection from 1.5G HD-SDI to 12G-SDI. There are four 12G-SDI capable input BNCs for the analyzer:
SDI In A, B, C, and D.

Figure 4-4: Rear Panel SDI Input BNC Connectors

Up to four SDI inputs may be connected at any one time, however, the system will automaticallydetermine the signal set to analyze - be it single link, dual link, or quad link - based on the SMPTE ST
352 packets present. The algorithm looks to SDI In A first and then determines the overall standard.
If the SMPTE ST 352 packets are known to be incorrect then you have the option to select Ignore
payload identifier packets (ST 352) in the Analyzer - Video Standard window.
SDI BNC In-to-SDI BNC Out signal passthrough is provided by the Loop feature in the System IO
submenu making the input SDI signal(s) available on the SDI BNC output connection.

SDI Outputs Using BNC Connectors
The flexibility of the unit enables you to control the signal on each of the four SDI BNC output
connectors independently, from either the System IO Instrument or the Generate - Video Instrument.
The Generator can provide up to four SDI output signals which must form part of the same video
signal set. When you enable the Generator Copy mode in the Generate - Video menu it will provide
either:lFour Single linksl

Two Dual linksl

One Quad link.

SDI Out A is always present and carries the first signal in the group, SDI Out B is active for dual link
standards, and SDI Out C and SDI Out D are active for quad link standards.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-5

Figure 4-5: Rear Panel SDI Input BNC Connectors

For each of the four output BNC connectors, you can select from the following optional modes:lll

Off: Mutes the selected SDI Out connector.
Generator: When the Generator Copy function is enabled, allows you to copy the Generator
output to any unused SDI Out BNCs (A, B, C or D). The number of copies depends on the number of signals from the Generator. For example, with a single link you can have up to three copies, with a dual link, one copy and with a quad link, no copies as all connectors are used by the
primary Generator signal.
Loop SDI in A / B / C / D: Enables you to repeat the signal presented to the SDI BNC inputs as
an output from the SDI BNC Outputs. When selected, there is a direct mapping between the
SDI In BNC and its corresponding SDI Out BNC, for example, SDI In A loops to SDI Out A, SDI In
B loops to SDI Out B, and so on.

If the Generator Copy mode is disabled, the unit generates a single instance of a link standard asfollows:l

One Single linkl

One Dual linkl

One Quad link

Note: The Loop feature is available when both the SDI Input Source and SDI Out are set to BNC
only. (System IO SDI connector configuration: BNC in / BNC out.)

Page 4-6

PHABRIX Qx User ManualOverview of SDI SFP Connections
The unit has two available SFP+ cages that can be used for SDI SFPs labeled SFP+A and SFP+B.
Each cage can house an SFP+ interface module that itself has one or two signal lanes. The signal lane
can be either Rx (receiver/input) or Tx (transmitter/output).
With two SDI SFPs inserted, between one to four SDI input/outputs (IOs) are available. The number of
IOs that are inputs (Rx) or outputs (Tx) depends on the inserted SFP types. The unit can take thefollowing SFP types in both SFP+A and SFP+B slots:l

RxRx (Dual Receiver – Two Inputs)lTxTx (Dual Transmitter – Two Outputs)l

RxTx (Transceiver – One Input, One Output)

An RxRx RxRx combination would provide up to four inputs; TxTx TxTx provides up to four outputs
and so on.
The unit maps the SDI signal lane positions (A, B, C, or D) of the installed SFP to internal SDI paths as
outlined in the following table. Whether a lane is an input or output depends on the type of SFP
installed. The SDI SFP recommended location for Single, Dual and Quad link use cases withTransceivers, Dual Transmitters and Dual Receivers are as follows:
Table 4-1 : Recommended SFP / SFP Connections

SDI SFPInterface(s)

SFP+B

SFP+A

Link Rates

Link Rates

Link TypePort CPort DPort APort B

Transceivers Only
One SDI
Transceiver inCage ATwo
SDI Transceivers
in Cages A & B

SFP Interface

N/A

N/A

Rx Ch1

Tx Ch 1

Single Link: Rx/Tx

N/A

N/A

BNC A Rx
1.5/3/6/12

BNC A Tx
1.5/3/6/12

Dual Link: N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Quad Link: N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

SFP Interface

Rx Ch1

Tx Ch1Rx Ch1

Tx Ch1

Single Link: Rx/Tx

N/A

BNC C Tx
(Tx Copy)
1.5/3/6/12

BNC A
Rx
1.5/3/6/12

BNC A
Tx
1.5/3/6/12

Dual Link: Rx/Tx

BNC C
Rx1.5/3/6

BNC CTx
1.5/3/6

BNC A Rx
1.5/3/6

BNC A Tx
1.5/3/6

Quad Link: N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

SFP Interface

N/A

N/A

Rx Ch1Rx Ch2Single Link: Rx

N/A

N/A

BNC A Rx
1.5/3/6/12

N/A

Dual Link: Rx

N/A

N/A

BNC ARx
1.5/3/6

BNC B Rx
1.5/3/6

Quad Link: N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Dual SDI Receivers Only
One SDI Dual
Receiver in CageA

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-7

SDI SFP
Interface(s)Two SDI Dual
Receivers inCages A & B

SFP+B

SFP+A

Link Rates

Link Rates

Link TypePort CPort DPort APort BSFP Interface

Rx Ch1Rx Ch2Rx Ch1Rx Ch2Single Link: Rx

N/A

N/A

BNC A Rx
1.5/3/6/12

N/A

Dual Link: Rx

N/A

N/A

BNC A Rx
1.5/3/6

BNC B Rx
1.5/3/6

BNC C Rx
1.5/3

BNC D Rx
1.5/3

BNC A Rx
1.5/3

BNC B Rx
1.5/3

SFP Interface

N/A

N/A

Tx Ch2Tx Ch1

Single Link: Tx

N/A

N/A

BNC B Tx
(Tx Copy)
1.5/3/6

BNC A Tx
1.5/3/6/12

Dual Link: Tx

N/A

N/A

BNC B Tx
1.5/3/6

BNC A Tx
1.5/3/6

Quad Link: N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

SFP Interface

Tx Ch2Tx Ch1

Tx Ch2Tx Ch1

Single Link: Tx

BNC D Tx
(Tx Copy)
1.5/3/6

BNC C Tx
(Tx Copy)
1.5/3/6/12

BNC B Tx
(Tx Copy)
1.5/3/6

BNC A Tx
1.5/3/6/12

Dual Link: Tx

BNC D Tx
(Tx Copy)
1.5/3/6

BNC C Tx
(Tx Copy)
1.5/3/6

BNC B Tx
1.5/3/6

BNC A Tx
1.5/3/6

Quad Link: Tx (3), (4)BNC D Tx
1.5/3

BNC C
Tx
1.5/3

BNC B
Tx
1.5/3

BNC A
Tx
1.5/3

SFP Interface

Rx Ch1Rx Ch2Tx Ch2Tx Ch1

Single Link: Rx/Tx

BNC C Rx
1.5/3/6/12

N/A

BNC B Tx
(Tx Copy)
1.5/3/6

BNC A Tx
1.5/3/6/12

Dual Link: Rx/Tx

BNC CRx
1.5/3/6

BNC DRx
1.5/3/6

BNC B Tx
1.5/3/6

BNC A Tx
1.5/3/6

Quad Link: N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Quad Link: Rx (1), (2)Dual SDI Transmitters Only
One SDI Dual
Transmitter inCage A

Two SDI Dual
Transmitters inCages A & B

Mixed Dual Transmitters and Receivers
One SDI Dual
Transmitter (CageA) and One Dual
SDI Receiver(Cage B)

Notes to Table:lllPage 4-8(1): In quad link 2SI the Receivers will auto adapt to any order of sub-image to BNC mapping.
(2): In quad link square division the sub image order must be strictly followed: BNC A:TL, BNC
B:TR, BNC C:BL, BNC D:BR.
(3): In quad link 2SI the sub image order is: BNC A:Sub 1, BNC B:Sub 2, BNC C:Sub 3, BNC
D:Sub 4.
PHABRIX Qx User Manuall(4): In quad link square division the sub image order is: BNC A:TL, BNC B:TR, BNC C:BL, BNC
D:BR.

Note: Use only SDI SFPs approved by PHABRIX. The unit displays an error message if you insert
an incompatible SFP. For more information, please contact PHABRIX Support at:
www.phabrix.com/support

Up to four SDI inputs may be connected at any one time, however, the system will automaticallydetermine the signal-set to analyze - either single link, dual link, or quad link - based on the SMPTE ST
352 packets present. The algorithm looks to the first available SDI In (in alphabetical order) and thendetermines the overall standard.
If the SMPTE ST 352 packets are known to be incorrect then you can select the option Ignore
payload identifier packets (ST 352) in the Analyzer - Video Standard window.
Note: The use of SDI SFPs for Eye and Jitter analysis and the Loop signal passthrough feature isnot supported.

SDI Inputs Using SFP Connectors
You can use both SFP+A and SFP+B connectors as receive (Rx) connections for SDI. Depending on
the type of SDI SFP+ used, up to four SDI Input connections from 1.5G HD-SDI to 12G-SDI areavailable. The analyzer provides up to four 12G-SDI capable inputs: SDI In A, B, C, and D.

Figure 4-6: Rear Panel SDI Input SFP Connectors

Up to four SDI inputs may be connected at any one time, however, the system will automaticallydetermine the signal-set to analyze - either single link, dual link, or quad link - based on the SMPTE ST
352 packets present. The algorithm looks to the first available SDI In (in alphabetical order) and thendetermines the overall standard.
If the SMPTE ST 352 packets are known to be incorrect then you can select the option Ignore
payload identifier packets (ST 352) in the Analyzer - Video Standard window.
Note: The use of SDI SFPs for Eye and Jitter analysis and the Loop signal passthrough feature isnot supported.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-9

SDI Outputs Using SFP Connectors
Both SFP+A and SFP+B can be used as transmit (Tx) connections for SDI. Dependent on the SDI SFP
types used, up to 4 x SDI output connections from 1.5G HD-SDI to 12G-SDI are available.
By default, internally, within the unit, the generator provides four SDI output signals which must form
part of the same video signal set. Even when you generate a single link standard, Generator Output
Copy behavior is automatically implemented for SDI SFPs. The generator will provide either:lFour single linksl

Two dual linkslOne quad link.

On the internal SDI output signal paths of the unit:lll

A single link standard will always be carried on SDI Out A, and then repeated on SDI Out B, SDI
Out C, and SDI Out D.
A dual link standard on SDI Out A and SDI Out B, and then repeated on SDI Out C and SDI OutD.
A quad link standard will be delivered using all four outputs: SDI Out A, SDI Out B, SDI Out C,
and SDI Out D.

Which of these internal SDI output signal paths are used as externally available SDI outputs depends
on the SFP types installed. For more information, contact PHABRIX Support, see the website:www.phabrix.com/support

Page 4-10

PHABRIX Qx User ManualSystem IO for SDI Modes
Overview
Due to the complexity of the UHDTV standards, PHABRIX has introduced innovative ways to display
status information. The System IO Instrument provides a quick overview of the signal inputs andoutputs connected to the unit.
The System IO window displays the status of signal inputs and outputs, external reference, cable
length and attenuation, and connector details.
In SDI modes, this window enables you to select your inputs and outputs, whether using BNC or SFP+
connectors. Additionally for SDI BNC outputs, System IO offers a Generator Output Copy option(output copy is automatically applied for SDI SFPs), and the ability, by way of the Loop feature, topassthrough the SDI BNC input signal(s) - making them available on the SDI BNC output connector(s).

System IO for SDI Modes
The top half of the instrument window shows a graphical view of the rear panel, displaying from left toright: SDI BNC outputs, SDI BNC inputs, external reference, and SFP+B and SFP+A positions (and theI/Os of any installed SFPs) see Figure 4-8and Figure 4-9.
All active SDI inputs and outputs are indicated by colored connectors; their colors dictated by the
Analyzer/Generator color scheme set in the Display Options, see the section "Using the Instrument
Launch Menu" on page 2-9 for more details. The color of the connectors corresponds to the color of
their related instrument borders and instrument icons, to aid recognition. An entirely grayed-out
connector indicates that a signal is not present, and the previously colored ring is shown in black.
If an SDI SFP is unseated or not present, this is displayed graphically with a black void - indicating a
missing SFP. (IP SFPs will also be displayed if installed, but will only become active in one of the IP
Boot modes.)Note: It is only possible to loop from BNC In to BNC Out, it is not possible to loop from BNC to
SFP or SFP to BNC.

Instrument Menu Options
You can configure the SDI signal IO mechanism using the instrument options menu, with a choice of
two SDI connector types for both input and output.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-11

Figure 4-7: System IO Instrument - Menu Options

The following table lists the configurable parameters of the System IO instrument:
Table 4-2 : System IO Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

SDI Input Source

BNC (default),
SFP

Select the Input SDI source connector configuration you
require.

SDI Out

BNC (default),
SFP

Select the Output SDI connector configuration you
require.

BNC Out A
BNC Out B
BNC Out C
BNC Out D

Off (Default)
Generator
Loop SDI In A (B, C, or D)

Choose whether to configure each SDI BNC Out
connector (A, B, C or D) individually, to use either the
Loop SDI In A (B, C, or D) signal, the Generator signal or toswitch off the output.

SFP Out A
SFP Out B
SFP Out C
SFP Out D

Off (Default)
Generator
Loop SDI In A (B, C, or D)

Choose whether to configure each SDI SFP Out channel(A, B, C or D) individually, to use either the Loop SDI In A
(B, C, or D) signal, the Generator signal or to switch off theoutput.
Note that the number of Generator Copies that you canhave on an SFP depends on the number and type of SFPs
that are fitted and the link format.

Cable Type

Belden 8281,
Belden 1505,
Belden 1694A (Default),
Belden 1855A,
Image 1000

The selected cable type is shown below the SDI In BNC
connector view

Page 4-12

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 4-8: System IO Instrument Showing All 12G SDI Out and SDI In BNC Connectors In Use

Figure 4-9: System IO Instrument Showing SFP+ Out and SFP+ In SDI Connectors In Use

Note:
BNC in / SFP out and SFP in / BNC out combinations are also supported.
For further details on SDI SFP input and output positioning, see the section"Overview of SDI SFP Connections " on page 4-7.
Additional SDI BNC or SFP output control is provided in the instrument submenu. The menu options
available depend on the selected video standard and whether you are using a single, dual or quadlink.
Signals presented to the unit's SDI BNC Inputs can be repeated out on the SDI BNC or SFP outputs of
the unit, by enabling Loop SDI In A, B, C, or D for the appropriate interface connector(s).
When this Loop feature is activated, there is a one-to-one mapping between the A, B, C, and D, inputs
and outputs respectively. The Loop feature disables the generator activity on the SDI BNC or
SFP outputs, and overrides Output Copy.
Note: To use the Loop SDI feature, you must have a valid input connected to the SDI In A BNC or
SFP interface connector.
The Loop feature is available for BNC In / BNC Out or SFP In / SFP Out configurations only.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-13

To duplicate output of the generated single link or dual link video standard on all unused SDI Out
BNCs, enable the option Generator Copy available in the Generator - Video submenu, see thefollowing section "Generator Copy and SDI Out Configuration" below. for more information.
Note: Copying of the Generator output is not applicable to quad link standards as all outputs areused.

Note: Output copy functionality is automatically applied when using SDI SFP outputs.
The presence of an external reference and its standard is also displayed graphically with a coloredconnector. If you set the system to lock to an external reference and achieve a stable lock, then the
inner ring of the EXT REF BNC (Figure 4-9) is highlighted in gray. The following EXT REF BNC colors
relate to various external reference status:lGray (reference connected)l

Red (error with reference)lBlack (no reference connected)

Note: The EXT REF BNC shows the status of external reference only; which is not necessarily thesystem reference. Overall system reference is selected in the Timing and System Reference
instrument window.
Below the graphical connector display, tables display input and output status, cable length andattenuation, external reference standard and status, and SFP type and presence information. You canhover the mouse over the external reference and SFP status information to display tooltips containing
additional status information.
The external reference table displays the following states:l

EXT REF: [No Signal, Unstable, 525/59.94, 625/50, etc...]If an external reference is not currently being used as system reference, its field text will display inyellow. When an external reference is the system reference, this table field text is colored white.
Measurements for cable length (in meters) and attenuation (in decibels) are displayed for each SDI
BNC input. To measure the length of a connected cable, be sure first to select the correct cable typefrom the instrument options menu.

Generator Copy and SDI Out Configuration
The Generator Copy parameter in the options menu of the Generator - Configuration instrument
allows you to enable copying of the Generator SDI signal between the SDI outputs on either
BNC connectors A, B, C and D, or SFP module channels A, B, C and D, depending on whether the
input is single, dual or quad. For example, you can configure the following:

Page 4-14lSingle input: Three copiesl

Dual input: Two copiesl

Quad input: No copies possible, all outputs used for one quad signal.

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 4-10: Generator - Configuration Options Menu

The following table lists the available Generator Copy options for the Generator - Configuration
instrument:
Table 4-3 : Generator Copy Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Generator Copy Options
Generator Copy

Disabled (Default)
Enabled

Select whether to enable or disable copying of the Generator signal to the other SDI outputs.

BNC Out A
BNC Out B
BNC Out C
BNC Out D

Off (Default)
Generator
Loop SDI In A (B, C, or D)

See Table 4-2

SFP Out A
SFP Out B
SFP Out C
SFP Out D

Off (Default)
Generator
Loop SDI In A (B, C, or D)

See Table 4-2

You can hover the cursor over the unselected dropdown menu to display a tooltip informing you of
the current configuration of the connector. The tooltips identify both the Primary Generator and theGenerator Copy or Copies as shown below:

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-15

Figure 4-11: Tooltip Showing Current Configuration of Connector

When enabled in the Generate -Video window, you will also see the displayed status of the
BNC connectors change in the System IO window to reflect the activity on the selected connectors.

Page 4-16

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAES IO Config(SDI & IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)
Overview
The unit provides powerful and flexible functionality for handling AES (Audio Engineering Society)input and output audio signals when present on pins 1 - 4 of the rear panel 26-way D-type connector.
See the section "Technical Specifications" on page 1 for more information on the connector pinouts.
You can use a D-type to BNC converter to access the AES I/Os.
The AES IO Config Instrument provides a configurable gateway to the AES IO signals for SDI and ST
2022-6. You can configure the AES IO so that an audio pair from the SDI or IP 2022-6 input is routed
to the four AES3 output interfaces. Encoded audio, such as AC-3, or E-AC3, can be decoded by an
external third-party decoder for monitoring purposes. Encoded Dolby E™ can be decoded directly by
the Qx.
The AES IO Config Instrument provides an interface to configure the AES I/Os as follows:
l

l

l

l

Up to four AES signals (a combination of inputs and/or outputs) can be handled at the sametime
SDI Input to AES Output audio conversion is available for both PCM and Dolby® encoded audio(using the Transmit - Analyzer)
Decoded Dolby E™ input from any of the four decoded Dolby pairs, together with the downmixed pair, can be routed out (using the Transmit - Dolby Decoder)Route AES Input signals to other AES outputs to provide a single loop output or up to three
copy outputs (using Transmit - Passthrough).

Figure 4-12: AES IO Config Instrument and Options Menu

The window provides a graphical display of the 26-way D-type rear panel connector, and labels the
AES pins (pins 1 - 4). The AES Panel graphic shows the AES I/O BNCs in any AES breakout board
connected to the rear panel D-type connector.
In both graphics, an active AES I/O is displayed in the Analyzer color when configured as an AES Input(in Receive mode) or in the Generator color when configured as an AES Output (in Transmit mode).
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-17

Below the AES Panel graphic, a table lists the status of each AES I/O. For AES Outputs the table also
shows the transmit mode source. Any issues in the audio transmit source are highlighted in the tabletext as follows:lRed: Configuration errorlYellow: Audio source not present.

Hover the mouse over the error text to display a tooltip describing how to resolve the issue.

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters of the AES IO instrument:
Table 4-4 : AES IO Menu Options (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)
Item

Options

Description

SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes
AES 1 Mode
AES 2 Mode
AES 3 Mode
AES 4 ModeOffAES I/O is switched off

Receive
I/O is set to AES Input

Set the corresponding AES pin as an Input (Receive).

Transmit - Generator
I/O is set to AES Output

Set the corresponding AES pin as an output (Transmit).
The output audio signal source is the selected Groupand Pair of the unit's Audio Generator, set in the Audiotab of the Generator – Configuration instrument. See
the section:"Generate - Audio " on page 6-9.

Transmit - Analyzer
I/O is set to AES Output

Set the corresponding AES pin as an output (Transmit).
The output audio signal source is the selected Groupand Pair of the selected Audio Meter. See thesection: "Analyzer - Audio Meters" on page 10-5.

Transmit - Dolby Decoder
I/O is set to AES Output

Set the corresponding AES pin as an output (Transmit).
The output Dolby E signal source is any of the four
decoded Dolby pairs, together with the downmixed pairfrom the Dolby Decoder. See the section: "Analyzer Audio Meters" on page 10-5.

Transmit - PassthroughI/O is set to AES Output

Set the corresponding AES pin as an output (Transmit)
The output audio signal is routed from the chosen AES
Passthrough Source.

AES 1 Transmit Pair
AES 2 Transmit Pair
AES 3 Transmit Pair
AES 4 Transmit Pair

Group 1: Pair 1, Group 1: Pair 2,
Group 2: Pair 1, Group 2: Pair 2,
Group 3: Pair 1, Group 3: Pair 2,
Group 4: Pair 1, Group 4: Pair 2,
Group 5: Pair 1, Group 5: Pair 2,
Group 6: Pair 1, Group 6: Pair 2,
Group 7: Pair 1, Group 7: Pair 2,
Group 8: Pair 1, Group 8: Pair 2

Select the required Audio Group and Pair.

Passthrough Source

AES 1,
AES 2,
AES 3,
AES 4

Set the AES pin corresponding to the passthroughsource.

Page 4-18

PHABRIX Qx User ManualVideo Timing & System Reference (SDI Mode)
Overview
The Video Timing & System Reference Instrument provides measurements that enable you toassess the timing quality of the input relative to a selected reference. If necessary, you can then set
timing offsets against which to measure. This section covers the measurement and adjustment tools
available for SDI mode.

Video Timing in SDI Mode
SDI A vs System Reference
In SDI Mode, the upper section of the Video Timing & System Reference instrument window
compares the timing of the SDI-A input against a selected System Reference to which the unit islocked. You can select the System Reference from External, SDI or Free Run reference signals. The
upper section of the instrument displays the following resulting measurements in both spatial units(lines and pixels) and time units (μs or ns):l

Measured TiminglOffset to Apply (with External Reference and SDI only)l

Offset Timing (with External Reference and SDI only.)

You can choose to apply an Offset to the System Reference against which to measure. The positionof the Offset (Offset Position) is shown on the timing meter as a black triangle.

Figure 4-13: Video Timing & System Reference Instrument (SDI Mode)SDI Co-Timing
The lower SDI Co-Timing section of the window displays timing information for each input of a single(SDI-A), dual (SDI-A and -B) or quad link (SDI-A, -B, -C and -D) signal. Many of the standards associatedwith UHDTV are a combination of signals to form the image plane. Relative timing tools indicate thatthe dual or quad elements creating the single picture are correctly aligned and compared with thereference. The instrument presents both graphic and numeric values for this critical measurement.
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-19

The horizontal Early/Late timing meters show whether the timing offset on each subsequent input isearlier or later than the input signal on SDI-A. The Instrument displays the actual timing offset values in
the Time column to the right of the timing meters. Early timings are show as negative values and late
timings are positive. Any red text indicates a measurement outside the specification.
Note: The Timing instrument in this software release is locked to SDI Input A (SDI In A).

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters of the Video Timing & System Reference
instrument submenu:
Table 4-5 : Video Timing & System Reference Menu Options (SDI Mode)
Item

Options

Description

System Reference

Free Run
External Reference
SDI

System reference locking controls define thereference to which the unit and any signal it
generates is locked. By selecting the default
option Free Run, the system locks to theinternal oscillator as the timing reference signal.
If the system loses the external or SDI reference signal for some reason, the system willautomatically switch to use the Free Run reference signal.
You can view system reference lock status
information by hovering the cursor over the system reference in the upper-right corner of the
instrument. Any error or warning conditions concerning the status of the reference are displayed in red or yellow respectively.

Reference Timing Meter
Range+/− 0.1 line, +/− 0.5 line, +/− 0.5 frame

Adjusts the displayed range of the reference
timing meter in the upper section of the Instrument to display readings at frame scale, or tozoom in to a fraction of a line.

Input Measurement Offset
TypeLines And Pixels
Time

Defines whether to apply an offset using spatial(lines/pixels) or temporal (μs, ns) values.

Input Measurement Time
Offset0.00, +/− 0.01, etc...

For Time as the offset type, set the timing offset
in microseconds (μs).

Input Measurement Line
Offset0 to +/− (Total number of Lines in thecurrent standard minus one.)

For Lines And Pixels as the offset type, set thecoarse timing offset as a number of lines.

Input Measurement Pixel
Offset0 to +/− (Total number of Pixels per
Line in the current standard minusone.)

For Lines And Pixels as the offset type, set thefine timing offset as a number of pixels.

Set Input Measurement
Offset to current

System Control

Sets the input measurement offset to the same
position as the current SDI In A signal.

Clear Input Measurement
OffsetSystem Control

Removes any input measurement offset.

Page 4-20

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

SFP (A, B) - Info (SDI Modes)
Overview
The SFP - Info windows provide at-a-glance physical status information on each SFP+ module,
including Identifier, Connector, line code (Encoding), Vendor details and approval status for use withthe unit. More detailed status information for the SFP, such as temperature and voltage are also
displayed.

Figure 4-14: SFP (A, B) - Info Instrument

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters in the SFP (A, B) - Info instrument submenu:
Table 4-6 : Video Timing & System Reference Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Temperature Units°C, (Default)°F

Units displayed for SFP temperature measurements.

Optical Power UnitsmW (Default)dBm

Units displayed for SFP Rx/Tx optical power.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 4-21

5
IP System Setup and Configuration
This chapter describes the System Instruments used to setup and configure the unit for your desired
test and measurement functions and includes the following sections:lOverviewl

IP Input and Output Schematicsl

IP Connectionsl

ST 2110 Input Optical SFP Connection (Analyzer - IP 2110 Boot Mode)l

ST 2022-6 Input Optical SFP Connection (Analyzer - IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)l

ST 2022-6 Output Optical SFP Connection (Generator - IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)l

System IO for IP Boot Modesl

SFP IP Networkl

LLDP Information (IP 2110 Boot Mode)lSFP (A, B) - Info (IP Boot Modes)l

NMOS (IP 2110 Boot Mode)l

NMOS Receivers - SDP (IP 2110 Boot Mode)l

NMOS Receivers - IS05 (IP 2110 Boot Mode)l

SFP A/B - PTP Info (IP 2110 Boot Mode)lVideo Timing & System Reference (IP Boot Modes)l

IP Receive - Flow SelectlMulticast Setup (Multicast Requests)lFlow Protocol Configuration (Flow Config)lAnalyzer - 2110 Format Setup (IP ST 2110 Boot Mode)lVideo Timing & System Reference (IP 2110 Boot Mode)l

AES IO Configuration (IP Boot Modes)

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-1

IP Connectors and Modules
Overview
All IP connections to the unit are made using SFP+ or SFP28 (recommended) transceiver modules asshown below.

Figure 5-1: Optical Fiber Connector and 10 Gbit/s MSA SFP+ Optical Transceiver Module

Note:
The type of optical transceiver module supported by the unit depends on theversion ID of the Mezzanine interface board as follows:llUnits with Mezzanine ID 0 to 9 support 10G Ethernet MSA SFP+ IP
Optical Transceiver Modules supplied by PHABRIX.
Units with Mezzanine ID 10 and above may use either PHABRIX supplied or third party 10Gs Ethernet MSA SFP+ IP Optical Transceiver Modules.

You can find the version of an installed Mezzanine board in the About dialog,
see the section: "Checking the Unit Licenses" on page 3-9.

Page 5-2

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

IP Input and Output (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)
The following graphic shows a schematic view of IP inputs and outputs to and from the Analyzer andGenerator circuitry, using SFP+ modules.

Figure 5-2: IP Input/Output Modules to Analyzer / Generator Circuitry (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

Where:l

EQ = SDI Cable Equalizer (Not Used with IP)lTx = Signal Transmitterl

EYE = Eye Processing Circuitry (SDI Only)l

MSA = Multi-source Agreement

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-3

IP Input and Output (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
The following graphic shows a schematic view of IP inputs and outputs to and from the Analyzer andGenerator circuitry, using SFP+ modules.

Figure 5-3: IP Input/Output Modules to Analyzer / Generator Circuitry (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

Where:

Page 5-4l

EQ = SDI Cable Equalizer (Not Used with IP)lTx = Signal Transmitterl

EYE = Eye Processing Circuitry (SDI Only)l

MSA = Multi-source Agreement

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

IP Interfaces to the Unit
Overview
The standard IP option (PHQXO-IP-STND) supports the SMPTE standards ST 2110 and ST 2022-6
HD/3G payloads by way of the 10G SFP+ optical transceiver modules. In addition, advanced IP
network traffic measurement tools are provided by the option PHQXO-IP-MEAS and a packet interval
profile generator for ST 2022-6 in IP 2022-6 boot mode with PHQXO-IP-NGT.
In IP 2110 boot mode you can simultaneously analyze ST 2110-20 (video), 2110-30 (PCM) and 2110-31(AES transport) audio, 2110-40 ANC media flows while using ST 2022-7 Seamless IP Protection
Switching (SIPS). Furthermore, hardware-based time-stamping locked to PTP ensures accurate, realtime, deterministic timing and buffer measurements of media flows through the support of ST 2059
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) on SFP+A.
IP connections to the unit using the rear panel 10G SFP+ optical transceiver module(s) are as follows:lll

ST 2110 input (Rx) on SFP+A and/or SFP+B.
ST 2110 input (Rx) on SFP+A and/or SFP+B with ST 2059 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) on
SFP+A only.
ST 2110 input (Rx) with ST 2022-7 SIPS on both SFP+A and SFP+B and ST 2059 Precision Time
Protocol (PTP) on SFP+A.

l

ST 2022-6 input (Rx) on SFP+A.

l

ST 2022-6 output (Tx) on SFP+B.

With PHABRIX-supplied 10G SFP+s (PHSFP-10GE-SR) you must use LC-to-LC optical, multimodeduplex fiber cables for IP connections to the SFPs; the following cable specifications are approved by
PHABRIX:l

OM1 (62.5/125)l

OM2 (50/125)l

OM3 (50/125)l

OM4 (50/125)

With PHABRIX-supplied 10G SFP+s (PHSFP-10GE-LR) you must use LC-to-LC optical, single mode
duplex fiber cables for IP connections to the SFPs; the following cable specifications are approved by
PHABRIX:l

OS1 (9/125)l

OS2 (9/125)

ST 2110 Input Optical SFP Interfaces (Analyzer - IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Since Qx software release 3.01, both SFP+A and SFP+B are available as input connections for ST 2110
IP video, audio and ancillary data (ANC) flows at 10G over IP.
Support for ST 2059 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is currently available on SFP+A only.
You can analyze flows on SFP+A or SFP+B, or use both interfaces in tandem in a Seamless IP
Protection Switching (SIPS) configuration where ST 2022-7 functionality provides seamlessreconstruction of flows by using the best packets presented on either interface.
You can define the video and audio flow parameters in the Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup Instrument.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-5

In addition, the software provides enhanced IP ST 2110 measurement capabilities with the optional
license PHQXO-IP-MEAS including:l

ST 2110 VRXFulll

ST 2110 CMaxl

Advanced video timinglDual-port interpacket timing windows

ST 2022-6 Input (Rx) Optical SFP Connection (Analyzer - IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)
The Analyzer receive (Rx) connection for IP ST 2022-6 video is the interface SFP+A. This is the rightmost SFP when viewed from the rear and provides the multirate 2022-6 IP video analyzer connection
from 1.5G HD-SDI to 3G-SDI over IP.
If the SMPTE ST 352 packets are known to be incorrect then you have the option to select Ignore
payload identifier packets (ST 352) in the Analyzer - Video Standard window.

ST 2022-6 Output (Tx) Optical SFP Connection (Generator - IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)
The Generator transmit (Tx) connection for IP ST 2022-6 video is the interface SFP+B. This is the leftmost SFP when viewed from the rear. This output provides the multirate 2022-6 IP video packet
generation from 1.5G HD-SDI to 3G-SDI over IP.

Page 5-6

PHABRIX Qx User ManualSystem IO for IP Modes
Overview
Due to the complexity of the UHDTV standards, PHABRIX has introduced innovative ways to display
status information. The System IO Instrument has been designed to provide a quick overview of thesignal inputs and outputs connected to the unit.
The System IO window displays the status of signal inputs and outputs, external reference, and thetype of interface connector fitted.

System IO for IP Boot Modes
The receive inputs (IP 2022-6, IP 211 boot modes) and transmit output (IP 2022-6 boot mode) of theactive IP SFP+ interface modules are represented in the dialog window by different coloredconnector icons. The color of the connector icons corresponds to the color of either the Analyzer (Rx)or Generator (Tx) instruments, to aid recognition.
An entirely grayed-out connector indicates that a signal is not present. If an SFP+ is unseated or notpresent, this is displayed graphically with a black void to indicate a missing SFP+.
Note: The SFP icons in the System IO instrument are also an indicator of media traffic and aregrayed-out if the traffic on the SFP falls below 1000 packets/second.
The tables display SFP+ type and presence information, together with external reference standard
and status overview.

Figure 5-4: System IO Instrument Showing SFP-A in IP Mode

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-7

SFP IP Network
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

Overview
The SFP IP Network instrument provides an overview of the status of the unit's SFP interfaces used
for ST 2022-6 IP packet transmission (SFP+ B) and reception (SFP+ A), and for ST 2110 IP packet
reception (SFP+ A and B). This window displays the following parameters:l

SFP+A, SFP+B presencelCarrier signal presencelInterface Statusl

SFP MAC and IP addresseslDomain Name System (DNS) Server IP addresslPacket informationl

IGMP maximum version status

Figure 5-5: SFP IP Network Instrument

In addition, error status information is displayed at the foot of the window.

Instrument Menu Options
Right-click in the Instrument window to display a submenu you can use to set the IP address (DHCP or
Static) and network/subnet mask of each SFP using a USB keyboard or on-screen keypad.

Page 5-8

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 5-6: SFP IP Network Menu Options

The following table lists the configurable parameters in the SFP IP Network instrument submenu:
Table 5-1 : SFP IP Network Options
Item

Options

Description

IP Addressing Mode

Dynamic (Default)
StaticSelect the method to set the IP address of the SFP, either
automatically, using DHCP, or manually, by entering the IP
address directly. When set to Dynamic (default), the IP
address, mask, gateway and DNS fields are grayed out
and these details are assigned automatically. When set toStatic, the IP addressing fields are activated, allowing you
to enter the IP details manually.

SFP A / B IP Addr and Mask

Automatically allocated(Dynamic) or Manual Entry(Static)

IP address and mask of the SFP.
Mask selection is by way of a dropdown menu; set mask
in range 8 to 31. Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR)
notation is used with a default value of /24 (i.e.,
255.255.255.0)

SFP A / B Gateway IP Addr

Automatically allocated(Dynamic) or Manual Entry(Static)

IP address of the SFP Gateway.

SFP A / B DNS IP Addr

Automatically allocated(Dynamic) or Manual Entry(Static)

IP address of the DNS server.
Set IP address of DNS Server as required, for example,
when manually configuring for use with NMOS.

Apply SFP A / B
IP Parameters

Instrument Control

Apply and save the IP addresses when manually allocated.

IGMP Max Version

IGMP V3 (Default)
IGMP V2
IGMP V1

Represents the highest supported version of the Internet
Group Management Protocol (IGMP). Currently version 3
is the highest supported version. In the event that the
network is running IGMP version 2 or version 1, the unit
automatically switches down to the lower version of the
protocol. Currently there is no visual display of theversion at which the unit is running.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-9

Item

Options

Description
You can set the maximum allowed IGMP version either
using this instrument or in the PTP Info instrument.
Selecting the highest available IGMP Max Version willaffect all IGMP requests (including both PTP, through the
PTP Info instrument, and Media Flows requested throughthe IP Receive - Flow Select instruments.)

Page 5-10

PHABRIX Qx User ManualLLDP Information
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

Overview
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a link layer protocol used by network devices to advertise
their identity, capabilities and neighbors. The LLDP Info Instrument is particularly useful as an in-band
method when you need to identify the port and device to which the unit is connected at the other endof a wired Ethernet link on a local area network.

Figure 5-7: LLDP Info Instrument

When you enable LLDP send and receive, the unit searches for neighboring LLDP-enabled devices
connected to SFP A, SFP B and the Management Port. The unit reports the following data items:lSystem NamelSystem DescriptionlChassis IDlPort IDlPort DescriptionlManagement IP AddresslPrimary VLAN ID

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-11

The unit can provide the following information over LLDP:
Table 5-2 : LLDP Information Provided
Item

Unit Reports

System Name:

Serial number

System Description:

PHABRIX Qx and
Software Version Number

Chassis ID and subtype:

Unit Management MAC address

Port ID and subtype:

Unit Management MAC address

Port Description:

Management IP Addresses:lEth0 (Management)lphabEth0 (SFP A)lphabEth1 (SFP B)

Management IP address

Instrument Menu Options

Figure 5-8: LLDP Info Menu Options

The following table lists the configurable parameters in the LLDP Info instrument options menu:
Table 5-3 : LLDP Info Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

LLDP Send and Receive

EnabledDisabled (Default)

When disabled, restricts some of the information that iscommunicated over LLDP, for example, when considering the IT security of your system. You can enable
these parameters to allow routine maintenance.

Send Version Info in System Description

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

Displayed only when LLDP Send and Receive is enabled.
When disabled, the system description will indicate only
PHABRIX Qx and will not advertise the software version
number.

Send Management Port IP
Address

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

Displayed only when LLDP Send and Receive is enabled.
When disabled, the unit will not advertise its management
IP address.

Page 5-12

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

SFP (A, B) - Info (IP Modes)
Overview
The SFP - Info windows provide at-a-glance physical status information on each SFP module,
including Identifier, Connector, line code (Encoding), Vendor details and approval status for use withthe unit. More detailed status information for the SFP, such as temperature and voltage are also
displayed.

Figure 5-9: SFP (A, B) - Info Instrument

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters in the (A, B) - Info instrument submenu:
Table 5-4 : SFP (A, B) - Info Instrument Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Temperature Units°C, (Default)°F

Units displayed for SFP temperature measurements.

Optical Power UnitsmW (Default)dBm

Units displayed for SFP Rx/Tx optical power.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-13

NMOS Status Overview& Configuration (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Overview
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

The AMWA NMOS toolset supports IS-04 Discovery and Registration (versions 1.0, 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3)
and IS-05 Device Connection Management (versions 1.0 and 1.1). Support is also provided for the
discovery of PTP Domain Number by way of IS-09 System Discovery. The unit supports discovery
over both multicast DNS (mDNS) and unicast DNS-SD as described in the requirements(JT-NM TR1001-1:2018) as well as manual entry of the NMOS Registry address.
The NMOS Instrument displays status information about the unit when acting as an NMOS receiver,providing the following:l

NMOS Node current status (Enabled or Disabled)l

DNS Search Domain (Local or Domain name)lOperating mode (Registered or Peer to Peer)lRegistration Discovery (Manual or Automatic)l

Registration URLlReceiver Mode (NMOS interface type, dual or single)lConfigure with IS-09 (Enable or disable remote discovery of PTP domain number)

Figure 5-10: NMOS Instrument - Status Overview (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

For additional NMOS instruments in the group, see:

Page 5-14l"NMOS Receivers - SDP (IP 2110 Boot Mode)" on page 5-19l

"NMOS Receivers - IS05 (IP 2110 Boot Mode)" on page 5-23

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 5-11: NMOS Generic Configuration Dialog (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

As a component of an NMOS-enabled environment, the unit can register its presence with the NMOS
Registry as either a pair of single interface nodes, or as a dual interface node, for all flow types.
Use the configuration dialog of the NMOS Instrument to enable / disable the unit as an NMOS node
and, when enabled, set the NMOS communication parameters of the node. This configuration is usedby the following, additional instruments in the NMOS Group:l

NMOS Receiver - SDPl

NMOS Receiver - IS05.

An overview of the components comprising the NMOS Group is shown in Figure 5-12 For more
information on each of these NMOS instruments, see the corresponding section.
Once registered as a receiver node, you can use an NMOS Controller to manage the active
connections with the unit.
The choice of single/dual interface for the NMOS receiver node is independent of the choice of ST
2022-7 SFP A, SFP B, or Seamless SFP A+B mode selection.
Note: In the event that the unit is unable to locate the NMOS Registry, it will revert to NMOS Peer
to Peer mode and display Peer to Peer in place of the NMOS Registry IP address and port
number.
Any changes to connectivity made by the NMOS Controller are dynamically reflected in thecorresponding NMOS Instrument.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-15

Figure 5-12: An Overview of the NMOS Group of Instruments (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

Page 5-16

PHABRIX Qx User ManualInstrument Menu Options

Figure 5-13: NMOS Instrument Options and Configuration Menu (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

The following table lists the configurable parameters in the NMOS instrument options menu:

Table 5-5 : NMOS Menu Options
Item
NMOS Node

Options
EnabledDisabled (Default)

Description
When enabled, allows the unit to act as an NMOS
Node, and announce itself as a receiver to the NMOS
Registry.
Note: If the interface changes (for example, it might bedisconnected or taken down) the NMOS Node must
be disabled and then re-enabled to re-establish theconnection.

Configuration....

N/A

Opens the Configuration dialog, see parameter details
below.

Configuration Dialog Parameters
Get config via IS-09

EnabledDisabled (Default)

Use NMOS IS-09 to obtain common global systemparameters. When enabled, the unit will obtain the
PTP domain from the IS-09 system source and apply
to both SFP interfaces, if available.

DNS Search Domain Blank (default) or free text entry
field.

When left blank, the unit uses multicast DNS (mDNS). If
you wish to use unicast DNS-SD, enter the requiredname of the DNS Search domain manually, using an
external USB keyboard. After manually entering a
DNS Search Domain, click Apply DNS Settings.

Receiver mode

Dual interface
Single Interface

This option enables you to select whether the unit
registers itself as either an NMOS single or dual receiving interface. When single, each interface is displayed
as a single entity in the NMOS Controller. When dual,
the interfaces are displayed as a pair in the NMOS
Controller. When prompted, confirm your change.

Registry discovery

Auto (DNS-SD) (Default)
ManualUse either default, automated mDNS/DNS Service Discovery as defined by the DNS Search Domain entry to
Identify the NMOS Registry, or enter the Registrydetails manually.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-17

Item

Options

Description

Registry host /address

Blank (default) or free text entry
field.

Active only when Registry discovery set to Manual.
Use the number pad to specify the IP address of the
NMOS Registry.

Registry port

3000 (Default)

Active only when Registry discovery set to Manual.
Use the number pad to specify the port number of the
NMOS Registry.

Registration
API version

v1.0 (Default)
v1.1
v1.2
v1.3

Active only when Registry discovery set to Manual.
Controls which version of the IS-04 API the NMOS
node uses.
Note: All API Versions will be displayed.

Use Custom
NMOS Resource
Prefix

EnabledDisabled (Default)

By default the NMOS Node Label is set to the unit's
serial number e.g., qx-123456. This is then used aspart of the NMOS resource label e.g.,
qx-123456 SFP A VID 1.
When enabled, this control enables you to enter adifferent NMOS node label, if required,e.g., MCR Qx

NMOS Resource
PrefixBlank (default) or free text entry
field.

Active only when Use Custom NMOS Resource
Prefix enabled.
Use a USB keyboard to enter a custom prefix
NMOS device label for the NMOS resource name.

Note: If you are not using DHCP and are configuring the system by specifying the DNS Server
manually, it is recommended do so in the SFP IP Network instrument, see "SFP IP Network" onpage 5-8.

Page 5-18

PHABRIX Qx User ManualNMOS Receivers - SDP(IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Overview
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

The NMOS Receivers - SDP instrument displays either a summary status overview (1/16 screensize) or details of the current NMOS SDP file, defining the sender connectivity of the node (1/16 or 1/4
screen size).
The NMOS Receivers - SDP instrument toggles between displaying the statuses of the Master
Enable, RTP Enables and SDP record, displaying the content of the active or staged Session
Description Protocol (SDP) records.
Use this instrument to review the SDP file content or to save SDP files for offline analysis.

NMOS Receivers - SDP
As a component of an NMOS-enabled environment, the unit can register its presence with the NMOS
Registry, for all flow types, as either a pair of single nodes, or as a dual receiver node.
This Instrument will display either one or two SDP records, depending on the configuration of the
NMOS Receiver. If configured for an NMOS dual interface, SFP A and SFP B interfaces are treated asa pair and only one SDP record is displayed. When configured for NMOS single interfaces, then SFP A
and SFP B are treated individually and the unit displays separate SDP records for each interface. For
more information, see IETF RFC 4566 SDP: Session Description Protocol and SMPTE ST 2110-20, -30,
-31 and -40.
At 1/16 screen size, you can switch the display between either a summary overview, showing the stateof the Master and RTP Enables and the presence of a valid SDP record for each flow, or the details of
the SDP file. The display adapts to show either one, two or four audio flows, depending on thenumber of flows configured in the IP Receive - Flow Select instrument.
In the summary overview, the unit displays the following information about the connection:
l

l

l

l

Master Enable: Shows the status of either the active or staged NMOS Master Enable.
RTP Enabled: (Single interface) Shows the status of either the Active or Staged NMOS RTP
enable for each interface.
RTP 1 / RTP 2 Enabled: (Dual interface) Shows the status of either the active or staged NMOSRTP Enable for each interface.
SDP Present: Shows whether a validated SDP record is present.

At 1/16 screen size, switch between active and staged views, or the display of Summary or SDP details
using the options menu.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-19

Figure 5-14: NMOS Receivers - SDP Instrument Views (1/16 Screen Size) (IP 2110 Boot Mode)At 1/4 screen size, the instrument displays the full details of the SDP record.
You can switch between the active and staged data from the options menu and the unit displays thecurrent selection (Active or Staged) in the instrument's title bar.
Once registered, you can use an NMOS Controller to manage the active connections with the unit.
Use the tabs above the SDP panel(s) to monitor the active video, audio and ancillary SDP records, orto inspect the staged SDP files.
Note: The unit listens for NMOS communications on UDP Port 3000.
The choice of single/dual NMOS node is independent of the choice of 2022-7 SFP A, SFP B, or
Seamless SFP A+B mode selection.
Note: In the event that the unit is unable to locate the NMOS Registry, it will revert to NMOS Peer
to Peer mode and display Peer to Peer in place of the NMOS Registry IP address and port
number in the title bar.
Any changes to connectivity made by the NMOS Controller are dynamically reflected in the NMOS
Receivers - SDP Instrument.

Page 5-20

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 5-15: NMOS Receivers - SDP Instrument View (Dual Interface, 1/4 Screen Size) (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

Saving SDP Records to Disk
You can save the active SDP records to disk as follows:
1. Open the Options menu and select Save Active SDPs.
The unit saves all active SDP records to a zip file.
2. Access the SDP records from the following folder:
From the File Manager:
qx:/log/sdp
Using SFTP:/transfer/log/sdp

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-21

Instrument Menu Options

Figure 5-16: NMOS Receivers - SDP Instrument Menu Options

The following table lists the configurable parameters in the NMOS Receivers - SDP instrument
options menu:
Table 5-6 : NMOS Receivers - SDP Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Word Wrap SDP

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, uses word wrap to display the full SDP
text descriptions in the available width of the display window. When disabled, you will need to use the horizontal
scroll bar(s) to read long SDP descriptions.

Highlighting

None (Default)
Monochrome
Color

Select Color to open the color palette from which you canselect the most appropriate color in which to highlight
those SDP data parameters most pertinent to the unit's
setup, for example, the source and destination IP
addresses, video and audio setup parameters, etc.
Select Monochrome to highlight in gray those SDP data
parameters, most pertinent to the unit's setup. You cansave the highlighting option and any selected color in thepresets.

Highlighting Color

Select from color palette.

Choose a highlight color from the color palette in which todisplay SDP data parameters.

Show Summary View

Summary (Default)
SDP

Switch between the overview summary and the
SDP detail. This option is available only at 1/16 screen
size.

Active or Staged
View

Active (Default)
StagedThis option enables you to switch between the active
SDP file and the staged file.

Save Active SDPs

N/A
Active Control

Save the active, validated SDP file to the unit's storage.
The instrument saves files with a .sdp extension.

Change SDP file prefix...

ActiveReceiverSdp (Default)
Or enter an alternative filename
using a connected
USB keyboard.

Change the default file prefix if saving multiple SDP files
to prevent overwriting of the last saved file.

Page 5-22

PHABRIX Qx User ManualNMOS Receivers - IS05
(IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Overview
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

AMWA IS-05 Device Connection Management specifies how to allow a device in an NMOScompatible system to connect to other devices.
The NMOS Receivers - IS05 instrument displays a convenient view of the IS-05 parameters as seenby the Qx NMOS node for each flow.

NMOS Receivers - IS05
The NMOS Receivers - IS05 instrument provides additional detail about the NMOS connection to
supplement the information in the Session Description Protocol (SDP) record. This instrument displays
the current NMOS IS-05 parameters, defining the receiver connectivity of the node. The instrument
presents the IS-05 data in either a tree format (shown below), with expandable or collapsible sections,or as a raw text string. You can switch between the active and staged data from the options menu andthe unit displays the current selection (Active or Staged) in the instrument's title bar. The display
adapts to show tabs for either one, two or four audio flows, depending on the number of flows
configured in the IP Receive - Flow Select instrument.

Figure 5-17: NMOS Receivers - IS05 Instrument (Single Interface, 1/16 Screen Size) (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-23

The NMOS Receivers - IS05 instrument displays either one or two sets of IS-05 parameters,
depending on how the NMOS Receiver is configured. If the unit is configured for an NMOS dual
interface, SFP A and SFP B interfaces are treated as a pair, and only one IS-05 parameter set isdisplayed. If the unit is configured for NMOS single interfaces, then SFP A and SFP B are treatedindividually and the unit displays separate IS-05 parameter sets for each interface.
Each interface (either single or dual) provides tabs to switch between the possible flows (VID, AUD 1
to AUD 4 (configurable) and ANC) enabling you to view the IS-05 parameters for each flow. You canchoose to display the instrument in 1/16 screen size or, for improved viewing of data, at 1/4 screen
size.
For more information on the NMOS Receivers - SDP instrument, see "NMOS Receivers - SDP (IP 2110
Boot Mode)" on page 5-19.

Figure 5-18: NMOS Receivers - IS05 Instrument - Expanded to 1/4 Screen Size (Dual Interface) (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

Page 5-24

PHABRIX Qx User ManualInstrument Menu Options

Figure 5-19: NMOS Receivers - IS05 Instrument Menu Options

The following table lists the configurable parameters in the NMOS Receivers - IS05 instrument
options menu:
Table 5-7 : NMOS Receivers - IS05 Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Word Wrap JSON

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, wraps the raw text string containing the
IS-05 parameters to the displayed screen width.

Show Tree View

Tree (Default)
Raw

When enabled, displays the NMOS IS-05 parameters in
an interactive tree format.

Active or Staged
View

Active (Default)
StagedThis option enables you to switch between the active
and the staged IS-05 parameters.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-25

SFP A/B - PTP Info
(IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Overview
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

The unit supports SMPTE protocol ST 2059 Precision Time Protocol for the synchronization of media
across an IP network. You can choose to receive either a single active PTP reference feed or dual
PTP reference feeds into both SFPs, with one being the active system reference and the other astandby system reference.
If using dual PTP feeds, you can display a SFP A/B - PTP Info instrument for each SFP.
You can select the system reference in the Video Timing & System Reference Instrument. Use the
System Reference dropdown list to select either PTP SFP A, PTP SFP B or Free Run.
The selection of IGMP Max Version in the SFP IP Network instrument affects all IGMP requests,
including PTP and Media Flows requested in the IP Receive - Flow Select Instrument.

Figure 5-20: Dual SFP A and B - PTP Info Instruments (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

The SFP A/B - PTP Info Instrument features include:lPage 5-26

Control of the PTP Grandmaster (GM) domain and communication mode (Multicast (Multicast/Multicast) or SMPTE Mixed without negotiation (Multicast/Unicast)l

Indication of PTP lock statusl

GM information including Master ID and Best Master Clock Algorithm (BMCA) parameterslIndication of estimated frequency and phase lock offsetlIndication of one-step or two-step sync traffic.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

The PTP Info status information at the bottom of the screen indicates which SFP is in use and the stateof PTP lock, which you can interpret using the information in the following table:
Table 5-8 : PTP Information Status Messages
PTP Info Status
Message

PTP Info StatusColor

PTP Lock State

ListeningRed

The PTP Follower is listening on the selected domain number, but has
not acquired a PTP Leader or PTP Delay Request information.

Frequency Lock

Yellow

The PTP Follower has acquired a PTP Leader and has achieved frequency lock. The Estimated Phase offset is greater than 2 μs.

Frequency and Phase LockWhite

The PTP Follower is frequency locked and the estimated phase offset
is less than 2 μs.

In HoldoverYellow

The PTP Follower had acquired lock, but has now lost the PTP Leader
and is in frequency holdover.

Recovered from HoldoverYellow

The PTP Follower has recovered from a holdover condition where theGM was lost but subsequently re-acquired.

Use the Clear Warnings button in the Instrument submenu to remove any yellow warning messages
that may be displayed following changes to the PTP lock.
The SFP A/B - PTP Info Instrument provides detailed information about the PTP reference signal in
the following three tabs:lll

GM Info: Provides information about the PTP Grandmaster clock to which the system is locked
on SFP A and / or SFP B.
Qx Status: Provides information about the configuration, operating mode and status of the unit
with respect to the PTP reference signal, together with an indication of the quality of the lock to
PTP.
Messaging: Provides information about the timing and number of Announce and Sync
PTP messages received from the Grandmaster.

The content of each tab in the SFP A/B - PTP Info Instrument is described in the following sections:

GM Info Tab
The GM Info tab reports the following data elements relating to the PTP clock signal received fromthe Grandmaster:
Table 5-9 : Grandmaster Information Tab
Data Element

Description

DomainThe domain number of the current synchronization domain, in the range 0 (default) to
127.

Master ID

Identity attribute of the Grandmaster clock.

Priority 1

The Priority 1 attribute of the Grandmaster clock in the range 0 to 255 with the lower
value having the highest priority.

Priority 2

The Priority 2 attribute of the Grandmaster clock in the range 0 to 255 with the lower
value having the highest priority.

Clock Class

The traceability of the time or frequency distributed by the clock, provided as anumerical value identifying the clock state.

Clock Accuracy

Indicates the expected accuracy of the clock.
For example: < 250 ns
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-27

Data Element

Description

Variance

Provides an indication of the quality of the Grandmaster Clock.

Clock Source

The source of time used by the Grandmaster clock, for example, GPS.

PTP Time

Actual PTP time received from the Grandmaster to which the unit is aligned.
For example: 2020-09-16 11:00:00 (UTC)Qx Status Tab
The Qx Status tab reports the following data elements relating to the current PTP status of the unit:
Table 5-10 : Qx Status Data Tab
Data Element

Description

Communication Mode

Current setting of the unit. For more information, or to change the setting, see the section "Instrument Menu Options" on the facing page

Delay Req Interval

Current setting of the unit. For more information, or to change the setting, see the section "Instrument Menu Options" on the facing page

Announce Rec't Grace
PeriodCurrent setting of the unit. For more information, or to change the setting, see the section "Instrument Menu Options" on the facing page

Latency Offset

Current setting of the unit. For more information, or to change the setting, see the section "Instrument Menu Options" on the facing page

Local PTP State

Current status of the unit with respect to the PTP signal, for example, Listening.

Appl Freq Adjustmnt

The Applied Frequency Adjustment is the adjustment, in parts per billion, made to theunit's clock to make it frequency-locked to the clock of the Grandmaster, that is, bothclocks are at the same frequency but not necessarily at the same phase. This value iscalculated in software.

Appl Freq Adj Delta

The Applied Frequency Adjustment Delta is the change (delta) to the Applied Frequency Adjustment in the last second. When in lock, this will typically be 0 or 1 part perbillion.
This value is calculated in software.

Offset from Master

The estimated phase offset between the Grandmaster clock and the local follower
clock, for example, − 200 ns.

Steps Removed

The number of IP hops between the Grandmaster and the local follower clock. If the unit
were connected directly to the GM, the value would be 1.

PTP Messaging Tab
The Messaging tab reports the following data elements relating to the receipt of Announce and Sync
messages from the Grandmaster:
Table 5-11 : Messaging Data Tab
Data Element

Description

Announce Message Interval

The Grandmaster sends out Announce messages to provide listening nodes withinformation about the sending clock.
The Announce Message Interval is the time between consecutive Announce messages. This value is signaled by the GM and reported by the unit.

Announce Messages
Received

The number of Announce messages received from the Grandmaster to which the unit islocked.

Announce Messages
MissedThe number of Announce messages sent from the Grandmaster that were not received
by the unit.

Page 5-28

PHABRIX Qx User ManualData Element

Description

Sync Message Interval

The Grandmaster sends out Sync messages, which it uses to calculate the offset from
the Master and to make adjustments. This value is signaled by the GM and reported by
the unit.

Sync Messages Received

The number of Sync messages received from the Grandmaster to which the unit islocked.

Sync Messages Missed

The number of Sync messages sent from the Grandmaster that were not received by
the unit.

Last Sync Message

The state of the two-step flag in the last sync message indicating one-step or two-step.
A two-step flag indicates that there is a follow-up message containing the time-stamp,
whereas a one-step flag indicates that the time-stamp is included as part of the Sync
Message.

Instrument Menu Options

Figure 5-21: SFP A/B - PTP Info Instrument Menu Options

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-29

The following table lists the configurable parameters in the SFP A/B - PTP Info instrument submenu:
Table 5-12 : SFP A/B - PTP Info Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

PTP Engine

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When disabled, switches off the PTP engine on thecorresponding SFP to stop listening to PTP messages onthat interface.
You can select which SFP to use as the current, active
PTP engine using the System Reference dropdown in
the options menu of the Video Timing & System
Reference instrument.

Domain0 (default) to 127

Defines the IP domain in which the PTP GM is located.

Communication
Mode

Multicast(Multicast/Multicast)
SMPTE Mixed(Multicast/Unicast)

The unit supports two PTP communication modes:lMulticast mode (Multicast Announce and Sync,
Multicast Delay Request, Delay Response)

SMPTE Mixed mode without negotiation (Multicast Announce and Sync, Unicast Delay
Request, Delay Response)
In Multicast mode, you can set the unit automatically toadopt the Master Sync message rate for its multicast
Delay Request message rate, by setting the unit's
Master's Delay_Req interval option to Do not overridein Muticast mode. Alternatively, you can set the Delay
Request message rate to manual control by setting theunit's Master's Delay_Req interval option to Override in
all modes.
In SMPTE Mixed mode the Delay Request message rateis always under manual control.
l

Master's Delay_Req
Interval

Do not override in Multicast Mode In Multicast Mode, the default Delay_Req interval is set to(Default)
be the same as the Master Sync message interval.
Override in all modes

Delay_Req Interval

8 ms, 16, ms, 32 ms, 64 ms, 125 ms Allows you manually to define a Delay Request (Delay_(Default), 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 4 sReq) message interval, that is, the rate at which Delay_
Req messages are sent. When you set the Communication mode to SMPTE Mixed or Multicast (MM) andenable Override in all modes, this is the rate at which theunit sends Delay_request messages back to the Grandmaster.

Announce Timeout

2 - 10 (× Announce Timeout)
Default: 3 × Announce Timeout

Page 5-30

A Grandmaster transmits a PTP Announce Message toindicate its presence on the network. Accompanying thismessage is the signaled Announce Message Rate andthe Announce Timeout Count. A PTP follower, such as
this unit, uses this information to confirm that the Master isstill present and active. If the unit experiences a set of
missing Announce messages greater than the Announce
Timeout Count, then it will assume that the PTP Master ismissing and will attempt to re-lock. The time for this countto trigger is the Announce Timeout. This a user-definable
delay that is equal to the selected value multiplied by theAnnounce Timeout. The delay period allows for a seamless Grandmaster change-over before the unit attempts

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options

Description
to re-acquire PTP lock. The default setting is three times
the Announce Receipt timeout but you can choose
between two to ten times the Announce Receipt timeout
interval.

Latency Offset sign+−

Sets the Latency Offset as an increase (positive ( + ) value)or decrease (negative ( − ) value.)

Latency Offset(ms, μs, ns scales)

User Defined

The long term PTP phase alignment of the unit can beaffected by network delay asymmetries or, for example,
by conversion between a 1 G PTP source and a 25 G network. You can adjust this long-term PTP phase offset bycomparing the 1 PPS from the unit on the GPI output withthe 1 PPS from the PTP Grandmaster on an oscilloscope.
You can then adjust the unit's PTP Latency Offset control
sliders accordingly to bring the unit's 1 PPS into time alignment with the 1PPS of the Grandmaster. The value of the
PTP Latency offset is reported in the Qx Status tab of the
PTP Info instrument.

Update PTP configuration

System Control

Applies any changes after updating the PTP settings.

Clear Message Coun- System Control
ters

Resets all message counters to zero, for example, resets
the counters Announce Messages Received and Sync
Messages Received.

Clear Warnings

Removes warning messages from the status line at thebottom of the Instrument window.

System Control

The Delay Request message rate options are as follows:
Table 5-13 : Options for the Delay Request Message Rate
Delay Request
Messages/Second

Delay_Req Interval
8 ms

125

16 ms

62.5

32 ms

31.25

64 ms

15.625125 ms8

250 ms4

500 ms

2

1s

1

2s

0.5

4s

0.25

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-31

Video Timing & System Reference(IP Boot Modes)
Overview
The Video Timing & System Reference Instrument provides measurements that enable you toassess the timing quality of the Qx input relative to a selected reference. If necessary, you can then
set timing offsets against which to measure. The measurements and adjustment tools available
depend on the current mode of the Qx and whether the inputs are received from an SDI or IP system,as summarized in the following table.
Table 5-14 : Overview of IP Video Timing Functions by License and Boot Mode
Qx Boot Mode
IP 2022-6
PHQXO-IP-STND
License

Decapsulated vs System Reference

IP 2110External Reference vs PTPTiming in IP 2022-6 Boot Mode: Decapsulated vs System Reference
In IP 2022-6 Mode, the upper section of the Video Timing & System Reference instrument window
compares the timing of the Decapsulated input against a selected System Reference to which the Qx
is locked. You can select the System Reference from External or Free Run reference signals. The
upper section of the Instrument displays the following resulting measurements in both spatial units(lines and pixels) and time (μs or ns):

Page 5-32lMeasured TiminglOffset to Apply (with External Reference only)l

Offset Timing (with External Reference only.)

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 5-22: Video Timing & System Reference Instrument (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

A timing meter dynamically measures the timing of the input (white triangle) against the systemreference (centrally fixed, black vertical rectangle). In addition to measuring the input against an
absolute system reference, you can choose to apply a system reference offset against which tomeasure. The position of any offset is shown on the timing bar as a black triangle.

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters in the Video Timing & System Reference
instrument options menu:
Table 5-15 : Video Timing & System Reference Menu Options (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)
Item

Options

Description

System Reference

Free Run
External Reference

System reference locking controls define the reference
to which the Qx and any signal it generates is locked. By
selecting the default option Free Run, the system locks
to the internal Qx oscillator as the timing reference signal. If the system loses the external reference signal forsome reason, the system will automatically switch to use
the Free Run reference signal.
System reference lock status information is displayed in
the upper-right corner of the instrument, and any error in
the health state of the reference is displayed in red.

Reference Timing Meter
Range+/− 0.1 line, +/− 0.5 line, +/−0.5 frame

Adjusts the displayed range of the reference timing
meter in the upper section of the Instrument to display
readings at frame scale, or to zoom in to a fraction of aline.

Input Measurement Offset
TypeLines And Pixels
Time

Defines whether to apply an offset using spatial(lines/pixels) or temporal (μs, ns) values.

Input Measurement Time Off- 0.00, +/− 0.01, etc...
set

For Time as the offset type, set the timing offset in microseconds (μs).

Input Measurement Line Off- 0 to +/− (Total number ofset
Lines in the current standard minus one.)

For Lines And Pixels as the offset type, set the course timing offset as a number of lines.

Input Measurement Pixel Off- 0 to +/− (Total number ofset
Pixels per Line in the current standard minus one.)

For Lines And Pixels as the offset type, set the fine timing
offset as a number of pixels.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-33

Item

Options

Description

Set Input Measurement Offset to current

N/A

Sets the input measurement offset to the same position
as the current Decapsulated signal.

Clear Input Measurement
OffsetN/A

Removes any input measurement offset.

Page 5-34

PHABRIX Qx User ManualVideo Timing & Setting External Reference in IP Boot 2110 Mode
Requires Qx Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

Overview
In IP 2110 Boot Mode, the Video Timing & System Reference instrument must be stably locked to thesame PTP source as the sending device. The Video Timing & System Reference window includes
the following two tabs, each providing access to different timing data:llMedia Latency (for more information, see section "Video Timing & System Reference (IP 2110
Boot Mode)" on page 5-52
External Reference vs PTP

External Reference vs PTP Tab
The Ext Ref vs PTP tab is a timing tool for use in a hybrid system to compare the external analog
reference to the PTP reference. The system reference must be set to PTP and the Qx PTP lock must
be stable with a low PTP Estimated Phase Offset for this measurement to be valid.
The time difference between the external analog reference and PTP is displayed both in units ofvideo lines and pixels, and units of time (μs or ms.)
The accuracy of this measurement is dependent on the long term PTP phase alignment of the Qx.
This can be affected by network delay asymmetries or by conversion between a 1G PTP source and a
10G network.
You can adjust this long-term PTP phase offset by comparing the 1PPS from the Qx on the GPIO withthe 1PPS from the PTP Grandmaster on an oscilloscope and adjusting the Qx PTP Latency Offset
controls in the submenu of the PTP Info Instrument to bring the Qx 1PPS into time alignment with the
1PPS of the Grandmaster.
The tab displays any offset between an external reference signal and the PTP reference. It shows thisvalue in units of time as well as in lines and pixels. If the external reference originates from the same
source as PTP then the value displayed should represent the phase offset of the Qx. Use this tool toshow how well your external reference is locked to PTP. If it is not locked to PTP, you will notice thevalue drifting.

Figure 5-23: Ext Ref vs PTP Tab of the Video Timing & System Reference Instrument (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters available with a standard core license in theVideo Timing & System Reference Instrument options menu in IP 2110 Boot Mode:
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-35

Table 5-16 : Video Timing & System Reference Menu Options (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Item

Options

Description

Ext Ref vs PTP Tab Options
System Reference

PTP
External Reference

System reference locking controls define the reference
to which the Qx and any signal it generates is locked. In IP
2110 boot mode, make sure that the system reference isstably locked to the same PTP source as the sending
device.
System reference lock status information is displayed in
the upper-right corner of the instrument, and any error in
the health state of the reference is displayed in red.

Reference Timing Meter
Range+/− 0.1 line, +/− 0.5 line, +/−0.5 frame

Adjusts the displayed range of the reference timing meterin the upper section of the Instrument to display readings
at frame scale, or to zoom in to a fraction of a line.

Media Latency Tab Options
Latency Meters Zoom

Overview, A VID, A AUD 1, A Select a specific timing meter to switch between overAUD 2, A ANC, B VID, B
view and zoomed-in view.
AUD 1, B AUD 2, B ANC

Anchor time scale start in
Overview mode

Zero (0) or less, Any value

Set the start point of the timescale when in Overview.

Clear Min, Max values

N/A

Set the historical minimum and maximum values back to
zero.

Note: Monitoring of audio flows AUD 3 and AUD 4 is not supported in the current software
release.

Page 5-36

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

IP Receive - Flow SelectRequires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

Overview
The IP Receive - Flow Select window enables you to instruct the unit to issue an IGMP request
manually, categorize each received flow SMPTE protocol type, and then select IP flows for analysis.
The Multicast Requests table lists the IP flows together with their parameters. The IP flows include
those that match multicasts to which the unit has subscribed, together with multicast and unicast flowsthat have been sent to the unit.
When under AMWA NMOS control, the unit automatically issues an IGMP request, categorizes andselects a flow, all under the control of a Session Description Protocol (SDP) transport file.
In IP 2110 boot mode the unit can simultaneously process the following:ll

One 2110-20 video flow
Any of the following combinations of 2110-30 linear PCM or 210-31 AES-3 audio flows to the maximum limits below (at 125 μs packet times):lllWith 2110-30 linear PCM, either:l

One audio flow of up to 80 channels, orl

Two audio flows of up to 64 channels each, orlFour audio flows of up to 32 channels each.

With 2110-31 AES-3, either:l

One or two audio flows at up to 60 channels, orlFour audio flows of up to 32 channels each.

One ancillary (ANC) flow.

Note: The number of audio flows is now configurable and can be selected in the Flow Selectoptions menu.
The audio flows may be either of type ST 2110-30 (PCM) or ST 2110-31 (AES 3).
In IP 2022-6 boot mode, you can select one flow at a time for processing. Allocation of a media flow
type or protocol is independent of the Payload Type ID number, so it is possible to have several
different media flow types with the same Payload Type ID.
Detailed information for each flow is provided in the Multicast Requests table as follows:l

SFP Port (A or B)lChannel Allocation (Video, Audio 1, Audio 2, Audio 3, Audio 4, ANC)l

SMPTE Media Protocol (2110-20, -30, -40, etc.)l

Payload Type ID NumberlDestination and Source IP Addresses and Port NumberslSynchronization Source (SSRC) IdentifierlMean Flow Bandwidth averaged over 1 second
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-37

lTotal Packet CountslSequence Error Count.

Both Sequence Payload and CRC errors are displayed in the Seq errors count column. You can sortthe table by any parameter column, and once configured, left-click a flow for further analysis.
The overall status of the Multicast IGMP requests is displayed above the table, for example: Multicast
Requests: 18/18 joins sent. Multicast IGMP join and leave requests can be controlled using thesubmenu, and the maximum level of IGMP requests can be configured in either the PTP Info or SFP
IP Network Instruments.
Flow protocol configuration management is available from the submenu, and incoming flows withunassigned protocols (Other IP) can also be quickly configured by right-clicking the flow, thenassigning the flow type and analysis path in the configuration window.
In IP 2110 boot mode, IP Receive - Flow Select supports the reception of flows on SFP A or SFP B as
well as ST 2022-7 Seamless IP Protection Switching (SIPS) of pairs of flows on SFP A + B. In IP 2022-6
boot mode the reception of IP media flows is available on SFP A, with SFP B reserved fortransmission.
Note: SIPS protection of a flow pair is available across SFP A + B, however, SIPS protection of aflow pair within a single SFP is not supported.

Figure 5-24: IP Receive - Flow Select Instrument Displaying Overview of Multicast Requests Sent

Media flows may have already been presented to the unit either by a unicast sender, a networkorchestrator or by the unit being attached to a switch or router mirror port or passive optical tap. In
these situations, the details of the media flow are automatically displayed in the Flow Select window.
If the unit is required to initiate a multicast session by way of an IGMP request then this can beachieved either automatically, using either the JSON API or NMOS; or manually, by right-clicking in
the Flow Select tool and selecting the option Multicast/Flow Config from the submenu. This displays
a window with the selectable tabs:

Page 5-38lMulticast Requests (see "Multicast Setup (Multicast Requests)" on page 5-41)lFlow Configuration (see "Flow Protocol Configuration (Flow Config)" on page 5-43)
PHABRIX Qx User Manuall

NMOS Flow Config see "NMOS Flow Configuration (NMOS Flow Config)" on page 5-45.

The unit can access IP flows using either IGMP v1, v2 or v3 multicast requests, with the maximum levelof an IGMP request configured either by right-clicking on the Flow Select or alternatively in the PTPInfo or SFP IP Network Instrument submenus. The selected maximum IGMP multicast level is applied
to all media ports. Once a multicast group is successfully joined, all flows within it will appear in the IP
Receive - Flow Select window.
The IP flows with assigned SMPTE protocols listed in the window are those currently available forselection on the chosen interfaces. Click to select a flow for analysis; the selected flow is thenhighlighted.

Instrument Menu Options
The submenu, accessed by right-clicking the IP Receive - Flow Select window, calls-up multicast andflow configuration settings, persistence settings, together with list and selection clearing controls.

Figure 5-25: IP Receive - Flow Select Instrument Options Menu

The following table lists the configurable parameters in the IP Receive - Flow Select Instrument
submenu:
Table 5-17 : IP Receive - Flow Select Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Multicast/Flow Config Dialog selection

Click to open a new dialog box with tabs for Multicast Requests (see"Multicast Setup (Multicast Requests)" on page 5-41), Flow Config (see"Flow Protocol Configuration (Flow Config)" on page 5-43) and
NMOS Flow Config (see "NMOS Flow Configuration (NMOS Flow
Config)" on page 5-45 as previously described.

Request Multicasts
on boot

When enabled, sets the unit to request to receive Multicast flows automatically on re-boot.

Enabled (Default)
DisabledRe-lock flows on boot Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, sets the unit to re-lock to the selected flows automatically on re-boot.

Flow Persistence

Sets the amount of time that old, inactive flows remain displayed in
the Flow Select window

1s
10 s
30 s
1 min
5 min

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-39

Item

Options

Description

10 minInfinite
2022-7 Mode Selection

SFP A
SFP B
Seamless A+B

Choose whether you want to analyze flows available on one or both
SFP receiver interfaces (in IP 2110 boot mode).
The current interface mode is displayed in the top right-hand cornerof the instrument window (Analyzer Interface).
In IP 2022-6 boot mode, a single video flow can be selected for analysis at a time.
In IP 2110 boot mode up to six flows per interface (one video, fouraudio and one ANC) can be selected at the same time.
When ST 2022-7 seamless reconstruction is enabled (Seamless
A+B), up to four pairs (eight flows) are simultaneously used by the unit
for Seamless IP Protection Switching (SIPS). Identical instances of aflow (in terms of content) must be sent to both SFP interfaces. The unit
then reconstructs the flow using the best packets from either interface.

Audio Flows

1 x 80 Channels
2 x 64 Channels
4 x 32 Channels(Default)

Set the maximum number of received audio flows and audio channels
for each interface.
The default setting is four flows per interface at up to 32 channels per
flow.

Clear input list

System control

Click to clear the displayed list of available flows and the Packet andSequence Error counters.

Clear Selection

System control

Click to deselect the currently selected flow(s).

Page 5-40

PHABRIX Qx User ManualMulticast Setup (Multicast Requests)
To access the Multicast Setup dialog, select the Multicast/Flow Config option from the Instrument
submenu and click the Multicast Requests tab if not already selected.
Enter the details of the multicast to join and the desired SFP interface, using the controls in thebottom-right corner of the Multicast Requests tab.

Figure 5-26: IP Receive - Flow Select: Multicast Requests Tab

Using the Instrument Controls
Select interface SFP A or SFP B from the dropdown list.
Enter the destination IP address of the multicast group to join in the Dst IP fields using either a
USB keyboard or the soft keypad. Alternatively, hover over the number to adjust and use the mouse
scroll wheel to increase or decrease the number within the following range:l

Dst IP: > [224.0.0.1 to 239.255.255.255]

You can choose to use Source Specific Multicast (SSM), in conjunction with IGMPv3, to ensure thatthe unit receives packets originating from the source IP address that you select. To use SSM, selectthe SSM checkbox.
Note: IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 do not support SSM.
To send the multicast join request, click: Join.
This join request is added to the table of multicast requests in the tab dialog window, together withthe status of the join request.
To join a multicast already listed in the table, but not joined, or to resend a join request for a multicast
that has already been joined, select it and then click Join.
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-41

To exit a multicast, select it from the table in the dialog box, then click:
l

Leave

To exit all multicasts, select:l

Leave AllA prompt window is displayed, asking you to confirm that you want to leave all multicasts.
To request to re-join all multicasts currently listed in the dialog box table, select:lRe-join All

To close the Multicast Requests dialog window, click:l

Ok

To set the unit to request to re-join all multicasts currently listed in the dialog box table, automaticallyon reboot, return to the instrument submenu and enable the following parameter:lPage 5-42

Request Multicasts on boot > [Enabled, Disabled]

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFlow Protocol Configuration (Flow Config)
Having successfully joined a multicast, or if media traffic has already been routed to the unit, then all
the associated flows will be visible in the Flow Select table.
The multi-flow nature of SMPTE ST 2110 means that a fairly complex labeling procedure is required to
identify the various flows and their specific parameters. Before using an incoming IP flow in IP 2110
boot mode, it is important first to identify the type of SMPTE protocol flow you are dealing with, inorder to analyze it correctly.
If an IGMP join has been initiated under NMOS control, then all flow parameters will be automaticallyconfigured using the information in the Session Description Protocol (SDP) transport file.
If a media flow type is unknown to the unit, then the protocol type will be identified as Other IP, andthis will also automatically appear in the Unconfigured Flows table in the Flow Config dialog.
Configure the Flow protocol either by left-clicking the Other IP label of a flow in the Flow Selectwindow, or by using the Flow Config tool, which maintains the list of flow protocol configurations.
The unit automatically stores all flow configurations and this list builds up over a period of time. Media
flows can also be pre-configured, before being requested.

Using the Flow Config Controls
Select Multicast/Flow Config in the Instrument submenu, then click the Flow Config tab.
The dialog box displays the following window:

Figure 5-27: IP Receive - Flow Select: Flow Config Tab

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-43

l

l

l

The left-hand pane displays any unconfigured flows together with controls to set any user-controlled parameters that you can apply
The right-hand pane displays all configured flows, organized by protocol type. If you select asingle flow in this pane, the unit populates the flow details in the fields and checkboxes below
the Unconfigured Flows pane. In manual operation, only the Match Destination(Dst) IP checkbox is checked by default. You can select other checkboxes as required. When acheckbox is unchecked, Any is displayed in the corresponding field in the Configured Flows
pane.
When under automatic NMOS control, the following checkboxes are selected by default:lPayload TypelDestination IP AddresslDestination UDP Port NumberlSource IP Address.

To configure a flow, select one in the Unconfigured Flows window. Its current parameters populate
the flow parameter controls below the panel.
Using the controls, select options as required:llProtocol options in IP 2110 boot mode:l

2110-20 (video)l2110-30 (PCM audio)l2110-31 (AES 3 audio)l2110-40 (ancillary)l

2022-6 Not used.

Protocol option in IP 2022-6 boot mode:l2022-6.

Where an SSRC ID is included in an available flow, decide whether you want to analyze the flow only
when this SSRC is matched.
Once you have configured a flow, click Add move it into the right-hand pane of configured flows.
To remove the current configuration assigned to a flow, click Remove or click Remove All to clear all
flow configurations. If you choose Remove All, you are prompted to confirm that you want to remove
all configured flows. Click Remove All to proceed.
If the flow is still present on one of the SFP interfaces, it will appear back in the Unconfigured Flows
window, where it can be modified, if required.
On completion, click Ok to close the Flow Config window.

Page 5-44

PHABRIX Qx User ManualNMOS Flow Configuration (NMOS Flow Config)
When the unit generates an NMOS IS-05 join, the configured flows match against the following
iGMP and NMOS parameters by default:lPayload TypelDestination IPv4 Address (Dst IP)lDestination UDP Port Number (Dst UDP)l

Source IPv4 Address (Src IP)

There may be occasions in a typical network environment when these parameters do not match
perfectly so the unit provides the ability to adjust the precision of flow matching by manually deselecting one or more of these parameters. For example, if you deselect Payload Type, the flows will
match on the remaining three parameters: Dst IP, Dst UDP and Src IP.
If you de-select the Source IPv4 address, the unit will not issue an IGMP source-specific multicast joinrequest as the source IP address can no longer be used.
If you deselect any of the matching parameters, be sure to click OK to apply your changes.

Figure 5-28: IP Receive - Flow Select: NMOS Flow Config Tab

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-45

Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup(IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Overview
The Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup instrument automatically evaluates the received and selected
ST 2110-20 video flow and estimates the appropriate video standard for that flow.
Two tabs provide access to the separate Video and Audio parameters, enabling you to define
parameters for one video flow and up to four audio flows.
Features include:lll

Automatic estimation of video format parameters for ST 2110-20 flows
Extraction of video format parameters from an SDP record by way of NMOS for ST 2110-20
flows
User-configurable video format parameters for ST 2110-20 flows.

Video TabIn the Video tab, the video parameters are displayed in three columns to show their source asfollows:lllAuto: Lists the video parameters automatically detected from the received flow
SDP: Lists the video parameters extracted from the Session Description Protocol (SDP) record,
provided by NMOS, if available. If you use an SDP record to select a flow, then the format parameters are populated automatically from the SDP transport file.
Override: Lists the video parameters entered manually, which you can use to override theauto-detected, or SDP parameters and apply them to the flows selected for analysis if necessary.

Figure 5-29: Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup Instrument - Video Tab
Page 5-46

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

The Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup Instrument automatically estimates the following parameters for aselected 2110-20 video flow:l

Picture dimensions (height and width)l

Frame packing type (interlaced, progressive, or segmented)l

Frame ratelColor formatlSample formatl

Bit depth.

All parameters currently in use by the video standard are displayed in a bold white font, with unused
parameters grayed-out. If the flow is selected using an SDP, the unit extracts the video parametersfrom the SDP and displays them in the SDP column. If an SDP record is not available, the SDP column
is grayed-out and no parameters are listed. SDP parameters are currently provided only if you selectthe flow using an SDP available through NMOS. If you later manually deselect the flow, and thenreselect it, the SDP parameters will be lost.
If necessary, you have an option always to use the override parameters. If so, the auto-estimated and
SDP parameters remain available and displayed but are not used. The default override is the same as
the current default video standard: 1920x1080i50 YCbCr:422 10 bit SDR 709.
When using Auto-estimation, where a video parameter can be estimated correctly, the autoestimated parameters take priority over the supplied SDP parameters (if available). When it is nottechnically possible to auto-estimate a parameter, then either the SDP values (if available) or the
manual settings are adopted instead.
It is not technically possible to estimate the Transfer Curve or the Colorimetry parameters so these
are taken either from the SDP file (if available) or the Manual settings. Furthermore, it is not possible todistinguish automatically between either YCbCr:444 and RGB:444, or YCbCr:422 12 bit and RGB:444
8 bit formats. In these situations the Auto Detector will report undetermined in red font in thecorresponding field of the Auto column.

Figure 5-30: Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup Instrument Showing Undetermined ParameterIn the event that a parameter does not match the parameter currently in use, that parameter isdisplayed in a yellow font to alert you. For example, the following screen shows that the picture
dimensions, frame packing and frame rate in the SDP column do not match those in the Auto column
currently in use.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-47

Figure 5-31: Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup Instrument Showing Unmatched SDP Parameters

The 2110 Format Setup Instrument estimates the standard for the 2110-20 video flow on bothinterfaces SFP A/B, with the video standard used depending on the setting of the current analyzer
interface. If the unit is in Seamless A + B mode, then the parameters from SFP A are used unless noflow is present or a fault is identified, in which case, the parameters from SFP B are used.
If the video standards from the two 2022-7 flows do not match and the analyzer interface is set toseamless mode, then an alert is displayed.

Audio Tab
The 2110 Format Setup Instrument automatically estimates the following parameters for the selectedaudio flows (AUD1 through AUD4):l

Packet time (ms)lChannel count.

When using Auto-estimation, where an audio parameter can be estimated correctly, the autoestimated parameters take priority over the supplied SDP parameters (if available). When it is nottechnically possible to auto-estimate a parameter, then either the SDP values (if available) or the
manual settings are adopted instead.

Page 5-48

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 5-32: Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup Instrument - Audio Tab with Two Audio Flows

Features include:ll

User-configurable audio format parameters for ST 2110-30 flows includes packet time and channel countAutomatic detection of audio format, channel count and packet time.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-49

Instrument Menu Options

Figure 5-33: Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup Instrument Menu Options with Two Audio FlowsThe following table lists the video and audio format parameter options, available to select for theOverride column, in the Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup instrument options menu:
Table 5-18 : Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Override Video Flow Parameters
Video Flow
Parameters

Auto-estimate (Default)
Override

When set to Auto-estimate the unit attempts todetermine the incoming IP video standard automatically.
When successful, the unit uses these parameters to set
up the video.
In the event that the unit cannot estimate a video
parameter, then it uses the video standard from an SDP
file if one is available (currently only by way of NMOS);
otherwise it uses the Override parameters.
Note: The unit cannot currently estimate the parameters
Transfer Curve and Colorimetry so always uses the SDP(if available) or Override parameters.
When set to Override the unit uses the parameters
defined in this option menu to set-up the video.

Override Picture
Dimensions

Page 5-50

1280 x 720
1920 x 1080
2048 x 1080

Select the appropriate picture dimensions for the flow.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options

Description

Override Frame Pack- Interlaced (Default)
ing
Segmented
Progressive

Select the appropriate frame packing method for the flow.

Override Frame Rate

23.98, 24, 25, 29.97, 30, 47.95,
48, 50, 59.94, 60

Select the appropriate frame rate for the flow.

Override Bit Depth

8 bit
10 bit12 bitDefines the color bit-depth of the incoming standard
when using manual override parameters.

Override Sampling

YCbCr:444
YCbCr:422
RGB

Select the appropriate sampling method for the flow.

Override Transfer
Curve

SDR
PQ
HLG
S-Log3

Select the appropriate transfer curve for the flow.

Override
Colorimetry

BT709
BT2020

Select the appropriate colorimetry standard for the flow.

Override Audio Flow Parameters
Audio Flow Parameters

Auto-estimate (Default)
OverrideIf you select the option Override, you can manually set
the following fields (the maximum number of Channels
depends on the Packet Time set):

AUD1 Packet Time

1 ms
125 μsEnabled only when Audio flow parameters option is set toOverride.

AUD1 Channels

1 to 10 at 1 ms
1 to 80 at 125 μs (2110-30)
1 to 60 at 125 μs (2110-31)

Enabled only when Audio flow parameters option is set toOverride.

AUD2 Packet Time

1 ms
125 μsEnabled only when Audio flow parameters option is set toOverride.

AUD2 Channels

1 to 10 at 1 ms
1 to 80 at 125 μs (2110-30)
1 to 60 at 125 μs (2110-31)

Enabled only when Audio flow parameters option is set toOverride.

AUD3 Packet Time

1 ms
125 μsEnabled only when Audio flow parameters option is set toOverride.

AUD3 Channels

1 to 10 at 1 ms
1 to 80 at 125 μs (2110-30)
1 to 60 at 125 μs (2110-31)

Enabled only when Audio flow parameters option is set toOverride.

AUD4 Packet Time

1 ms
125 μsEnabled only when Audio flow parameters option is set toOverride.

AUD4 Channels

1 to 10 at 1 ms
1 to 80 at 125 μs (2110-30)
1 to 60 at 125 μs (2110-31)

Enabled only when Audio flow parameters option is set toOverride.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-51

Video Timing & System Reference(IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Overview
The Video Timing & System Reference Instrument provides measurements that enable you toassess the timing quality of the input relative to a selected reference. If necessary, you can then set
timing offsets against which to measure. The measurements and adjustment tools available dependon the current operating mode of the unit and whether the inputs are received from a system in either
IP 2022-6 or IP ST 2110 boot mode as summarized in the following table.
Table 5-19 : Overview of IP Video Timing Functions by License and Boot Mode
Boot Mode
IP 2022-6
PHQXO-IP-STND
License

Decaps vs Sys Ref

IP 2110Media Latency Tab (Mean Data Column)

Ext Ref vs PTP

PHQXO-IP-MEAS
License

Decaps vs Sys Ref

Video Timing Tab (Full Data)Media Latency Tab (Full Data)

Page 5-52

PHABRIX Qx User ManualVideo Timing in IP 2110 Boot Mode
Requires Qx Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

Overview
In IP 2110 boot mode, the Video Timing & System Reference instrument must be stably locked to thesame PTP source as the sending device. The Video Timing & System Reference window includes
the following two tabs, each providing access to different timing data:llMedia Latency
External Reference vs PTP
For more information, see section "Video Timing & Setting External Reference in IP Boot 2110
Mode" on page 5-35.

Note: For information on the .Video Timing tab, see "Using the Advanced Video Timing Tab" on
page 12-14 or "Measurements in the Video Timing Tab" on page B-5

Media Latency Tab
The Media Latency tab displays the end-to-end latency of each flow, between the source and theunit, when both are locked to PTP. Any latency represents the time delay between the point at whicha packet is created at the source and the point at which it is received. The latency period includes thelength of time it takes to send the packet and the time taken by the packet to travel across the
network. The unit calculates the latency by comparing the timestamp in the RTP packet header withthe hardware timestamp at the time of ingest.
This tab provides both a graphical display of latency in the horizontal timing meters and a tabular
display of the actual corresponding mean values in the right-hand Mean column. In the scalar view,
the white arrows indicate the current latency, offset from PTP, and the black arrows show thehistorical maximum and minimum values. The actual mean values are shown in the Mean column to
the right.
Note: Monitoring of audio flows AUD 3 and AUD 4 is not supported in the current software
release.
For information on the calculations used in IP 2110 boot mode, see the section "Advanced MediaTiming Measurement (IP 2110 Boot Mode)" on page 12-13.
This tab aims to show the relationship between the video, audio and ancillary data flows andconsequently, to indicate the amount of buffering required at the receiver to synchronize the flows.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-53

Figure 5-34: Media Latency Tab of the Video Timing & System Reference Instrument (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

The Media Latency measure is the difference between the arrival time of a packet and the RTP
timestamp of that packet, averaged over 1 second and is calculated as follows:
Latency = TPA0 – RTPTimestamp (averaged over 1 second)
Where:l

TPA0 is the arrival PTP time of a media packet as measured by the unitl

RTPTimestamp is the timestamp within the received packet created by the source.

For Video and ANC flows, the RTP timestamp is constant for the entire Frame, so the latency is only
measured when the RTP timestamp changes. This occurs on the first packet of a frame for a
progressive flow, or field for an interlaced flow, with the results averaged over 1 second.
For Audio flows, as the RTP timestamp increments with each audio packet the latency is measured forevery packet with the results averaged over 1 second.
To see more detail about the media latency, you can zoom in on a specific area of interest by clicking
anywhere on a timing meter of interest, which changes the scale to match the values of the specificflow. For example, when zooming into a video flow, the scale changes from milliseconds (ms) to
microseconds (µs). Click the meter again to zoom out and return to the overview. You can also switch
between overview and zoom for individual flow meters by selecting the specific meter from the
instrument submenu. See the Instrument options table below.

Figure 5-35: Media Latency Tab of the Video Timing & System Reference Instrument (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Page 5-54

PHABRIX Qx User ManualInstrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters of the Media Latency tab and are available witha standard core license in the Video Timing & System Reference Instrument submenu in IP 2110 bootmode:
Table 5-20 : Video Timing & System Reference Menu Options (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Item

Options

Description

Ext Ref vs PTP Tab Options
System Reference

PTP
External Reference

System reference locking controls define the reference
to which the Qx and any signal it generates is locked. In IP
2110 boot mode, make sure that the system reference isstably locked to the same PTP source as the sending
device.
System reference lock status information is displayed in
the upper-right corner of the instrument, and any error in
the health state of the reference is displayed in red.

Reference Timing Meter
Range+/− 0.1 line, +/− 0.5 line, +/−0.5 frame

Adjusts the displayed range of the reference timing meterin the upper section of the Instrument to display readings
at frame scale, or to zoom in to a fraction of a line.

Media Latency Tab Options
Latency Meters Zoom

Overview, A VID, A AUD 1, A Select a specific timing meter to switch between overAUD 2, A ANC, B VID, B
view and zoomed-in view.
AUD 1, B AUD 2, B ANC

Anchor time scale start in
Overview mode

Zero (0) or less, Any value

Set the start point of the timescale when in Overview.

Clear Min, Max values

N/A

Set the historical minimum and maximum values back tozero.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-55

AES IO Config (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Overview
The unit provides powerful and flexible functionality for handling AES (Audio Engineering Society)input and output signals when present on pins 1 - 4 of the rear panel 26-way D-type connector. See
the section "Technical Specifications" on page 1 for more information on the connector pinouts. You
can use a D-type to BNC converter to access the AES I/Os.
The AES IO Config Instrument provides a configurable gateway to the AES IO signals in IP 2110 bootmode. You can configure the AES IO so that an audio pair from the 2110-30/31 input is routed to thefour AES3 output interfaces. Encoded audio, such as AC-3, or E-AC3, can be decoded by an external
third-party decoder for monitoring purposes. Encoded Dolby E™ can be decoded directly by the Qx.
The AES IO Config Instrument provides an interface to configure the AES I/Os as follows :
l

l

l

l

Up to four AES signals (a combination of inputs and/or outputs) can be handled at the sametime
SDI Input to AES Output audio conversion is available for both PCM and Dolby® encoded audio(using the Transmit - Analyzer)
Decoded Dolby E™ input from any of the four decoded Dolby pairs, together with the downmixed pair, can be routed out (using the Transmit - Dolby Decoder)Route AES Input signals to other AES outputs to provide a single loop output or up to three
copy outputs (using Transmit - Passthrough).

Figure 5-36: AES IO Config Instrument and Options Menu (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

The instrument provides a graphical display of the 26-way D-type rear panel connector of the unit,
and labels the AES pins (pins 1 - 4). The AES Panel graphic shows the AES I/O BNCs in any AES
breakout board connected to the rear panel D-type connector.
In both graphics, an active AES I/O is displayed in the Analyzer color when configured as an AES Input(in Receive mode) or in the Generator color when configured as an AES Output (in Transmit mode).

Page 5-56

PHABRIX Qx User ManualBelow the AES Panel graphic, a table lists the status of each AES I/O. For AES Outputs the table also
shows the transmit mode source. Any issues in the audio transmit source are highlighted in the tabletext as follows:lRed: Configuration errorlYellow: Audio source not present

Hover the mouse over the error text to display a tooltip describing how to resolve the issue.

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters for the AES IO instrument:
Table 5-21 : AES IO Menu Options (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Item
AES 1 Mode
AES 2 Mode
AES 3 Mode
AES 4 Mode

Options

DescriptionOff

AES I/O is switched off

Receive
I/O is set to AES Input

Set the corresponding AES pin as an Input (Receive).

Transmit - Analyzer
I/O is set to AES Output

Set the corresponding AES pin as an output (Transmit).
The output audio signal source is the selected channel pair(e.g., Chan 9-10) of the selected Audio Metering flow (Aud 1 to
Aud 4). See the section: "Analyzer - Audio Meters" on page 105.

Transmit - Dolby Decoder Set the corresponding AES pin as an output (Transmit).
I/O is set to AES Output
The output Dolby E signal source is any of the four decoded
Dolby pairs, together with the downmixed pair from the Dolby
Decoder. See the section: "Analyzer - Audio Meters" onpage 10-5.

AES 1 Transmit Analyzer
Pair
AES 2 Transmit Analyzer
Pair
AES 3 Transmit Analyzer
Pair
AES 4 Transmit Analyzer
Pair

Transmit - PassthroughI/O is set to AES Output

Set the corresponding AES pin as an output (Transmit)
The output audio signal is routed from the chosen AES
Passthrough Source.

With Audio Flows set to
1x 80 Channel:
AUD 1: Ch 1 & 2 to79 &80

Select the required Audio Meter flow and Audio Pair.
Note: Select the number of received audio flows in the
IP Receive - Flow Select instrument.

With Audio Flows set to
2x 64 Channels:
AUD 1: Ch 1 & 2 to
63 & 64
AUD 2: Ch 1 & 2 to
63 & 64
With Audio Flows set to
4x 32 Channels:
AUD 1: Ch 1 & 2 to
31 & 32
AUD 2: Ch 1 & 2 to
31 & 32
AUD 3: Ch 1 & 2 to
31 & 32
AUD 4: Ch 1 & 2 to
31 & 32

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 5-57

Item
Passthrough Source

Page 5-58

Options
AES 1,
AES 2,
AES 3,
AES 4

Description
Set the AES pin corresponding to the passthrough source.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

6
Signal Generation Instruments
Note: Requires the PHQXO-GEN License.

This chapter describes the unit's signal generator Instruments and includes the following sections:lGenerator Videol

Generator Audio (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)lGenerator - Statusl

IP Transmit (SFP B) (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode Only)l

IP Transmit (IP 2110 Boot Mode Only)

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 6-1

Generate - Video
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-GEN

Overview
The Generator - Configuration instrument is provided in two formats, depending on the selectedboot mode of the unit:l

SDI and IP 2022-6 boot modesl

IP 2110 boot mode.

SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes
In SDI and IP 2022-6 boot modes, you can select a test pattern from the scrollable list and then use
the column filters to select the desired video standard. You can filter the available parameters using
the dropdown menus in the following columns:
l

Type

l

Resolution

l

Frame

l

Mappingl

Gamut.

In SDI boot mode and with the Advanced SDI Stress Toolset option [PHQXO-SDI-STRESS], theGenerate - Video options menu includes additional Advanced Generation tools.

Figure 6-1: Generate - Video Instrument (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes) (1/16 Screen Size)

Page 6-2

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 6-2: Generate - Video Instrument (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes) (1/4 Screen Size)

With a test pattern selected, click on your chosen video standard to generate it. A traffic light indicator
will turn yellow to show that generation is in progress. The light will turn green once the video
standard has been successfully generated.
Note: The test pattern may take a few seconds to generate.
The unit generates video standards for a wide range of SDI rates, resolutions, frame rates, image
mappings color gamuts, and transfer curves, depending on the available licenses and boot mode.

Filtering the Generator Display
To simplify your selection of a video standard, you can filter the generator standards list using column
dropdown menus to filter on the following parameters:
Table 6-1 : Generator - Column Filter Parameters (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes Only)
Generator Column

Available Filter Parameters

Type(of SDI Link)
SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot
Modes only

All (Default)
12G 2-SIQL 3G A 2-SI
QL 3G A SqDv

QL 3G B 2-SI
QL 3G B SqDv
DL 6G 2-SI
DL 3G B 2-SI

DL 1.5G
6G 2-SI
QL 1.5G SqDv
3G A

Resolution

All (Default)
1280x720

1920x1080
2048x1080

3840x2160
4096x2160

Frame (Rate)

All (Default)
23.98p23.98psf
24p
24psf

25p
25psf
29.97p29.97psf
30p

30psf
47.95p
48p
50i
50p

59.94i59.94p
60i
60p

Mapping

All (Default)
YCbCr:422:10
YCbCr:422:12

YCbCrA:4224:12
YCbCr:444:10
YCbCr:444:12

YCbCrA:4444:10
RGB:444:10
RGB:444:12

RGBA:4444:10

Gamut

All (Default)
709

2020
HLG 2020

PQ 2020
S-Log3 2020

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

3G B
1.5G

Page 6-3

You can sort the content displayed in the video standards table by clicking the table title. Click thetitle again to toggle the sort order between descending and ascending.
The Recent history list… dropdown provides a list of the most recently generated video standard andtest pattern combinations. You can quickly select and regenerate a video standard and test patter
combination from this dropdown list.
To clear the recent history, right-click to open the Options menu and select the control:l

Clear recent history list

The Status bar provides information on video generation progress.
Right-click anywhere in the Generate - Video window to display the options menu.

Resetting the Sort Order of the Column Filters
After filtering the columns of the Generator video standards table multiple times, you may find that thecontents of the filters are in a different order from that expected.
You can revert to the default displayed order of filter options by selecting the Reset Sort Ordercontrol in the options menu.

Test Patterns
The list of available test patterns for a selected video standard is displayed at the bottom or in theright hand column of the Generate - Video window. These patterns include:

Page 6-4

100% Bars

75% Bars

BowtieBox

CircleColor Grid

Component Ramps

Field Lineup

Gray 10H Step

Gray 10V Step

Gray 5H Step

Gray 5V Step

Gray Steps

Legal Ramp

Luma Ramp

MultiBurst

PLUGE

SMPTE 219-2

SMPTE 219 sub super

Tartan Bars

Valid Ramps

UHD quad Align

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

ARIB-28 BarsITU-R BT.2111-0 HDR Color BarsITU-R BT.814-4 PLUGE
Figure 6-3: Available Test Patterns

Both S-Log3 and SR Live [S-Log3(HDR Live)] test pattern variants are available.
To use a moving test pattern, you can choose to overlay a bouncing box on top of any Generator test
pattern. To do so, enable the Bouncing box in the Options menu.

Figure 6-4: Bouncing Box Test Pattern Enabled

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 6-5

Figure 6-5: Generator - Configuration Options Menu (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)

User Test Patterns and Images
Users can upload test images to the unit if required. These user test files must be in the Tagged
Image File Format (TIFF) and of the exact pixel resolution of the video standard of intended use. The
specifications for user test files are detailed below:
Table 6-2 : Required Format of User Test Pattern Images
FormatTIFF

TypeNative(Files converted to TIFF fromother formats are not supported)

Extension

Pixel Resolutions.tif1280 x 720
1920 x 1080
2048 x 1080
3840 x 2160
4096 x 2160

Bit Depth

Pixel Order

16 per RGB
Component,
48 per Pixel

Interleaved

If you have direct access to the unit, you can upload user test files using the USB File Manager, see
the section for details. If you have only remote access to the unit, use SFTP to upload test files as
described in the section "Remote Connection to the Unit" on page 3-28
Upload user test files to the transfer/userTestPatterns directory and then restart the unit. User test
images will then be available in the Generate - Video tab of Generator - Configuration together withall other test patterns.

Generator Copy and SDI Out Configuration
For information on configuring the Generator SDI Out and Copy signals, see the section "System IO
for SDI Modes " on page 4-11

Insertion of SMPTE ST352 Payload IDs
The unit includes SMPTE ST352 Payload IDs in the generated standards by default. You can view theHex IDs in Line 10 of the Analyzer - Dataview window. Alternatively select the Identifier ST352
Payload ID in the dropdown menu of the Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector window.

Figure 6-6: Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector Showing SMPTE ST352 Payload IDs

Page 6-6

PHABRIX Qx User ManualIf you need to disable this feature (for example, for test purposes) you can do so by selecting theDisabled option for the parameter SMPTE ST352 Payload Ids in the Generator options menu (see .)When you select this option, the unit displays the following yellow warning message:"Generated Video will not contain SMPTE ST352 Payload IDs".

If you generate your standard when Payload IDs are disabled, the unit displays a further popup
warning dialog:"Generating Standard does not conform to SMPTE Specifications. No ST352 Payload IDs inserted".

Click OK to close the dialog or wait for it to close automatically.
After re-enabling Payload IDs, always regenerate the standard to ensure that the Payload IDs areincluded.

Pathological Signal Insertion
Pathological Signal Insertion is a powerful feature used to test signal performance.
In addition to selecting a background test pattern, you can insert a pathological pattern as an overlay
to the original test pattern. Enable pathological insertion using the options in the right-click menu of
the Generate - Video tab:Table 6-3 : Generator - Pathological Signal Insertion Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Pathological Insertion Options
Insertion

EnabledDisabled (Default)

Enable or disable pathological signal insertion.

Pattern to overlay Eq
PLL
Clock (CLK),
CheckField (Eq + PLL)
CheckField + Clock(Eq + PLL + CLK)

Select the pathological patterns to insert from the displayed
options.

Pairs to insert

Set the amount of pathological pattern to verify the sensitivity of
the SDI link to pathological conditions on the interface. This control limits at the line length of the selected format.

System Control
Range: 0 to 16384

Figure 6-7: Generator - Pathological Signal Insertion Options

Note: Pathological signals are approved by SMPTE for use with HD and 3G Level A standards
only. For 3G Level B, 6G and 12G-SDI interface formats, pathological signals can be used, but are
not approved by SMPTE (as of January 2020). It is believed that inserting a full line ofpathological signal in these non-approved standards is too stressful a test for the SDI interface.
No physical damage will occur, but the interface may exhibit reduced operating performance inthe form of bit errors.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 6-7

Output Offset Adjustment (SDI Modes)
You can configure the Generator to generate a signal with a fixed offset, relative to the systemreference.

Figure 6-8: Generator - Output Offset Adjustment Submenu

The following table lists the output offset adjustment options available:
Table 6-4 : Generator - Output Offset Adjustment Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Output Offset Adjustment Options
Offset TypeLines And Pixels (Default)
Time

Select whether to make offset adjustments using either
spatial or temporal values.

Output Line Offset

0 to +/− (Total number of Lines for
current standard minus one)

When set to Lines and Pixels, use the combo-box to set
the Line offset component as a number of whole lines.

Output Pixel Offset

0 to +/− (Total number of Pixels
per Line for current standard
minus one)

When set to Lines and Pixels, use the combo-box to set
the Pixel offset component as a number of pixels per line.

Output Time Offset

0.00, +/− 0.01, etc...

When set to Time, use the combo-box to set the timing offset in microseconds.

Clear Offsets

System Control

Select to remove the current Generator offset.

Page 6-8

PHABRIX Qx User ManualGenerate - Audio
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-GEN

Overview
32-channel audio generation is available in the Audio tab of the Generator - Configuration
instrument. In the instrument submenu Audio Macros are provided for quick configuration, along withthe ability to enable and disable audio in individual sub images.

Figure 6-9: Generator Configuration - Audio Tab (SDI / IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

Depending on the generated video standard, up to eight audio groups (32 channels) are available.
In the Audio tab (SDI / IP 2022-6 boot modes) you can switch audio groups on or off as required using
the checkboxes. Select the arrow to the left of a group to expand the group, displaying all channels inthat group. Click on the arrow again to hide the audio pairs in the group.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 6-9

Configuration Table Options
Using the configuration dropdown menus, you can configure each channel by frequency andamplitude. In addition, you can set the Frequency by music pitch or by specifying the exact tone
frequency (Hz):
Table 6-5 : Audio Generator - Column Filter Parameters
Audio Generator Column
ChannelType and Frequency

Available Filter Parameters
Group 1 to 8; then for each Group:lPair 1 Leftl

Pair 1 Rightl

Pair 2 Leftl

Pair 2 Right

Tone
Select Frequency from: 0 to 10000 Hz
Music Pitch
Select Frequency from:
C 3,
E 3,
G♯ /A♭C 4,
E 4,
G♯ /A♭C 5,
E 5,
G♯ /A♭C 6,
E 6,
G♯ /A♭
C7

Amplitude

Page 6-10

3,

4,

5,

6,

C♯ /D♭F 3,
A 3,
C♯ /D♭F 4,
A 4,
C♯ /D♭F 5,
A 5,
C♯ /D♭
F 6,
A 6,

3,

4,

5,

6,

D 3,
F♯ /G♭ 3,
A♯ /B♭ 3,
D 4,
F♯ /G♭ 4,
A♯ /B♭ 4,
D 5,
F♯ /G♭ 5,
A♯ /B♭ 5,
D 6,
F♯ /G♭ 6,
A♯ /B♭ 6,

D♯ /E♭G 3,
B 3,
D♯ /E♭G 4,
B 4,
D♯ /E♭G 5,
B 5,
D♯ /E♭G 6,
B 6,Adjust amplitude levels in decibels relative to full scale (dBFS), select:−144 to 0 dBFS

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

3,

4,

5,

6,

Instrument Menu Options
For fast configuration, the submenu provides a set of Audio Macros. The Macro list contains preconfigured audio channel setups which can be used or adapted for use:
Table 6-6 : Audio Generator - Menu Options
Item
Audio
Macros

Options

Description

Macro List
Macros are applied across all audio groups, select from:lll

Select...

Select Fixed amplitude in range: −144 to 0 dBFS:

Fixed Tone
Ramp Levels

Select Fixed frequency from:

Fixed Tone
Fixed Level

C 3,
E 3,
G♯ /A♭C 4,
E 4,
G♯ /A♭C 5,
E 5,
G♯ /A♭C 6,
E 6,
G♯ /A♭
C7

3,

4,

5,

6,

C♯ /D♭F 3,
A 3,
C♯ /D♭F 4,
A 4,
C♯ /D♭F 5,
A 5,
C♯ /D♭
F 6,
A 6,

3,

4,

5,

6,

D 3,
F♯ /G♭ 3,
A♯ /B♭ 3,
D 4,
F♯ /G♭ 4,
A♯ /B♭ 4,
D 5,
F♯ /G♭ 5,
A♯ /B♭ 5,
D 6,
F♯ /G♭ 6,
A♯ /B♭ 6,

D♯ /E♭G 3,
B 3,
D♯ /E♭G 4,
B 4,
D♯ /E♭G 5,
B 5,
D♯ /E♭
G 6,
B 6,

3,

D 3,
F♯ /G♭ 3,
A♯ /B♭ 3,
D 4,
F♯ /G♭ 4,
A♯ /B♭ 4,
D 5,
F♯ /G♭ 5,
A♯ /B♭ 5,
D 6,
F♯ /G♭ 6,
A♯ /B♭ 6,

D♯ /E♭G 3,
B 3,
D♯ /E♭G 4,
B 4,
D♯ /E♭G 5,
B 5,
D♯ /E♭
G 6,
B 6,

3,

4,

5,

6,

Select Fixed frequency from:
C 3,
E 3,
G♯ /A♭C 4,
E 4,
G♯ /A♭C 5,
E 5,
G♯ /A♭C 6,
E 6,
G♯ /A♭
C7

3,

4,

5,

6,

C♯ /D♭F 3,
A 3,
C♯ /D♭F 4,
A 4,
C♯ /D♭F 5,
A 5,
C♯ /D♭
F 6,
A 6,

3,

4,

5,

6,

4,

5,

6,

Select Fixed amplitude in range: −144 to 0 dBFSllMusical Pitch
Ramp Levels

Frequency and amplitude automatically set.

Musical Pitch
Fixed Levels

Select Fixed amplitude in range: −144 to 0 dBFS

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 6-11

Item
Sub
Image
EnablePage 6-12

Options

Description

Enable or disable Audio by Sub Image, select:
Sub Image 1

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

Sub Image 2

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

Sub Image 3

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

Sub Image 4

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

PHABRIX Qx User ManualGenerator - Status(SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes Only)
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-GEN

Overview
The Generator - Status instrument confirms the generated Video Standard and Test Pattern details.
The window shows the generator pattern selected, or PRBS signal selected (available with theoptional SDI Stress Toolkit), and confirms the BNC output (SDI Modes only) or SFP output presence,and Sub Image/Full Image mapping information. Audio Presence and Sub Image information is also
displayed, along with Video Reference, Output offset adjustment, and Jitter insertion (with optional
SDI Stress Toolkit) details. This window provides status information only; there are no user settings to
configure.

Figure 6-10: Generator - Status Instrument

When you generate a pathological overlay in Generator – Configuration, the unit detects this for all
SDI outputs. The Pathological PLL(s) and Eq(s) will then display the number of pathological events
generated per second. As one pathological event is created per line this also indicates the number oflines per second on which pathological conditions occur on the interface. The detection of apathological condition is available as a GPI output from the unit for use in triggering an external
analyzer device.
Note: Pathological Rate(s) counters are not displayed in PRBS Mode.

Note: The Generator - Status instrument is not available in IP 2110 boot mode.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 6-13

IP Transmit (SFP B)(IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND, PHQXO-GEN and PHQXO-IP-NGT

Overview
The IP Transmit (SFP B) window is used to transmit the currently generated video standard signal as
ST 2022-6 standard video packets.
You can use this tool to simulate IP video network packet jitter introduced under a variety of network
conditions by adjusting the transmission distribution profile.

Figure 6-11: IP Transmit (SFP B) (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

The histogram shows the interval timing distribution of the packets being generated (each second) that is: the number of packets being generated each second, against the deviation of each packet
interval from the expected interval time. Transmission status information and prompts are also
displayed at the bottom of the window. Hover over this status information to display a tooltip detailingthe Current Transmit Parameters, see the section Network Settings for more information.

Page 6-14

PHABRIX Qx User ManualInstrument Menu Options

Figure 6-12: IP Transmit (SFP B) Menu Options

Network Settings
IP, UDP, MAC, and SSRC network settings for packet transmission are set in the submenu, and can beentered by USB keyboard when Transmit is set to Off.
Transmission can be either multicast or unicast. The multicast group destination IP address, or the IP
address of the receive device (in the case of unicast) should be set as the destination IP address, as
required.
The following table lists the configurable parameters in the IP Transmit (SFP B) options menu:
Table 6-7 : IP Transmit (SFP B) Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

TransmitOn
Off (Default)

Switch packet transmission in IP 2022-6 boot mode on oroff.

Distribution Range

System Control (Slider)+/− 0 (default) to 492 clks

Adjust the range of transmission packet intervals. The
adjustments are displayed in real-time, in the transmission
histogram.

Distribution

Uniform (Default)
Gaussian

Select the type of distribution profile plotted in the transmission histogram.

Dst IP Addr

Numeric Entry

Destination IP address for the Tx flow; may be multicast or
unicast.
The destination MAC address (see below) should be set
as required, to Automatic for multicast, or SFP A forunicast transmission to the same unit (usually in IP 2022-6
boot mode when transmitting on SFP B and receiving on
SFP A).
For unicast transmission to another device, set to Manual,and then enter the MAC address of the receive device (inthe case of a direct connection) or the first switching
device in the path of the transmitting unit (for an indirect

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 6-15

Item

Options

Description
connection to the receive device).
Changes to addressing parameters are applied when you
switch the Transmit option On.

Dst MAC Addr

Automatic (Default)
ManualSFP A

When set to Automatic, if the IP address is a multicast
address the Destination MAC address is automaticallycalculated from the IP address.
If the IP address is a unicast address, the unit uses ARP(Address Resolution Protocol) for that IP address andautomatically learns the MAC address.
If the MAC address cannot be found then the flow is notenabled and the unit displays a warning message.

Src UDP Port

Numeric Entry

Set the source UDP port number as required.

Dst UDP Port

Numeric Entry

Set the destination UDP port number as required.

SSRC

Numeric Entry

Set a Synchronization source identifier (SSRC) for Realtime Transport Protocol (RTP) stream subscription, if
required.

Y-Axis Scale

Linear (Default)
Log10

Plot the number of transmitted packets on the verticalaxis using either a linear or logarithmic scale.

Once you have entered all required network settings, switch Transmit On to start transmission.
Note: Ensure that you are generating a test signal for transmission in the Generator - Video
Standard Instrument.

Page 6-16

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

7Standard Analysis Instruments
This chapter describes the standard analytical instruments provided with the unit and includes thefollowing sections:lAnalyzer - Video StandardlStats - SDI in A, B, C, DlStats - IP Receive (SFP A)

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 7-1

Analyzer - Video Standard(SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes Only)
Overview
The Analyzer - Video Standard instrument (for SDI and IP 2022-6 boot modes) automatically displays
the payloads of the video standard being analyzed as described by ST 352 packets. It lists thepayloads on the input signals for both SDI BNCs (SDI mode) and 2022-6 SFPs (IP 2022-6 boot mode).
The entries in the table of the Analyzer - Video Standard tab summarize the current video standard
and any analyzer overrides already set.

Figure 7-1: Analyzer - Video Standard Instrument

Unstable payloads, or those with damaged or missing ST 352 packets, are listed in the Analyzer Video Standard tab. In addition, any Payload Identifier errors are displayed in red font with warnings
in yellow.
If the signal uses full range colorimetry, the ST352 Payload Identifier for the corresponding SDI entry
appends FR to the colorimetry information. For example, you might see:1920 x 1080i50 YCbCr-422:10FR 1.5G Rec.2020

Manual Override Tab
The Manual Override tab of the Analyzer - Video Standard instrument enables you to define astandard manually that will override the standard automatically detected from the ST 352 packets.
Use the dropdown menus in the table columns to select the appropriate standard to override thestandard decoded from the ST 352 packets.
To use the manual override instead of the auto-detected standard, select Manual as the Payload
Identifier from the right-click options menu.
Note: If the incoming S352 (VPID) signal is Full Range, asserting the Manual Override will force a
Narrow Range override.

Page 7-2

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 7-2: Analyzer - Video Standard Instrument - Manual Override Tab

Note: Once you have defined a list of candidate standards to override the content of ST 352
manually, you must select at least one standard in the Manual Override list (even if there is only
one entry listed.) The selected standard is then highlighted as shown above. The unit will not
automatically apply an unselected standard even if there is only one defined.

For the Manual Override to be a compatible standard, the following criteria must be satisfied:l

The number of physical links are the same or lessl

The number of sub images are the same or lessl

The incoming signal (as defined in the Stats - SDI In Instrument) and the override standard
have the same values for following items:lActive Samples per linelActive Lines per fieldl

Total Samples per linel

Total lines per frame/field1

Instrument Menu Options

Figure 7-3: Analyzer - Video Standard Instrument - Options Menu

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 7-3

Setting the Payload Identifier
In general, it is recommended to set the Payload Identifiers parameter to From S352 so that the unit
automatically detects the video standard from the incoming ST 352 packets. This is the default
setting.
In situations where the accuracy of incoming ST 352 packets cannot be relied upon, you can force
the instrument to use your manually defined standard by selecting the Manual option or to ignore theST 352 packets and manual override by selecting Ignored.
Payloads with ignored ST 352 packets are indicated in the Analyzer - Video Standard window.

Resetting the Sort Order of the Video Standards Column Filters
After filtering the columns in the Manual tab of the Analyzer - Video Standards table multiple times,
you may find that the contents of the filters are in a different order from that expected.
You can revert to the default displayed order of filter options by selecting the Reset Video Standards
Sort Order control in the options menu.

Page 7-4

PHABRIX Qx User ManualStats - SDI In A, B, C, D
(SDI Boot Mode)
Overview
The Stats - SDI In A, B, C and D window provides information to verify the format of the signals being
analyzed, and input cable length information. A video signal may be comprised of up to four separate
SDI signals each providing a sub-image.

Figure 7-4: Stats - SDI In A: Displaying Data from Single 12G Input on Input A

Figure 7-5: Stats - SDI In A: Displaying Data from Quad 3G Input in Four Windows

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 7-5

Stats - IP Receive (SFP A)(IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

Overview
The Stats - IP Receive (SFP A window provides information to verify the format of the signal being
analyzed when working in IP 2022-6 boot mode.

Figure 7-6: Stats - IP Receive (SFP A) Instrument

Page 7-6

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

8
Network Analysis Instruments
This chapter describes Instruments for the analysis of the network quality and includes the following
sections:lAnalyzer - 2022-7 Status (IP 2110 Boot Mode)lSFP (A,B) - Network Stats

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 8-1

Analyzer - 2022-7 Status (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND

Overview
Transmitting each media stream across dual, fully-redundant networks or links enables receivers /decoders to use ST 2022-7 Seamless IP Protection Switching (SIPS). This provides perfect error-freetransport even in the case of severe packet loss or link outages as long as one good packet arrives
within a certain time window on either of the two network links. Depending on the receiver buffer sizeand desired maximum latency, an individual decoder will be designed to accommodate a specificmaximum amount of Skew between the two flows.
The Analyzer - 2022-7 Status instrument provides an indication of the health of each ST 2022-7 flow
pair and the time difference (Skew) between their incoming packets, depending on the selected
receiver classification, as described in the instrument menu options table.
Negative Skew indicates that packets on SFP A interface have arrived first. Positive Skew indicatesthat packets on the SFP B interface have arrived first.

Figure 8-1: Analyzer - 2022-7 Status Instrument

Double-click the instrument to display all four flows in 1/4 display size as shown above. Double-click
again to reduce to 1/16 display size, with a tab to display each flow. Each tab will change color toyellow or red to provide a quick indication of a warning or an error respectively.
In IP 2110 mode, one video flow, two audio flows, and a single ancillary flow are available for selection.
Note: Monitoring of audio flows AUD 3 and AUD 4 is not supported in the current software
release.
Features include:

Page 8-2lIndication of the health of ST 2022-7 seamless protectionlWarning of ST 2022-7 flow-pair mismatchlWarnings of errors on flows and errors on reconstructed output and error rates per second
PHABRIX Qx User Manuall

Relative measure of Path Differential (Skew) of flows on SFP B (Blue Network) relative to SFP A(Amber Network), with Class A, B, C, D markers.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 8-3

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the options available in the Analyzer - 2022-7 Status instrument submenu:
Table 8-1 : Analyzer - 2022-7 Status Options
Item

Options

Description

Receiver Classification

Class AClass BClass CClass DClass A: Low-Skew ≤ 10 ms
Class B: Moderate-Skew ≤ 50 ms
Class C: High-Skew ≤ 450 ms for flows under 270 Mb/sand <150 ms for flows ≥ 270 Mb/s
Class D: Ultra Low-Skew <150 μs

Reset errors and running
time

Instrument Control

Resets any errors that have occurred during the running
period and sets the running time back to zero.

Note: Set the video frame rate correctly in the Analyzer - 2110 Format Setup instrument toensure accurate video skew measurements.

Page 8-4

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

SFP (A, B) - Network StatsFor IP ST 2022-6 SFP-A, Requires Option:

PHQXO-IP-STND

For IP ST 2022-6 SFP-B, Requires Option:

PHQXO-IP-STND

For IP ST 2110-20, Requires Option:

PHQXO-IP-STND

Overview
The Network Stats instrument displays transmission and reception traffic information, detailing thetype and number of packets sent and received by an SFP. CRC errors are identified and packet
sequence errors reported.

Figure 8-2: SFP A - Network Stats Instrument (1/16 Screen Size)

Double-clicking the window expands it to quarter screen size to display additional packet information.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 8-5

9Content Analysis Instruments
This chapter describes the Instruments used to analyze the quality of the video signal and includes
the following sections:lAnalyzer - PicturelAnalyzer - WaveformlAnalyzer - VectorscopelAnalyzer - CRC Analysis

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-1

Analyzer - Picture
Overview
The Picture view shows the generator pattern currently being analyzed by the unit. Double-click
anywhere in the window to resize the view between:lOne sixteenth (1/16) of the screenlOne quarter (1/4) of the screenlFull screen.

Some features of the Picture instrument are dynamically linked to the Dataview and Waveform
Analyzer instruments to enable more precise analysis of the picture.

Figure 9-1: Components of the Analyzer - Picture Instrument

In addition to displaying the video picture, you can configure the Picture instrument to overlay various
data elements, extracted from the ancillary data in the video signal, for quality control purposes,
including:Page 9-2lClosed CaptionslAncillary Time Code (ATC)l

Picture Cursor and Position TooltiplPicture Safe Areasl

Picture Center Crosshairs

PHABRIX Qx User ManualllMessage Center displaying V-chip, AFD, Input Name, ST309 Date and SCTE104 data (depending on configuration)
HDR False Color Overlay and Grayscale Mode (HDR Mode Only). See the section "HDR Heatmap (False Color Overlay)" on page 15-6

Instrument Menu Options

Figure 9-2: Analyzer - Picture Instrument Standard Options Menu

The following table lists the standard options available in the Analyzer - Picture Instrument submenu:
Table 9-1 : Menu Options for the Analyzer - Picture Instrument
Item

Options

Description

Closed Captions

Disabled (Default)

The unit can detect closed captions carried in the ancillary data of a signal.

OP47

Select this option to enable closed captions and display
OP47 standard closed captions in the picture view. This
displays an additional menu entry: OP47 Page.
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-3

Item

Picture Cursor

Options

Description

OP47 Page

Select the desired OP47 page containing the relevantclosed captions, by using the slider or scrolling throughpage numbers in the range:
100 to 8ff.

OP47 Show Unboxed

Select this option to enable the display of outside-of-box
subtitles (closed captions) outside the permitted area forclosed captions. When enabled, this menu item isdisplayed in yellow font to alert you that the subtitles arebeing displayed outside the usual display area. If you
hover the cursor over this option, when enabled, you will
see the following warning displayed:"Warning: OP47 unboxed captions are being shown,these characters should not be displayed by decoders
when bit C6 (subtitle) is set."This option is disabled by default.

608

Select this option to enable closed captions and display
CEA 608 standard closed captions in the picture view formonitoring. This displays an additional menu entry
enabling you to select the desired target field to containthe CEA 608 format closed captions.

608 in 708

Select this option to enable closed captions and display
608 in 708 standard closed captions in the picture viewfor high definition (HD) video. This displays an additional
menu entry enabling you to select the desired target field
to contain the 708 format closed captions.

608 Field

Select the desired field for the 608 captions, from either
Field 1 or Field 2.

Disabled (Default)

When enabled, this feature is dynamically linked to boththe Waveform and Dataview Analyzer instruments so thatmeasurements from the selected picture position can betaken from these tools at the same time.

EnabledAllows you to select a specific line and pixel position in
the picture. When you specify the line and pixel numbers,
the unit positions a visible cross-hair at that position. You
can change the location of the cross-hair by clicking at adifferent position in the Picture window.
Line: Line one to Total number of Active Lines for the current standard.
Pixel: Pixel zero to Total number of Active Pixels for thecurrent standard minus one.

Ancillary Time Code (ATC) Display
Ancillary Time CodeDisabled (Default)
EnabledActivates the display of the ATC panel.

Ancillary Time Code Type

VITC (Default)
LTC

When ATC enabled, choose whether to display the vertical interval (VITC) timecode or the linear timecode (LTC) .

Ancillary Time Code Size

Small
MediumLarge
AutoIncreases or decreases the displayed size of the ATCpanel in the picture window.
The Auto option adjusts the size of the timecode panel
automatically, depending on the displayed size of the

Page 9-4

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options

Description
instrument window. When the instrument window is at 1/16
screen size, the Auto option sets the timecode panel tosmall, at 1/4 screen size to medium and at full screen tolarge.

Ancillary Time Code Position

BottomMiddleTop

Adjusts the displayed position of the ATC panel on thevertical center-line of the window.

Ancillary Time Code Field

Disabled (Default)
EnabledActivates an optional final digit in the furthest-right position of the time code to display a field identification flagfor either 25 Hz or 24/30 Hz.

Action Safe Area

Disabled (Default)
EnabledActivates display of 16:9 safe area border for actions as agreen, dashed border.

Graphics Safe Area

Disabled (Default)
EnabledActivates display of 16:9 safe area for graphics as a red,dashed border.

4x3 Safe Area

Disabled (Default)
EnabledActivates display of 4:3 safe area as a cyan, dotted border.

Custom Safe Area

Disabled (Default)
EnabledActivates display of a user-defined safe area as a white,dashed border.

Custom Height %Enter percentage

Specifies the custom safe area height as a percentage ofthe full screen height, by adjusting the top and bottom
screen margins.

Custom Width %Enter percentage

Specifies the custom safe area width as a percentage ofthe full screen width, by adjusting the left and right screen
margins.

Custom Height Offset %Enter percentage

Specifies the custom safe area height offset as a percentage from the horizontal center line of the screen.

Custom Width Offset %Enter percentage

Specifies the custom safe area width offset as a percentage from the from the vertical center line of thescreen.

Crosshair

Disabled (Default)
EnabledActivates the display of a cross-hair to indicate the image
center.

Message Center

Top Left
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Right

Defines the position of the Message Center panel in the
Analyzer - Picture window by screen quadrant. The Message Center displays messages decapsulated from theancillary data packets and includes SCTE 104 ID, AFD and
V-Clip.

Transparency

Disabled (Default)
EnabledActivates a transparent background to the Message
Center in the Picture display.

Message Timeout (secs)

1 to 10 seconds

Defines the length of time in seconds dynamic SCTE104
messages are displayed in the Message Center.
SCTE104 messages are removed from the Message
Center after the timeout period.

AFD

Disabled (Default)
EnabledActivates the display of AFD markers in the Message
Center of the Picture display.

Safe Area Generation

Message Center Display

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-5

Item

Options

Description

Vchip

Disabled (Default)
EnabledActivates the display of V-chip markers in the Message
Center of the Picture display.

ST309 Date

Disabled (Default)
Enabled

Displays the date in ST 309 format: dd mmm yyyyy. Onceenabled, the date is displayed in the Message Center.

SCTE104 Detection

Disabled (Default)
EnabledActivates the detection of SCTE104 packets in ancillarydata and displays the message OpID, indicating the message type, in the selected Hex or decimal format.

SCTE 104 OpID Format

Decimal (Default)
Hexadecimal

Defines whether to display the OpID of the SCTE104 message type in decimal or hex format.

Input Name

Disabled (Default)
Enabled

Displays the defined source input name of the video
stream, for example, the ID of the originating camera.

Input Name Configuration...

Opens Input Name Configuration
Dialog Box.

Use the Input Name Configuration dialog to enter asource input name manually or to extract a name from theancillary data.

On Video Loss
(IP ST 2110 Mode)

Black Screen
Freeze Last Frame

Choose what should be displayed in the Picture window
in the event of video loss.

Using Closed Captions
Closed captions (or subtitles in Europe) are the text-based, encoded and hidden information includedin the ancillary data of the video signal, which can optionally be displayed by the viewer. The unit can
detect closed captions carried in the ancillary data and display them, when enabled, in the Analyzer Picture Instrument for monitoring purposes.
The following closed caption formats are supported:ll

OP47 (or SMPTE RDD-08): European and Australian standard for closed captions/subtitles on
HD TV. Supports the following languages: Czech, English, Finnish, French, German, Hungarian,
Italian, Portuguese, Slovakian, Spanish and Swedish
608 and 608 in 708: CEA-608 (or EIA-608) is a legacy US standard for closed captions. CEA708 is the current US standard for closed captions on HD TV and is backward compatible with
CEA-608. CEA-708 acts as a wrapper for embedded CEA-608 closed captions, enabling theunit to extract 608-standard closed captions from 708-standard ancillary data. Supports the following languages: Danish, English, Finnish ,French, German, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish andSwedish.

When configuring the Analyzer - Picture instrument to display closed captions, use the Ancillary
Status and/or Ancillary Inspector instruments to establish which closed caption system is present in
the video signal. The ANC Status display will show CEA-608, CEA-708 and OP47 data packets
included in the vertical ancillary area of the SDI framework. You can then select the corresponding
closed caption option from the Analyzer - Picture submenu.
To display closed captions in the Picture view, enable one of the Closed Captions options from theAnalyzer - Picture submenu and select the desired target page (OP47) or field (608 and 608-in-708)
for the appropriate standard.
When enabled, closed caption/subtitle text is displayed in the Picture area as defined by the format of
the selected closed caption standard.

Page 9-6

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 9-3: Closed Captions in the Picture and Picture Copy Windows

The CEA-708 closed caption system (used in the USA and Canada for high definition (HD) video)
embeds information in the VANC area of the HD-SDI video framework and uses data identifier (DID)
0x61 (Hex) for the Caption Distribution Packet (CDP). Typically this supports up to 6 different closed
caption streams (or services).
The OP-47 closed caption system (used in Europe and Australia for HD-SDI) embeds closed caption
text in the VANC area of the SDI-HD video framework using DID 0x43 (Hex). This system supports
closed caption pages in the range 0x100 to 0x8FF (Hex).

Using Dual Picture Instruments
You can now open two instances of the Analyzer - Picture Instrument, where the second instance isa copy of the first. The same video signal is displayed in both windows and some features, if enabled,
are common to both (see below).
When positioned alongside each other, you might use the dual Picture windows to monitor closed
captions in different languages, or to compare different screen safe areas.
Open two Anlayzer - Picture Instruments as follows:
1. Open the first Analyzer - Picture Instrument from the PHABRIX instrument launch menu.
2. Open the PHABRIX instrument launch menu again and select the option: Analyzer - Picture
Copy.
You can now manage most overlay elements (excluding the ATC, OP-47 Page and optional
HDR features, which are common to both windows) of the two Picture instruments independently using the submenu for each window.
Features common to both windows:lAncillary Time Codel

Position of Picture Cursor when enabledlClosed Caption StandardlOP-47 pagel

All optional HDR functions, see the section "HDR Heat-map (False Color Overlay)" on page 156.

Features that can be adjusted independently in both windows:
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-7lPicture Safe Areas and Image Center CrosshairslActivation of Picture CursorlField for 608 or 608-in-708 closed captionsl

All Message Center features.

Figure 9-4: Two Picture Windows Displayed Side-by-side

Monitoring Closed Captions in Dual Picture Instrument Windows
If required, you can open a copy of the Analyzer - Picture instrument to have two Picture windows
open at the same time. You can use this feature to monitor closed captions in a different language
alongside the original language.
Select different language closed captions in dual Picture windows as follows:
1. In the first Picture window, select either of the closed caption standards: 608 or 608-in-708.
This will also be automatically selected in the Picture Copy window.
2. In the first Picture window, set the option 608 Field to Field 1.
3. In the Picture Copy window, set the option 608 Field to Field 2.
The unit will now source the closed captions from the two different fields.

Figure 9-5: Dual Analyzer - Picture Instruments Showing Closed Caption Panel

When using either closed caption standard 608 or 608 in 708, select a different field (Field 1 or Field
2) in each Picture Instrument to display a different language in the Picture Copy window.
Page 9-8

PHABRIX Qx User ManualNote: The OP-47 closed caption page, when selected, is linked between Picture windows so thatthe same page is displayed in both the Picture window and the Picture Copy window.

Picture Cursor
The Picture Cursor consists of two intersecting horizontal and vertical dashed lines. With the option
Picture Cursor enabled, you can position the intersection of the cursor either by clicking the mouseanywhere inside the window boundary, or more precisely, by specifying the exact line and pixel in thesubmenu. The Line value adjusts the vertical component of the Picture Cursor and the Pixel value
adjusts the horizontal component.

Figure 9-6: Two Picture Windows Displayed Side-by-side

If you hover the mouse over the intersection of the Picture Cursor, the unit displays a tooltip showing
the actual picture position by line and pixel. This feature is dynamically linked to both the Waveformand Dataview instruments so that measurements from the selected picture position can be takenfrom these tools at the same time.
Note: When using the Dataview Analyzer together with the Picture and Waveform Analyzer
instruments, keep in mind that the Dataview includes horizontal blanking, and so uses transportline numbers, and not active picture line numbers.

Using the Picture Safe Areas
The Analyzer - Picture instrument features picture safe areas designed according to the EBU
Recommendation R95 "Safe Areas for 16:9 Television Production".

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-9Picture safe areas define the part of the picture that can be viewed without compromise on a TV or
movie screen.

Figure 9-7: Picture Safe Areas Showing Border Colors

The Analyzer - Picture instrument can generate three predefined, independent safe areas for thefollowing:lllGraphics (16:9): Smallest of the safe areas; ensures that all essential graphics are protected
inside this area. The border of the Graphics safe area is 5% in from all edges of the screen.
Action (16:9): Larger than the Graphics safe area; ensures that all essential program content is
protected inside this area. The border of the Actions safe area is 3.5% in from all edges of thescreen.
4x3: Shows the safe area for HD video to be viewed on domestic TVs still using a 4:3 aspectratio.

The Picture Instrument also includes a facility to generate a user-defined safe area, which enables
you to set the height and width of the safe area or a vertical or horizontal offset from the top/bottom
and left/right edges of the picture, respectively. Using this facility, you can define safe areas to comply
with other international safe area standards.
In addition, when enabled, you can use the crosshairs function to display crosshairs marking thecenter-point of the picture.
The unit currently supports HD 16:9 formats, providing safe areas for 16:9 HD, 3G and UHD pictureformats.
In combination with the dual Picture windows, you might use the safe areas feature, for example, tocompare the safe area of an HD service with a simulation of either a second language HD service oran SD (4:3 or 16:9) version of the service. The SD 4:3 version may be created either by scaling the 16:9
image (linear or non-linear), cropping the 16:9 image, or a combination of both these methods.
For more information, see the EBU Recommendation R95 "Safe Areas for 16:9 Television Production."
Page 9-10

PHABRIX Qx User ManualDisplaying the Picture Safe Areas
Activate a safe picture area in either of the Picture windows as follows:
1. Right-click in the Picture window to open the Instrument submenu.
2. To display one of the standard safe areas, simply select Enabled from the corresponding dropdown list. You can differentiate the safe areas by the color of their border, for example:lAction Safe Area - Green dashed-line borderlGraphics Safe Area - Red dashed-line borderl

4x3 Safe Area - Cyan dotted-line border

3. To display a custom safe area, set the Custom Safe Area to Enabled.
This displays additional fields in which to specify the height and width of the custom safe area,
using either:lAn absolute percentage of the screen area for the safe area to occupy, orlA percentage offset from the horizontal and vertical edges of the picture.

Note: The user-defined custom safe area is displayed with a white dashed-line border

Using the Message Center
The Message Center is a designated area of the Analyzer - Picture instrument intended to alert you
to the receipt of certain messages transported as packages in the ancillary data stream. The Message
Center facilitates quality control of the source video material, both before and during transmission. On
identifying one of the target message types, the Message Center decapsulates the message anddisplays an appropriate marker, text or ID to reference the message. You can configure the Message
Center to display the following:
l

l

l

l

l

V-chip Marker: Identifies a parental guidance rating, used primarily in the US and Canada, tocategorize age-sensitive material in a TV program. The V-chip hardware in the receiving television can be configured by the viewer to block certain categories of V-chip ratings as desired.
ST309 Date: The date in ST 309 format: dd mmm yyyyy
AFD Marker: The Active Format Description is a set of codes used to identify the aspect ratioof the video signal and the protected areas of the picture.
Input Name: The defined source input name of the video stream
SCTE104 OpID: The industry standard for including specific program signals and markers in
the video signal at various timepoints, for example, program parts, commercial breaks, etc.

V-chip data is included with closed caption data of type CEA-608 or CEA-608-in-708. V-chip data is
not currently available with closed captions of type OP-47. If 608 or 608-in-708 closed captions areenabled but unavailable and you then enable the V-chip marker, you will see that the V-chip label in
the Picture submenu is displayed in yellow as a warning. Furthermore, if OP-47 closed captions areenabled, together with the V-chip marker, the V-chip label in the Picture submenu is displayed inyellow
The Message Center separates messages into either static or dynamic message types. Whenenabled, static messages are always displayed in the Message Center and indicate the presence of aV-chip or Active Format Description (AFD) code in the ancillary data. Dynamic messages, however,are displayed for a configurable timeout period (in seconds) after which they are removed from the
Message Center. The unit manages the OpIDs of SCTE104 packages, detected in the ancillary data,
as dynamic messages. Each consecutive SCTE104 packet received by the unit replaces the previous
displayed OpID.
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-11

For ease of viewing, you can choose the specific quadrant of the Analyzer - Picture window in whichto display the Message Center from:l

Top-left quadrantlTop-right quadrantlBottom-left quadrantlBottom-right quadrant.

Note: The Message Center is displayed only when you enable at least one of the message types(AFD, V-Chip, ST309 Date, SCTE104 or Input Name) in the submenu.
The layout of the Message Center adapts so that it always displays the static messages closest to the
picture edge, depending on the selected screen quadrant in which it is located. This ensures that theV-chip and AFD codes are always displayed in the same position in the window.
Dynamic SCTE104 OpID codes are appended either above or below the static messages, again
depending on the quadrant in which the Message Center is located.
The AFD packets in ancillary data are used to identify the aspect ratio of the video signal and key
program indicators at various timepoints.
You can hover over a SCTE104 OpID in the Message Center to display a tooltip containing the actual
text of the message.

Note: V-chip, AFD ST309 Date, SCTE104 OpID and Input Name data packets will also appear in
the Analyzer - Ancillary Status Instrument and you can view the corresponding packet contents
in the Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector Instrument.

SCTE 104 Packet Detection
SCTE-104 is the broadcast industry standard for including specific program signals and markers in thevideo signal, for example, program parts, commercial breaks, etc.
When this option is enabled, the Analyzer - Picture window displays a list of SCTE-104 messages in
the Message Center, with the most recent displayed at the top of the list. On receipt, the OpID codeof each SCTE-104 message is displayed for at least two seconds, depending on the configured
timeout period.
The unit displays the following information for each SCTE-104 message received:l

SCTE-104 operation ID (OpID) - identifies the SCTE104 message type.

l

Message type as screen tip by hovering over the OpID.

You can choose to display the message OpID in either hexadecimal or decimal format.
If you are interested in SCTE-104 messages, it is recommended to enable SCTE 104 messages in the
Event Logger so that the full message type is saved to the logfile.

Defining Source Input Names
The unit provides a facility to enter identification strings for input sources, for example, cameras, etc.
to identify the source of the input stream. The source ID is displayed in the Message Center for 5
seconds, with this 5 second timeout being reset each time the unit receives an Input Name ancillary
packet. If the unit receives no further Input Name ancillary packets after 5 seconds, then it reports the
Input Name as Missing in the Message Center.
You can choose either to enter the input name manually, or configure the Data Identifier (DID) and
Secondary Data Identifier (SDID) value of the Input Name in the ancillary data of the input stream.
Page 9-12

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

The Input Name is a an ancillary data packet with the following message structure:

Figure 9-8: Input Name Message Structure

In addition, you can define a prefix to be applied to the source input name, for example: Input ID:.
Enter a source Input Name as follows:
1. Right-click in the Picture or Picture - Copy window to open the submenu.
2. Select Enabled from the Input Name dropdown.
This displays the Input Name Configuration... button.
3. Click Input Name Configuration... to open the Input Name Configuration dialog.
4. Using a USB keyboard or over a VNC connection, configure an input name as follows:a. If you require a standard prefix for your input names, enter the prefix text string into thePrefix field, for example Source ID:.
b. To enter an input name manually, click the User Entered option button and enter thename using up to a maximum of 12 characters.
c. To extract an input name automatically from the ancillary data in the input feed, click theAncillary Data option button and select the target DID and SDID. You can specify the
DID/SDID using either decimal (default) or hex notation.
5. Click OK to save the input name.

Figure 9-9: Input Name Configuration Dialog Box

Displaying the Ancillary Time Code (ATC)Time and control code information, used to identify discrete video frames, is carried as the payload ofpackets located in the ancillary data space of the video signal. When you enable the ATC option in
the Analyzer - Picture submenu, the ancillary time code is displayed in a panel overlayed across thePicture window.
The ATC is a 13 character time code with the following format:

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-13

Figure 9-10: Format and Example of the Ancillary Time Code

Where:ll

Colon ( : ) Separator between seconds and frames indicates Integer frame rates
Semi-colon ( ; ) Separator between seconds and frames indicates drop-frame, non-integer
frame rates (for example, 23.9, 29.9, 59.9, etc.)lhh = hours (24 hour clock)lmm = minuteslss = secondslff = frame number

When enabled, the ATC panel is displayed in the top-center of the window by default and you canadjust both its position down the center line (top, middle or bottom) and the panel size (small, medium,large or automatic size adjustment) for ease of viewing.
The option Anc Time Code Field allows you to activate the display of an optional final digit in the timecode, after the two digits of the frame number. If desired, you can use this digit as a field identification
flag for either 25 Hz or 24/30 Hz.
When you enable the display of ancillary timecode information, the option Anc Time Code Type,allows you to choose whether to display the default ancillary time code - vertical interval timecode(ATC-VITC) or an ancillary time code - linear time code (ATC-LTC), if available.

On Video Loss (IP 2110 Boot Mode)In the event of video loss, you can choose what should be displayed in the Picture, if the video signal
is lost, from either of the following options:Page 9-14lBlack ScreenlFreeze Last Frame

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAnalyzer - Waveform
Overview
The Waveform instrument displays the selected input video signal as a waveform in a number of
selectable waveform and display modes.
In addition, the Waveform instrument provides numerous analytical tools including various filters, asingle-line mode, picture cursor control, full-width display, highlight markers (including user-definedmarkers) and powerful zoom and panning functions for detailed waveform inspection.

Figure 9-11: Analyzer - Waveform Instrument (Overlay Waveform Mode)

You can use the Waveform instrument in combination with the Picture / Picture - Copy, and Dataview
instruments while displaying and adjusting Vectorscope user markers in the Waveform CbCr traces.
When the option Picture Cursor is enabled, the cursor is dynamically linked to the cursor in the
Picture instrument and to Dataview navigation. Clicking the cursor in a new position in the Waveform
window updates the pixel and active picture line position selected in the Picture instrument, and the
pixel and transport line position selected in Dataview.
If you hover the mouse cursor over any point in the waveform display, you will see a tooltip displayedthat provides the following information:lPixel x of the maximum number of active pixels and percentage of horizontal active picturelEquivalent value in cd/m2 (Nits) to the Digital Level on the Y axislDigital level in all other available but undisplayed units (decimal, Hex, percentage and mV)lPixel position of the Picture cursorlHorizontal and vertical magnification factors when using the Zoom / Pan functions.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-15

About the Display Modes
The waveform instrument can display up to four channels for analysis of the video signal color-spacecomponents in one of the following selectable display modes:
Note: Display Modes that include an Alpha channel are supported only in SDI and 2022-6 bootmodes.
l

YCbCr: Luma (Y), Cb, and Cr componentsl

YCbCrA: Luma (Y), Cb, Cr and Alpha (A) componentsl

Y: Individual Luma componentl

Cb: Individual Cb componentl

Cr: Individual Cr componentl

RGB: Red, Green, Blue componentsl

GBR: Green Blue, Red componentsl

YRGB: Luma, Red, Green, and Blue componentsl

YGBR: Luma, Green Blue, Red componentsl

RGBA: Red, Green Blue, Alpha componentslRed: Individual Red componentlGreen: Individual Green componentl

Blue: Individual Blue componentlAlpha: Individual Alpha componentlCustom: Customize the display (see below).

When selected, the Waveform instrument displays the Alpha component of a waveform in white, thatis, the same color as the Luma (Y) component and monochrome color mode.

Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Scales
You can choose to display various vertical scales at either the left- or right-hand side of the display
and to set the horizontal scale to pixels or percentage of the video line.

Figure 9-12 is a schematic representation of the horizontal and vertical scales available for use with
the Waveform instrument in Overlay waveform mode with an SDR standard at 2048 x 1080 and at 1/4
screen size. For the Digital Level V scale (y axis), you can choose to measure in units of mV, decimalvalues, percentage or hexadecimal values. Similarly you can set the H scale (x axis) to either thenumber of pixels or as a percentage of the picture line. By default the Waveform instrument displays
the Nits scale on the right-hand side but you can choose to switch this to the left-hand side of thedisplay. If you do so, the Digital Level scale switches to the right-hand side of the Waveforms display.
Note: The Nits scale applies only to the luma component (if displayed).

Page 9-16

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 9-12: Schematic View of Waveform Scales (Overlay Waveform Mode; SDR 2048 x 1080 Picture; 1/4 Screen Size)

Using Full-width Screen Mode
A full-width mode is available to display all waveforms in Stacked and Overview waveform modes or asingle waveform in Parade mode. The unit displays the selected waveform or waveforms across thefull width of the Waveforms display window. The vertical and horizontal scales remain visible but aresuperimposed over the waveforms.
Full-width mode enables you to align the overlay, stacked, or single channel parade waveform withthe current video signal displayed in the Picture or Picture - Copy instrument as shown in Figure 9-13.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-17

Figure 9-13:Waveform Instrument Matched to Width of Picture Instrument

Using the Custom Display Mode Configuration Menu
In addition to using the standard display modes, you can use the Custom Display Mode Configuration
option to define a non-standard layout for the Waveform instrument that may be more suited to a
specific requirement.
To do so, open the Custom Display Mode Config... popup menu from the main Options menu. You
can define the display mode for up to four channels by selecting a desired Display Mode from the
Channel 1 to Channel 4 dropdown menus. The Channel 2, 3 and 4 dropdowns become active only
once you select a Display Mode for the previous channel.

Figure 9-14: Waveform Instrument Custom Display Mode Configuration Menu

To activate your defined custom display mode, select the Custom option from Display Mode
dropdown menu.
Page 9-18

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAbout the Waveform Modes
Figure 9-15 shows the source Picture and waveform analysis for each type of waveform mode in thedisplay modes YCbCr and RGB.

Figure 9-15: Waveform Instrument Waveform Modes for YCbCr and RGB Display Modes

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-19

For the waveform mode Parade, you can choose any of the following display modes which change
the layout of the Waveform instrument as follows (see Figure 9-16):

Figure 9-16: Parade Waveform Instrument Display Modes (Excludes Single Waveforms)

Page 9-20

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFor the waveform mode Stacked, you can choose any of the following display modes which change
the layout of the Waveform instrument as follows (see Figure 9-15):

Figure 9-17: Stacked Waveform Instrument Display Modes (Excludes Single Waveforms)

As the waveform mode Overlay superimposes each component of the waveform on top of the other,
the layout of the screen does not change in Overlay mode.

Using the Zoom and Panning Controls with the Mouse Scroll Wheel
The Waveform instrument provides powerful tools to zoom and pan the displayed waveform for moredetailed investigation.
First use the H / V Magnification and H / V Position controls, with the Options menu open, to locate an
approximate area of interest within the displayed waveform.
Once you have done so, set the Zoom / Pan control to the type of zoom (both H and V axes, H axis
only, or V axis only) or type of panning (H axis only or V axis only) required, then close the Options
menu. The Zoom / Pan control now sets the action of your mouse scroll wheel. When you scroll themouse wheel, you will either magnify the waveform in the selected axis (or axes) or pan acrosss the
waveform vertically or horizontally, depending on your selection.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-21

When zoomed-in on a waveform, hover the mouse cursor over any point in the waveform to display atooltip containing both the standard level information, together with the horizontal and verticalmagnification factors.

Using Picture and Dataview with the Waveform Instrument
When you enable the Picture Cursor in either the Analyzer - Picture or Analyzer - Waveform
instruments (or both), the area of the picture around the cursor is highlighted in the Dataview
instrument, as shown in Figure 9-18.

Figure 9-18: Interactive Linking of Picture Cursor in Picture, Waveforms, and Dataview

In addition, you can also use single-line mode without filtering (Raw) to identify datapoints more
precisely and perform detailed technical analysis of part of the source image, see Figure 9-19.

Page 9-22

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 9-19: Detailed Technical Analysis of Part of Image Using Waveform and Dataview Instruments

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-23

Using the Vectorscope with the Waveform Instrument
You can use the Vectorscope and Waveform instruments together, in combination, to analyze the
Cb/Cr channels. If you enable single line mode in the Vectorscope it is automatically enabled in the
Waveform instrument. Similarly, when the Cb and/or Cr channels are active, any adjustment of theUser Markers in the Vectorscope is is also reflected in the user markers of the Waveform instrument.

Figure 9-20: Interactive Linking of User Markers in Vectorscope and Waveform Instruments

Page 9-24

PHABRIX Qx User ManualInstrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters in the Analyzer - Waveform instrument
submenu:
Table 9-2 : Analyzer - Waveform Options
Item

Options

Description

Display Mode

YCbCr (Default)
YCbCrA
Y
Cb
Cr
RGB
GBR
YRGB
YGBR
RGBA
GBRA
Red
Green
Blue
Alpha
CustomSelect the desired display mode in which to display the
waveforms.
For more information, see "About the Display Modes" onpage 9-16

Custom Display Mode
Config...

System Control
Opens the Custom Display
Mode Channel
configurations submenu.

See below for submenu parameters.
For more information, see "Using the Custom Display
Mode Configuration Menu" on page 9-18.

Waveform Mode

Parade (Default)
StackedOverlay

Parade - displays each signal component individually inhorizontally adjacent graphs, side-by-side.
Stacked - displays each component in vertically adjacentgraphs, one above the other.
Overlay - displays each signal component from the same
origin so that all components appear overlaid on top ofeach other, on the same graph.

Full Width Mode

EnabledDisabled (Default)
Note: In Parade
Waveform Mode, you canenable full-width mode fora single channel only.

When you select waveform modes Stacked, Overlay, or
any single Display Mode (Red, Green, Cb, Cr, etc.) you canenable (or disable) full-width mode. This displays the
waveform(s) across the full available width of the
instrument,superimposing the H- and V-Scales over the
waveform.

V ScalePercent
Hex Value (Default)
Decimal Value
Millivolts

Select the units for the vertical scale in the instrument window.

V Scale Nits

HiddenRight Side (Default 1/4
screen size)
Left Side

Select the position of the Nits scale. By default this is positioned on the right-hand side of the Waveform display.

H ScalePixels (Default)% LineSelect the units for the horizontal scale in the instrument
window.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-25

Item
FilterOptions

Description

Technical (Default)
Production
Low Pass
Raw

Select the type of waveform filtering required.

Single Line Mode

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

Enable a single line of the source video signal for edtailed
analysis.

Line Number

Numeric Field
When Single Line Mode enabled, select a specific line
1 to Maximum Line Number number, if required.

Picture Cursor

Disabled (Default)
EnabledWhen enabled, the picture cursor is dynamically linked toboth the Picture and Dataview Analyzer instruments sothat measurements from the selected picture position canbe taken from these tools at the same time.

Pixel Number

Numeric Field
1 to Maximum Pixel
NumberWhen Picture Cursor enabled, select a specific pixel number, if required.

Diffuse White Marker

Disabled (Default)
EnabledEnable a diffuse white marker across all waveforms in
HDR standards at a fixed value of 203 cd/m2 (nits).
When enabled, the marker is set at 58% for Perceptual
Quantizer (PQ) and 75% for Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG)
functions, see Figure 9-22.

When you select the Raw option, no filtering is applied to
the waveform.

The percentage value is displayed on the right-hand sideof the waveform, just above the marker line.
Peak White Marker

Disabled (Default)
1000 Nits
2000 Nits
4000 Nits
10000 Nits

Enable a peak white marker across all waveforms in HDRstandards at a selectable level in Nits.

User Markers (Dec)

Disabled (Default)
EnabledUse and view markers in Display or Waveform mode.
When enabled, displays two new colored sliders forMarker 1 and Marker 2, which you can adjust along the vertical axis (V Scale).

Marker 1andMarker 2

Slider Control

When User Markers enabled, adjust from the minimum tomaximum value of the selected V Scale. For example, if
set to Hex or Decimal Value, the maximum value will varywith bit depth.

Zoom / Pan

H & V Mag (Default)
H Mag Only
V Mag Only
H Pos Only
V Pos Only

Note: The unit assigns your selected Zoom and Pan
Control setting to the mouse scroll wheel, which becomes
active once you close the Options menu.

Sets zoom or panning
action of the mouse scroll
wheel.

Select zoom magnification (Mag) for detailed inspection of
waveforms. You can choose to zoom (magnify) either onboth horizontal (H) and vertical (V) axes ( H & V Mag) or
restrict the zoom only to a single axis (H Mag Only or
V Mag Only).
In addition, you can select the panning modes (H Pos Onlyor V Pos Only) to scroll through the waveform either along
the horizontal axis or vertical axis without zooming.

Page 9-26

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options

Description
When using Zoom / Pan, hovering the mouse cursor overany point of the waveform displays a tooltip that includes
the H-Mag and V-Mag settings.
The Zoom / Pan setting overrides the H / V Magnification
and Position controls, described below.

H Magnification

Slider control:
1.00 (Default) to 10.00

Note: Use this control with the Options menu open to set
an initial magnification level for the waveform. On closing
the menu the Zoom / Pan control on the mouse scroll
wheel takes precedence.
Adjust the horizontal magnification of the waveform using
the slider to locate an approximate position of interest in
the waveform.
When you increase the H magnification above 1.00, the
H Position control becomes available to pan horizontally
along the waveform while the Options menu is open.
Once you close the Options menu the Zoom / Pan setting
becomes active and you can zoom and/or pan using themouse scroll wheel.
Note: The Waveforms, Vectorscope, and CIE Chart
instruments are all linked so that when you adjust the
Horizontal Magnification in the Waveforms instrument it
also adjusts the Horizontal Magnification in the otherlinked instruments, if they are active.

H Position

Slider control
Horizontal Axis

Displayed when you adjust the Horizontal Magnification
control above 1.00. Pans along the horizontal axis of the
waveform.
Enables you to adjust the focus of the waveform within the
instrument window, along the horizontal axis, if theposition of interest moves out of view when zooming.

V Magnification

Slider control:
1.00 (Default) to 4.00

Note: Use this control with the Options menu open to set
an initial magnification level for the waveform. On closing
the menu the Zoom / Pan control on the mouse scroll
wheel takes precedence.
Adjust the vertical magnification of the waveform using theslider to locate an approximate position of interest in the
waveform.
When you increase the V magnification above 1.00, theV Position control becomes available to pan verticallythrough the waveform while the Options menu is open.
Once you close the Options menu the Zoom / Pan setting
becomes active and you can zoom and/or pan using themouse scroll wheel.

V Position

Slider control
Vertical Axis

Displayed when you adjust the Vertical Magnification
control above 1.00. Pans along the vertical axis of the
waveform.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-27

Item

Options

Description
Enables you to adjust the focus of the waveform within the
instrument window, along the vertical axis, if the positionof interest moves out of view when zooming.

On Video Loss

Black Screen (Default)
Freeze Last Frame

Select what to display in the Waveform window in theevent of losing the video signal.

Brightness

Slider control: 1 to 255(Default: 255 )Adjust the brightness of the waveform display.

Gamma

Slider control: 0.2 to 1.00
(Default: 0.5)

Adjust the gamma component of the waveform display.

Persistence

Slider control; 0 to 511(Default: 255)

Adjust the persistence of the waveform display.

Advanced...

System Control

Enables you to adjust the gain on any of the four channels
independently. See Advanced Waveform Controls below.

Restore Default Levels

System Control

Reset the Waveform insrument to its default levels.

Color Mode

Color (Default)
Highlight
Green
Monochrome

Select the desired display color for the waveforms, fromthe four distinct color modes.
Highlight color mode is a combination of color withmonochrome highlights and uses a logarithmic algorithm
to amplify the displayed intensity of each displayed color,in monochrome (white).

S-Log3 Mode

S-Log3 (Default)
SR Live

For HDR video signals, see the section "Advanced HDR
Toolset" on page 15-2

Custom Display Mode Configuration
Channel 1

Y
Cb (Default)
Cr
Red
Blue
Green
Alpha

Select any of the available single Display Modes to display
in the Channel 1 position.

Channel 2

None
Y
Cb
Cr (Default)
Red
Blue
Green
Alpha

Select any of the available single Display Modes to display
in the Channel 2 position.

Channel 3

None (Default)
Y
Cb
Cr
Red
Blue
Green
Alpha

Select any of the available single Display Modes to display
in the Channel 3 position.

Channel 4

Disabled (Default)
None

Enabled only when you select a parameter for Channel 3.
Select any of the available single Display Modes to display

Page 9-28

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options
Y
Cb
Cr
Red
Blue
Green
Alpha

Description
in the Channel 4 position.

Advanced Waveform Controls
Channel 1 Gain

Slider control; 0 to 1.9
1.00 (Default)

Adjust the gain setting for the Channel 1 waveform.
The gain setting enables you to adjust the brightness ofthe trace displayed in Channel 1, changing its apparent
brightness independently of the components in the otherchannels.

Channel 2 Gain

Slider control; 0 to 1.9
1.00 (Default)

Adjust the gain setting for the Channel 2 waveform.
The gain setting enables you to adjust the brightness ofthe trace displayed in Channel 2, changing its apparent
brightness independently of the components in the otherchannels.

Channel 3 Gain

Slider control; 0 to 1.9
1.00 (Default)

Adjust the gain setting for the Channel 3 waveform.
The gain setting enables you to adjust the brightness ofthe trace displayed in Channel 3, changing its apparent
brightness independently of the components in the otherchannels.

Channel 4 Gain

Slider control; 0 to 1.9
1.00 (Default)

Adjust the gain setting for the Channel 4 waveform.
The gain setting enables you to adjust the brightness ofthe trace displayed in Channel 4, changing its apparent
brightness independently of the components in the otherchannels.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-29

Figure 9-21: Analyzer - Waveform Options Menu and Submenus

Figure 9-22 (below) shows the difference between the two diffuse white markers when selected fromthe Options menu.

Figure 9-22: Analyzer - Waveform Options Menu - Diffuse White Marker (HDR Only)

Page 9-30

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAnalyzer - Vectorscope
Overview
The Vectorscope is part of the video core toolset that provides a polar (X-Y) display of the Cb and Cr
Color Difference representations of the image, where the hue of the color is the angular componentof the polar display. The vectorscope presents the amplitude of the color difference signal as the
distance from the origin (black).

Figure 9-23: Analyzer - Vectorscope Instrument

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters in the Analyzer - Vectorscope instrument
submenu:
Table 9-3 : Analyzer - Vectorscope Options
Item

Options

Description

Targets

Off (Default)
75%
100%

If selected, set the display graticule scale to match either
the 75% or 100% color bar positions.
When set at 75%, the target represents 75% saturation,and the further from the center of the display, the moresaturated that color. At 100%, the target represents 100%
saturation.

User Markers (Dec)

Disabled (Default)
EnabledUse and view markers in the vectorscope display. Whenenabled, displays two new colored sliders for Marker
Angle (adjustable in the range 0 and 359.99) and Marker
Gain, (adjustable in the range 0 and 100.00). By default,
Marker 1 is orange and Marker 2 is blue.

Marker SelectedMarker 1 (Default)
Marker 2

When User Markers enabled, sets the focus for Marker
Angle and Marker Gain operations to either Marker 1 orMarker 2.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-31

Item

Options

Description
Note: Marker 1 and Marker 2 are linked to the Cb and Cr
traces in the Waveform instrument.

Marker Angle

Marker 1: 0.00 to 359.99(Default): 0.00)
Marker 2: 0.00 to 359.99(Default: 90.00)

Adjusts the rotational angle of the cursor from its default
starting position around the center of the vectorscope.

Marker Gain

Marker 1: 0.00 to 100.00(Default: 50.00)
Marker 2: 0.00 to 100.00(Default: 50.00)

Adjsts the Gain on the signal from 0 at the origin to 100 at
the outer limit of the vectorscope.

I/Q Axes

Off (Default)
I OnlyQ OnlyBothWhen enabled, display either the I axis only, the Q axis
only, or both IQ axes together. The scale on the axes represents the vertical lines for each color.

FilterTechnical (Default)
Production
Low Pass
Raw

Select the type of filtering.

CenterOrigin (Default)
Red
Green
Blue
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
Marker 1
Marker 2

Select the origin for the vectorscope display.

Single Line Mode

Disabled (Default)
EnabledWhen enabled, allows analysis of a single video line byspecifying the line number. When disabled, all video lines
are overlaid on top of each other.

Line Number

System Control
0 to maximum line number

Displayed when Single Line Mode is enabled to specify
the desired line number.

Zoom

0.5 to 4.00
(Default: 1.00)

Zoom into the selected Center; either the origin, a color
target, or either of the user markers. Adjust the zoom
using the slider.

On Video Loss

Black Screen (Default)
Freeze Last Frame

Select what to display in the Vectorscope window in theevent of losing the video signal.

Brightness

Slider control: 1 to 31(Default: 8)

Adjust the brightness of the vectorscope display.

Gamma

Slider control: 1 to 255(Default: 127)

Adjust the gamma component of the vectorscope display.

Persistence

Slider control: 1 to 255(Default: 70)

Adjust the persistence of the vectorscope display.

When you select the Raw option, no filter is applied.

Note: Software release 4.8 provides improved instrument Brightness, Gamma and Persistence
control range.

Page 9-32

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 9-24: Analyzer - Vectorscope Options Menu

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-33

Analyzer - CRC Analysis (SDI Boot Mode)
Overview
The Analyzer - CRC Analysis window checks for CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) errors in thereceived signal. The number of SDI input failures, the last failure time, total analysis time, and error
rate are also displayed. Depending on the input required for the standard under test (i.e., quad, dual,or single input) the Sub Image columns will display any errors occurring in each of the Sub images. In
the larger window size, the Link rows will display any errors occurring per Link.

Figure 9-25: Analyzer - CRC Analysis Instrument

The OK Time shows the length of time an image/sub image has been received without error.
The PHABRIX Active Picture CRC is created by the receiver for each image or sub-image video
frame (dependent on standard) and displayed.
The instrument detects and counts changes in the active picture CRC. This can be used to show thatan SDI path is transparent and error free.
The reported CRC (error) Rate(s) is the number of instances of the addition of the Y- and C-channel
CRCs and ANC checksum errors in each second.
ll

Y- and C-channel CRCs are calculated for each video line in accordance with SMPTE Standards
ANC checksums are calculated for each individual ANC packet.

Errors are collected from the analysis start time and the reported error rate per second is the total
number of errors divided by the total time of analysis.

Page 9-34

PHABRIX Qx User ManualInstrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters in the Analyzer - CRC Analysis instrument
submenu:
Table 9-4 : Analyzer - CRC Analysis Options
Item
Ignore CRC on switch lines

Options
Disabled (Default)
EnabledDescription
When enabled, ignores CRC errors on the switching line.

Reset errors on Input failure Disabled (Default)
EnabledWhen enabled, clears the counters on input failure if
required.

Reset errors and runningtime

Use this control to reset CRC errors and running time.

System Control

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 9-35

10Audio Signal Analysis Instruments
This chapter describes the Audio analytical Instruments and includes the following sections:lAnalyzer - Audio Channel Statusl

Analyzer - Audio MeterslAnalyzer - Loudness MonitorlAnalyzer - Dolby Metadata

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-1

Analyzer - Audio Channel Status
Overview
The Analyzer - Audio Channel Status Instrument displays detailed information about the available
audio channels.

Figure 10-1: Analyzer - Audio Channel Status Instrument (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)

Figure 10-2: Analyzer - Audio Channel Status Instrument (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

The Group Presence is defined in the upper row of the Analyzer - Audio Channel Status display. For
each channel, one of the following channel status indicators is displayed:

Page 10-2l-: No audiol

P: PCM audio present
PHABRIX Qx User Manuall

D: Dolby Digital® packets presentl+: Dolby Digital Plus™ packets presentl

E: Dolby E™ packets presentl2: Dolby ED2™ packets presentl?: Unspecified data present.

If you hover the cursor over one of the status indicators, the following tooltip is displayed:

Figure 10-3: Audio Channel Status Tooltip

In addition, the following information is displayed in the main data table for each audio channel:lChannel Status: Result of the cyclical redundancy check checksum (CRCC), for example:
CRCC Ok.
The status table uses the following color-coding to indicate CRCC errors:l

If the channel status is in error, the text is displayed in a red fontl

If errors have occurred but are no longer present the text is displayed in a yellow fontl

If no errors are present, the text is displayed in a white font.

lUse: Intended purpose of the audio signal.

l

Data Type: Digital sampling method employed, for example: PCM (pulse-code modulation)lEmphasis: Type of signal pre-emphasis applied to the audio signal.

l

Source lock: Indicates whether the source is locked to an external time sync, for example:
LockedlFrequency: Audio sample frequency in kHz, for example: 48lChannel Mode: Represents the relationship between each audio channel pair.

lWord Length: Represents the audio word length, for example: 24/24lAlign Levell

Origin: Four ASCII characters indicating the channel origin, for example: PhQxlDestination: Four ASCII characters indicating channel destinationlSample Address: A rolling counter that increments with each 48 kHz audio samplelTime: Local time of the encoded audiolReliability: Contains information about the reliability of the channel status word, for example:
All Ok.

Use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to view the full table of channel columns and audio statusparameters.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-3

Raw Data Display
You can click on an audio channel column to select it and display the raw data for that channel in thebottom row of the window.
Each AES3 audio sample, includes the Sample Address and Time occupying eight bytes (14 to 21) witha reliability indication in byte 22 and the cyclical redundancy check checksum (CRCC) in byte 23. With
each audio sample, the Sample Address and Time are different for each sample, so bytes 14 to 21 willchange, as will the checksum in byte 23.

Instrument Menu Options
The following configurable parameters are available to configure the Analyzer - Audio
Channel Status Instrument:
Table 10-1 : Analyzer - Audio Channel Status Menu Options
Item
Input Select(SDI / IP 2022-6
boot modes)

Options

Description

Sub Image 1,
Sub Image 2,
Sub Image 3,
Sub Image 4,
AES IO

Selects the target input audio source for analysis. The
selected input is displayed in the top-right corner of the
instrument.

Input SelectWith one x 80 channel audio flow
(IP 2110 boot mode) selected:l AUD 1: Channels 1 - 32l AUD 1: Channels 33 - 64

In IP 2110 boot mode, you can choose the audio flows currently selected on both Analyzer - Audio Meters windows,
or AES IO. Audio Channel Status information will only beavailable with a flow using ST 2110-31 (AES 3 transport) oran AES input.

With two x 64 channel audio flows
selected:l AUD 1: Channels 1 - 32l AUD 1: Channels 33 - 64l AUD 2: Channels 1 - 32l AUD 2: Channels 33 - 64
With four x 32 channel audio flows
selected:l AUD 1: Channels 1 - 32l AUD 2: Channels 1 - 32l AUD 3: Channels 1 - 32l AUD 4: Channels 1 - 32
AES IO
Note: in 2110-31 the number ofchannels is limited to 1 - 60 for a 125
μs packet time

Page 10-4

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAnalyzer - Audio Meters
Overview
The Analyzer - Audio Meters instrument displays 16 audio meters together with peak level indicatorsand indication of audio pair correlation. In addition, the numeric values are displayed in dBFS below
each meter.

Figure 10-4: Analyzer - Audio Meters Instrument (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)

Figure 10-5: Analyzer - Audio Meters Instrument (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-5

Figure 10-6: Analyzer - Audio Meters Instrument (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

Dolby E™, Dolby ED2™, Dolby Digital® and Dolby Digital Plus™ streams are automatically detected by
the system with Dolby® stream presence indicated in blue. For an SDI signal carrying embedded
Dolby E audio, the Dolby E timing line number is also displayed below the detector, either as an
absolute value or relative to the Ideal line number specified for that video standard.
The HDMI instrument output carries a stereo pair of audio, as does the SDI instrument output. The
same signal is made available on pins 7 and 8 of the 26-way D-type connector on the rear of thechassis.
To monitor a stereo pair, select the speaker icon above the target audio meter. To select a monochannel, click the corresponding solo bus located between the audio meters and the speaker icons.
You can enable up to two audio meter instrument windows providing 32 simultaneous channels ofaudio metering. Each window can be assigned to monitor groups 1 to 4 (defined in SMPTE ST 299-1)
or groups 5 to 8 (defined in SMPTE ST 299-2) in any of up to four potential sub-image ANC areas asdefined in SMPTE ST 2082-10. You can scale the size of each audio window to occupy from 1/32 to
1/4 of the screen area.

Figure 10-7 provides a comparison of the available audio metering scale options and illustrates therelative scope and alignment levels. For each scale you can select an appropriate ballistic option.

Page 10-6

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 10-7: Comparison of Audio Metering Scales

Audio Group Metering (IP 2110 Boot Mode Only)
In the Flow Select instrument (IP 2110 boot mode) you can select either of the multiple flows: two audio
flows (AUD 1 and AUD 2 providing 2 x 64 channels) or four audio flows (AUD 1 to AUD 4 providing 4 x
32 channels) for audio group metering. When you select either 2 x 64 channels or 4 x 32 channels
you can set-up audio group metering in the Audio Meters instrument as follows:lWith 2 x 64 channels active, select AUD 1,2 : Channels 1 -8 from the Input Select dropdown.
This allows you to meter the first eight channels of AUD 1 in the first eight audio meters of the
Audio Meters instrument, and the first eight channels of AUD 2 in the next eight audio meters.
The remaining 112 channels are unmetered.

lWith 4 x 32 channels active, select AUD 1,2,3,4 : Channels 1 -4 from the Input Select dropdown.
This allows you to meter the first four channels of AUD 1 in the first four audio meters of the
Audio Meters instrument, the first four channels of AUD 2 in the next four audio meters, the first
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-7

four channels of AUD 3 in the next four audio meters and finally the first four channels of AUD 4
in the remaining four audio meters. The remaining 112 channels are unmetered.
To identify the source flow and channels currently being metered, hover the mouse cursor over anyof the 16 meters to display a tooltip, as shown in Figure 10-8.

Figure 10-8: Audio Group Metering Tooltip (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

Page 10-8

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Using the Dolby E Decoder
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-DOLBY

In order to meter the output of the Dolby® decoder, with the PHQXO-Dolby license installed, selectDolby Decoder from the Input Select dropdown in the Options Menu.
To enable the Dolby decoder to decode the audio signal, select both the Dolby Location (SDI/IP
2022-6 boot mode: Sub-Image n, AES; IP 2110 boot mode: AUD 1 to AUD 4, AES) and the Dolby
Source (SDI/IP 2022-6 boot mode: G1P1, etc.; IP 2110 boot mode: Ch 1-2, Ch 3-4, etc.) from the Options
menu. When selected, the Dolby E Decoder displays five pairs of audio meters (a ten channel audio
meter.) The first four meters display the eight channels of audio in the Dolby E or ED2 stream. The fifth
audio meter displays the Left and Right stereo 2.0 channels of the Downmix Engine.

Figure 10-9: Dolby E Decoder Selected in Audio Meters (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

You can also select the input to the Downmix Engine (for example, when downmixing from 5.1 to 2.0)
by choosing the appropriate Dolby E Downmix Program source from the Options menu.
The Dolby E decoder will provide up to eight decoded program outputs, depending on how many
programs are in the Dolby E or Dolby ED2 source. The unit provides the facility to preselect a
program to be downmixed (i.e., the input to the downmixer) that may not currently be present in thesource, but may be available in the future.
Note: The Downmix is part of the Dolby Decoder block and can only downmix content that is
actively being decoded by the decoder. It is not possible to downmix a PCM source.

In addition, a Dolby Status panel provides the following information on the status and context of thedecoded Dolby audio configured through the Options menu:
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-9llChannel configuration, for example, 5.1+2
Active Dolby Source input to the Dolby decoder, either as Flow and Channel (IP 2110 bootmode) for example, AUD1 1/2, or as SDI Substream and Channel (SDI and IP 2022-6 bootmodes) for example,
S1 G2P2l

Dolby Line Number (SDI and IP 2022-6 boot modes only)l

Dialogue Level metadata valuelSource of the Dolby downmix, that is, the program within the Dolby E stream.

The ten available channels are labeled according to the Program metadata in the Dolby audio feed(eight channels, together with a meter for a two program downmix of the selected Dolby E Downmix
Program (Program 1 through Program 8 selected in the Dolby Encode Options menu.)
For example, for a selected 5.1+2 program, the columns are labeled as follows:l

L1: Left 1l

R1: Right 1l

C: Centerl

LFE: Low Frequency Effectsl

Ls: Left Surroundl

Rs: Right Surroundl

L2:Left 2)l

R2: Right 2l

DnMix: Stereo downmix channels

For example, for a selected program with eight mono channels, the columns arelabeled: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, DnMix
For more information on the Dolby Metadata, launch the Analyzer - Dolby Metadata instrument, see
the section "Analyzer - Dolby Metadata" on page 10-33.

Page 10-10

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 10-10: Audio Meters and Dolby Decoder Instruments (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)

Figure 10-11: Audio Meters and Dolby Decoder Instruments (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-11

Instrument Menu Options
The following configurable parameters are available to configure the Analyzer - Audio Meters
Instrument:
Table 10-2 : Analyzer - Audio Meter Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Input Select(SDI andIP 2022-6 Boot
Modes)

Image/Sub Image 1 Group 1-4
Image/Sub Image 1 Group 5-8
Sub Image 2 Group 1-4
Sub Image 2 Group 5-8
Sub Image 3 Group 1-4
Sub Image 3 Group 5-8
Sub Image 4 Group 1-4
Sub Image 4 Group 5-8
AES IO
Dolby Decoder (Requires Option
PHQXO-DOLBY)

Select the source for each pair of audio meters to meter
simultaneously up to 32 audio channels in up to two
Audio Meter instrument windows.
When Option PHQXO-DOLBY installed, you can also
control and configure the Dolby Decoder and select its
output.

Input Select(IP 2110 Boot
Mode)

With Audio Flows set to 1x 80
Channel:AUD 1: Channels 1 - 16
AUD 1: Channels 17 - 32
AUD 1: Channels 33 - 48
AUD 1: Channels 49 - 64
AUD 1: Channels 65 - 80

Select the audio channels corresponding to the audio
flows selected in IP Receive - Flow Select, AUD 1, AUD 2,
AUD 3 or AUD 4 for metering in up to two Audio Meter
instrument windows.
Note: in 2110-30:
One active received flow comprises 1 - 80 channels,
whereas two active received flows comprise two times 1
to 64 channels.
When Option PHQXO-DOLBY installed, you can also
control and configure the Dolby Decoder and select its
output.

With Audio Flows set to 2x 64
Channels:
AUD 1: Channels 1 - 16
AUD 1: Channels 17 - 32
AUD 1: Channels 33 - 48
AUD 1: Channels 49 - 64
AUD 2: Channels 1 - 16
AUD 2: Channels 17 - 32
AUD 2: Channels 33 - 48
AUD 2: Channels 49 - 64
AUD 1,2 Channels 1 - 8
With Audio Flows set to 4x 32
Channels:
AUD 1: Channels 1 - 16
AUD 1: Channels 17 - 32
AUD 2: Channels 1 - 16
AUD 2: Channels 17 - 32
AUD 3: Channels 1 - 16
AUD 3: Channels 17 - 32
AUD 4: Channels 1 - 16
AUD 4: Channels 17 - 32
AUD1,2,3,4 Channels 1 - 4
AES IO
Dolby Decoder (Requires Option
PHQXO-DOLBY)

Page 10-12

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options

Description

Ballistics

PPM Type I
PPM Type II
Vu
VuFr
Fast

Set the required peak program meter (PPM) ballistic
responsiveness setting for the audio meters.
PPM Type I emulates the performance of IEC 60268-10
Type I PPM style audio meters typically used by German
broadcasters.
PPM Type II emulates the performance of IEC 60268-10
Type II PPM style audio meters typically used by UK
broadcasters.
Vu emulates the performance of IEC 60268-17 Type I
PPM style audio meters typically used by US andAustralian broadcasters.
VuFr emulates the performance of ITU-R Rec BS.645
style audio meters typically used by French broadcasters.
Fast provides instantaneous attack ballistics.

PPM ScaledBFS
dBu -18dBFS
dBu -20dBFS
BBC
DIN45406
NordicN9

Set the desired scale for the audio meters according to
your standard operating model. The displayed graticuleand audio levels change accordingly to reflect the selected scale.

Hat hold time

0.00...10.00, infinite

Sets the minimum time that the signal gate is held open in
ms.

Monitor Buttons

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

Toggle the display of Monitor icons for the audio meters.

Solo Buttons

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

Toggle the display of Solo icons for each channel of apair.

Dolby E Line
Number(SDI andIP 2022-6 Boot
Modes)

Relative to Ideal
Absolute

Select whether to display the Dolby E timing line number
relative to the ideal for the selected standard, or as an
absolute line number.

Dolby Options - Requires Option PHQXO-DOLBY
Note: The following controls are duplicated in the Dolby Metadata instrument. The Source selection affects the Dolby
Decoder and consequently also affects both the Audio Meter and the Dolby Metadata instruments.
Dolby Source(SDI and IP 20226 Boot Modes)

None
G1P1
G1P2
G2P1
G2P2
G3P1
G3P2
G4P1
G4P2
G5P1
G5P2
G6P1
G6P2
G7P1
G7P2
G8P1

Select the source for each audio pair configured as the
Dolby source.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-13

Item

Options

Description

For 2110-30 at 125 μs packet size:None
Ch 1-2
Ch 3-4
Ch 5-6
Ch 7-8
Ch 9-10...
Ch 31-32 (Audio Flows set to 4x 32)
Ch 63-64 (Audio Flows set to 2x 64
Ch 79-80 (Audio Flows set to 1x 80

Select the source for each audio channel pair configured
as the Dolby source.

Dolby Source(When AES
Selected as Dolby
Location)

None
AES 1
AES 2
AES 3
AES 4

Select the source for each AES audio input configured as
the Dolby source

Dolby Location(SDI andIP 2022-6 Boot
Modes)Sub Image 1
Sub Image 2
Sub Image 3
Sub Image 4
AES

Select the appropriate sub-image or the AES input as thelocation of the Dolby metadata.

Dolby Location (IP2110 Boot Mode)

With Audio Flows set to 1x 80
Channel:
AUD1
AES

Select the appropriate flow or the AES input as the location of the Dolby metadata.

G8P2
Dolby Source(IP 2110 Boot
Mode)

Notes:lll

For 2110-31 at 125 μs packet size, the number ofchannels is restricted to 60.
For 2110-30 at 1 ms packet size, the number ofchannels is restricted to 10
For 2110-31 at 1 ms packet size, the number ofchannels is restricted to 7

With Audio Flows set to 2x 64
Channel:
AUD1
AUD2
AES
With Audio Flows set to 4x 32
Channel:
AUD1
AUD2
AUD3
AUD4
AES
Dolby E Downmix

Program n

Select the desired Dolby E downmix program from Program 1 to Program 8.

Dolby E Downmix
Mode

LoRo (Default)

Select the desired Dolby E downmix mode.

Dolby E Downmix
Metadata

LegacyExtended (Default)

Legacy sets the downmix parameters to the center
downmix level and the surround downmix level.
Note: If Legacy mode is selected but legacy metadata is
not available, the unit uses the selected Extended
Downmix Metadata parameters.
Extended sets the downmix parameters to the Lo/Ro (orLt/Rt) center downmix level and surround downmix level.

Page 10-14

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options

Description
Note: If Extended mode is selected or being used andExtended metadata is not available, the downmix willrevert to using the last set levels.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-15

Analyzer - Loudness Monitor
Overview
The Analyzer - Loudness Monitor instrument enables the metering and monitoring of loudness on
the configured audio channels for either a stereo audio pair, a 5.1 surround sound audio group, or adecoded Dolby E program.
The Loudness Monitor provides the following Loudness meters:l

M: Momentary loudness meterl

S: Short-term loudness meterl

I: Integrated loudness meter.

Figure 10-12: Analyzer - Loudness Monitor Instrument

Loudness is measured in accordance with the standards EBU Recommendation R128 and ITU-R BS1770 which define the measurement over different time periods in terms of either:

Page 10-16l

EBU Loudness Units Full Scale (EBU LUFS)l

EBU Loudness Units (EBU LU)l

ITU Loudness K-weighted Full Scale (ITU LKFS)l

ITU Loudness Units (ITU LU)
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

The right-hand section of the Loudness window displays the actual loudness values of the assigned
audio channels both graphically, in the three loudness meters and numerically, in the current values
for Integrated, Momentary and Short Term loudness, on the right. This section also displays the True
Peak value, together with a value for the Loudness Range.
When below the configured loudness target and tolerance, the momentary, short-term and integrated
values are displayed in the same color as their corresponding loudness meter. If the loudness value
exceeds the configured tolerance for a particular meter, the corresponding value switches to a redcolor and an error count is incremented below the value. In addition, if the True Peak value exceeds
the configured True Peak Alarm threshold, this value also changes color from white to red.
Three media controls below the Loudness Monitors are provided to enable you to start, stop or pause
the Loudness Engine and consequently, the loudness monitoring session.
Note: The Loudness Engine controls do not affect the input source/media to the Loudness
Monitor.
The left-hand section of the Loudness window includes the Audio Meters acting as inputs to the
Loudness Monitor, together with a Loudness History graph, plotting the selected loudness values
from the monitoring session in real-time.
For clarity of viewing, you can double-click the Loudness Monitor to display the window in quarter
screen size.
The Loudness Options menu allows you to:llOpen the Audio Assignment dialog to define the loudness monitoring mode and assign theaudio input channels for loudness monitoring and measurement, see the section "Audio Assignment for Loudness Monitoring" on the next page.
Define the ballistics and PPM scale type for the conventional audio meters (in the Analyzer Audio Meters instrument) and the True Peak meters in the Loudness Monitor.
Note: The choice of ballistics does not affect the reported true peak values in the true
peak meters.

l

Set the loudness standard (EBU or ITU) and units (LU, LUFS or LKFS).

l

Configure the Loudness History graph.

lEnable or disable the individual loudness meters (M, S, and I).

l

l

l

Configure target loudness levels and appropriate tolerances for each loudness meter and, in
addition, set an alarm for the True Peak loudness value.
Reset the True Peak value, the loudness monitoring session, or zero accumulated loudness
errors.
Define the logging duration and lifetime of the loudness logfiles and change the naming of thelogfiles.

For details, see the section "Instrument Menu Options" on page 10-28

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-17

Summary Loudness Monitoring Process
When monitoring an audio track or program for loudness, you will need to perform some, or all, of thefollowing steps:
1. Open the Analyzer - Loudness Monitor from the PHABRIX launch menu.
2. Open the Audio Assignment dialog form the Loudness Options menu. Select the desiredaudio mode and then assign the appropriate audio inputs, see the section "Audio Assignment
for Loudness Monitoring" below.
3. Set the ballistics and scale type for the audio and true peak meters.
4. Select the Loudness standard and appropriate scale for the loudness monitors.
5. Enable which of the three possible loudness meters you want to use.
6. Set the graphing period and choose which traces to display in the Loudness History graph.
7. Set the loudness targets and tolerances for the active loudness meters.
8. Set the true peak alarm threshold.
9. Set the desired log duration and lifetime.
10. Click the Play button to start the loudness monitoring session.
These tasks are described in more detail in the following subsections.

Audio Assignment for Loudness Monitoring
You can select the audio inputs from the available audio channels to be monitored for loudness by
opening the Audio Assignment dialog from the Loudness Options menu.
The unit's Audio Meter instruments can provide up to 32 simultaneous audio channels in SDI modes
or up to 80 audio channels in 2110 mode.
In the SDI modes, you can assign any of the 32 channels of the left/right pairs in Groups 1 to 8 to thestereo or 5.1 audio inputs for loudness monitoring.
In IP 2110 boot mode you can assign any of up to 80 input channels to the stereo or 5.1 audio inputs
for loudness monitoring.
First select the desired loudness monitoring Mode from the dropdown menu:
Table 10-3 : Audio Assignment Modes for Loudness Monitoring

Audio Modes for SDI or
IP 2022-6 Boot Modes:

Audio Modes for IP 2110 Boot Mode:SDI Stereo

IP Stereo

SDI 5.1

IP 5.1AES Stereo

AES Stereo

AES 5.1

AES 5.1

Dolby Decoder1

Dolby Decoder1

In SDI, AES or IP Stereo mode, two input audio meters, Left (L) and Right (R) are displayed.
In SDI, AES or IP 5.1 mode, all six audio input meters are active as follows:

Page 10-18

PHABRIX Qx User ManuallLeft (L)l

Right (R)lCenter (C)lLow frequency effects (Lfe)lLeft Surround (Ls)lRight Surround (Rs).

In Dolby Decoder1 mode, select one of the available Dolby Decoder configuration programs, see"Dolby Program Configuration Settings" on page 10-41

Note: The Loudness Monitor supports only the following channel order in surround sound mode
5.1: L, R, C, Lfe, Ls, Rs.
The Audio Assignment dialog then maps the incoming audio to the expected channel order ofthe Loudness Monitor.

In SDI boot mode, select the sub-image then the group/pair to use as stereo inputs to the loudness
monitor from the dropdown lists. In 2110 mode, select the configured audio flow (AUD 1 to AUD 4) andthen assign one of up to 80 available channels (depending on the number of flows) using theselector.

Figure 10-13: Audio Assignment for Loudness Input in SDI and IP 2110 Boot Modes

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-19

Figure 10-14: Audio Assignment for Loudness Input from the Dolby Decoder

On completion, click OK to save your audio input mapping changes.

Audio Meters for Loudness Inputs
The audio meters displayed in the Loudness Monitor display the active audio levels for the selectedmode and assigned audio channels.
In stereo mode, the two selected input channels are active in the Left (L) and Right (R) audio input
meters.
In 5.1 surround sound mode, six input channels are active in all six audio input meters: L, R, C, Lfe, Ls
and Rs as shown in the following figure.

Figure 10-15: Audio Meters for Loudness Inputs in Stereo and 5.1 Surround Sound Modes

The current True Peak levels are also displayed as a horizontal band in each of the active audio
meters.

Understanding the Loudness Meters and Values
The Loudness Monitor features three individual loudness meters to measure momentary, short-term
and integrated (also known as program loudness) levels across the different time periods defined in
the selected standard. You can enable or disable each individual meter using the Options menu andset the Loudness standard and scale. The unit updates the loudness meters every 100 ms.
Page 10-20

PHABRIX Qx User ManualWhen enabled, the monitors give a visual indication, in real-time, of the current loudness level withthe actual value displayed as a numeric in the right-hand column. The loudness value is also plottedin the Loudness History graph to generate a trace of the loudness trend over time.
The Momentary (M) Loudness meter measures the loudness of the audio in a 400 ms period andthen updates the Momentary Loudness displays (numeric value, meter and peak).
The Short-term (S) Loudness meter measures the maximum level of all short-term loudness values
received over a period of 3 s monitors and then updates the Short-term Loudness displays (numericvalue, meter and peak).
The Integrated (I) Loudness meter measures the average loudness over the entire length of themonitoring session, audio track or program and then updates the Integrated Loudness displays(numeric value, meter and peak).
Note: If you hover the mouse cursor over the three loudness meters, the unit displays a tooltip
showing the Peak Momentary, Short-term and Integrated values.
The underlying Loudness Engine calculates the Momentary, Short-term and Integrated loudness
values and the Loudness meters are the visual representation of the underlying algorithm andcalculations.
Each Loudness Meter is color-coded for ease of recognition as follows:lMomentary Meter: MagentalShort-term Meter: OrangelIntegrated Meter: Cyan

The colors of the loudness meters are also reflected in both the numeric loudness values and in theplotted traces in the Loudness History graphs.
When a loudness value for one of the loudness meters is in error, the value is displayed in red.
The configurable Target Zone of each meter represents the target loudness of the input audio signal
and is displayed as the green background in the meter. When the loudness is within the target range,
the numeric value is displayed in the same color as the corresponding meter.
The configurable Tolerance Zone of each meter represents the tolerance permitted for the loudnessof the signal to be outside the target range and is displayed as the yellow background in the meter. If
the tolerance is set to zero (0) or a very low value, you may not see a yellow background section on
the meter. When the loudness is within the tolerance range, the numeric value is displayed in thesame color as the corresponding meter.
The area of the meter outside the target and tolerance levels represents the loudness Error Zone, or
excessive loudness, and is displayed as a red background in the meter.
If the loudness is within the error zone of any of the meters, the corresponding loudness value isdisplayed in red.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-21

Figure 10-16: EBU LUFS Loudness Meters Showing Default Configuration With No Signal

Figure 10-17: Active EBU LUFS Loudness Meters Showing Peak Levels

The unit measures loudness simultaneously, across three different time periods, momentary, shortterm and integrated. The current loudness values, displayed to the right of the Loudness meters, areshown in the same color as their corresponding meter, for example, the Momentary Loudness value
is magenta, and so on. Only when the value exceeds the configured target and tolerance level does
the color of the displayed value change to red to indicate a loudness error condition. Each of the
Loudness values is described in the following subsections.

True Peak ValueAs specified in the EBU Recommendation EBU-R 128-2020 the True Peak "level of a programme shallnot exceed −1dBTP (dBTruePeak) during production (linear audio)." The True Peak measurement iscalculated from all audio data for each channel and is not affected by the choice of ballistics.
Page 10-22

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

The True Peak value is displayed in white font when below the value of the configurable True Peak
Alarm threshold. When the True Peak value exceeds the True Peak Alarm threshold setting, the True
Peak value is displayed in red. You can set the True Peak Alarm threshold anywhere in the range
from −99.9 to 0 dBFS, with the default set to 0 dBFS.

Figure 10-18: Loudness Values Showing Errors on the Integrated Loudness Value

Momentary Loudness Value and Error CountThe Momentary Loudness value, displayed immediately below the True Peak value, represents the
loudness value measured across the shortest timescale of 400 ms. The unit updates the value every
100 ms.
If the Momentary Loudness value is above the configured tolerance level then the unit starts torecord an error count and the value changes color to red. The error count represents the number ofdata samples above the target and tolerance threshold.

Short-term Loudness Value and Error CountThe Short-term Loudness value, represents the loudness value measured across a longer timescaleof 3 seconds. The unit updates the value every 100 ms.
If the Short-term Loudness value is above the configured tolerance level then the unit starts to record
an error count and the value changes color to red. The error count represents the number of data
samples above the target and tolerance threshold.

Integrated Loudness Value and Error CountThe Integrated Loudness value represents the average loudness across the entire session or
program. The unit updates the value every one second.
if the Integrated value exceeds the tolerance setting, the error counts are recorded, in the same way
as for momentary and short term loudness but, in addition, if the value reaches the target then drops
below the tolerance, the unit records ten error counts.

Loudness Range Value
The Loudness Range is defined in the EBU Recommendation EBU-R 128-2020 as "the distribution of
loudness within a programme." The unit calculates and updates this value every second.
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-23

Using the Loudness Controls
The loudness monitoring controls are designed to appear as standard media controls and work in thesame way. Use these controls to start, pause, restart and stop the loudness monitoring session.
Active controls are displayed as a white icon on a gray background and inactive controls arereversed, as shown in the following graphic.
The following loudness monitoring controls are located below the loudness meters to control the
progress of loudness monitoring; from left to right:l

Stop - stops the current loudness monitoring and logging sessionlPlay - starts the loudness monitoring and logging sessionlPause - pauses the current loudness monitoring and logging session.

Figure 10-19: Loudness Monitoring Controls

To start a loudness monitoring session, click the Play button and to stop the session, click Stop. If you
want to suspend loudness monitoring temporarily press Pause, then either Play to resume or Stop to
end the session.
Note: Pressing Pause pauses the current loudness monitoring and the logging session. Whenyou press Play to resume, the unit continues loudness monitoring using the previous set of audio
data and, in addition, restarts the logging session. As a result, the unit re-sets the running-time
counter to zero.
You will see the current status of a loudness monitoring session displayed below the controls. If
monitoring is in progress, the Loudness Monitor displays the running time of the session, in the format
hh:mm:ss. If monitoring is paused, or stopped, you will see the messages Loudness Stopped or
Loudness Paused, respectively.

Using the Loudness History Graph
The Loudness History Graph displays a trace of loudness values over a configured time period foreach active loudness meter, with the trace displayed in the same color as its associated meter. You
can set the displayed graphing period from one minute to a maximum of 10 minutes and thehorizontal (x-axis) time scale adjusts accordingly. The vertical (y-axis) scale represents the loudness
units for the configured standard, for example, LUFS, LKFS, or LU. The scale values adapt
automatically to the loudness values being monitored.
If you position the cursor over any point in the History Graph, the unit displays a tooltip containing thefollowing information:

Page 10-24

PHABRIX Qx User ManuallCurrent actual timelElapsed time in the loudness monitoring sessionlMomentary loudness value at that point (if active)lShort-term loudness value at that point (if active)lIntegrated loudness value at that point (if active)

If you stop loudness monitoring using the loudness controls and then start another session, thecontent is cleared from the History Graph.

Figure 10-20: Loudness History Graph

Resetting Loudness Values and Errors
The reset controls in the Loudness Options menu enable you to reset the following:lllTrue Peak Value: Resets to the current true peak value at the moment of reset.
Loudness Monitoring: Clears the Loudness History Graph and restarts the loudness monitoring session to commence monitoring again from time zero.
Errors: Zeroes any error counts registered by the Momentary, Short-term or Integrated loudness meters.

Managing the Loudness Log Files
The unit automatically starts to record a loudness log when you click Play to start the loudness
monitoring session.
The unit creates two files for each loudness log as follows:lA log description text file with a .txt extensionl

A data file in comma separated value (CSV) format with a .csv extension.

Both log files are compressed into a single zip file when the unit saves the logfile to the repository.
The log description text file contains the following content:lStart DatelStart Time
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-25

lLoudness Mode (LUFS/LKFS/LU)

l

List of loudness inputslTarget and Tolerance configurationl

End TimelTrue Peak levels for each loudness inputlProgram loudness valuelHighest Momentary Loudness valuelMomentary Error CountlHighest Short-term Loudness valuelShort-term Error CountlHighest Integrated Loudness ValuelIntegrated Error Countl

Final Loudness Range value

The data CSV logfile contains the following content:
l

Time

l

TimecodelMomentary Loudness valuelShort-term Loudness valuelIntegrated Loudness valuelLoudness Range value

Each time the configured Log Duration is reached, or you stop or pause loudness monitoring, the unit
saves a Loudness Log to the repository. You can set the Log Duration to a value between fiveminutes and 24 hours in the Options menu, with a default duration of 30 minutes.
Each loudness logfile is an individual, time-stamped, compressed CSV (comma separated value) zip
file, saved in the following folder:
qx:/log/loudness
The Log Lifetime setting is the period that the unit keeps the loudness logs in its repository. You can
set the log lifetime period from one to 30 days in the Options menu. Once the configured log lifetime
elapses, the unit will delete the loudness logfile.

Retrieving the Loudness Log Files
Use the File Manager to copy the Loudness logfiles to a USB drive, in the same way as with otherfiles. Open the File Manager from the Launch menu or insert a USB drive into one of the USB ports.
From the qx:/ folder, open the log folder, then the loudness folder. You should see all your loudness
logfiles listed with a date- and time-stamp, together with a .zip extension. Select the desired files,
right-click, then select Copy from Qx to USB... from the dropdown menu.
You can also delete selected logfiles, if necessary.
For more information on the File Manager, see the section "Managing Files with the USB FileManager" on page 3-19.

Page 10-26

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 10-21: Loudness Logfiles Listed in the File Manager

Renaming the Loudness Logfile Base Name
All logfiles are named using the following syntax by default:
loudness_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.zip

Figure 10-22: Rename Loudness Logfile Base Name

The loudness logs are always date- and time-stamped, however, you can change the default
loudness base name as required. To do so, select Rename file... from the Loudness Options menu todisplay the rename dialog. Enter a new base name in the field, then click Ok. The new base name will
be used to name all loudness logfiles from that point forward.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-27

Instrument Menu Options
The following menu parameters are available to configure the Analyzer - Loudness Monitor
Instrument:

Figure 10-23: Analyzer - Loudness Monitor Menu Options

Page 10-28

PHABRIX Qx User ManualTable 10-4 : Analyzer - Loudness Monitor Menu Options
Item
Audio Assignment

Options
System Control - opens Audio
Assignment dialog

Description
Use this control to open the Audio Assignment dialog toselect the audio mode and assign the loudness input
channels or Dolby E program, as appropriate. For details,
see the table "Audio Assignment Modes for Loudness
Monitoring" on page 10-18.

Audio Meter Ballistics and Scale Settings
Ballistics

PPM Scale TypePPM Type I (Default)
PPM Type II
Vu
VuFr
Fast

Set the required peak program meter (PPM) ballistic
responsiveness setting for the audio meters.

dBFS (Default)
dBu -18dBFS
dBu -20dBFS
BBC
DIN45406
Nordic N9

Set the desired scale for the loudness audio meters
according to your standard operating model. The
displayed graticule and audio levels change accordingly
to reflect the selected scale.
Note: The PPM Scale Type applies only to the audio
meters in the Loudness Monitor; the Audio Meters
instrument has its own Scale Type setting.

PPM Type I emulates the performance of IEC 60268-10
Type I PPM style audio meters typically used by German
broadcasters.
PPM Type II emulates the performance of IEC 60268-10
Type II PPM style audio meters typically used by UK
broadcasters.
Vu emulates the performance of IEC 60268-17 Type I
PPM style audio meters typically used by US andAustralian broadcasters.
VuFr emulates the performance of ITU-R Rec BS.645
style audio meters typically used by French broadcasters.
Fast provides instantaneous attack ballistics.
Note: The Ballistics option is a global setting that applies
to all of the unit's audio meters.

Loudness Settings
Loudness Standard EBU LUFS (Default)
EBU LUITU LKFS
ITU LU

Select the appropriate loudness standard for loudness
monitoring of your audio track or program.
You can switch between ITU and EBU standards without
losing your customized settings.

Loudness Scale

The +9 and +18 scales are defined in EBU Tech 3341-2016
and have been adopted by the ITU.

+9 Scale (Default)+18 Scale

The scale ranges are as follows for EBU:
+9 Scale: −18.0 LU to +9.0 LU (−41.0 LUFS to −14.0 LUFS)+18 Scale:−36.0 LU to +18.0 LU (−59.0 LUFS to −5.0 LUFS)
The scale ranges are as follows for ITU:
+9 Scale: −18.0 LU to +9.0 LU (−42.0 LUFS to −15.0 LUFS)+18 Scale: −36.0 LU to +18.0 LU (−60.0 LUFS to −6.0
LUFS)
See Figure 10-24 for a comparison of these scales.
Loudness History Graph Settings

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-29

Item

Options

Description

Graph Period

1 minute(Default)
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes

Define the time period over which the History Graph displays loudness data. The horizontal time scale adjusts
automatically to the selected period.

Graph Momentary

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, the unit plots the Momentary loudness
trace in the Loudness History Graph. You can switch off
the display of the Momentary loudness trace if desired.
You can display the Momentary graph even if theMomentary loudness meter is disabled.

Graph Short Term

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, the unit plots the Short-term loudness
trace in the Loudness History Graph. You can switch off
the display of the Short-term loudness trace if desired.
You can display the Short-term graph even if the Shortterm loudness meter is disabled.

Graph Integrated

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, the unit plots the Integrated loudness
trace in the Loudness History Graph. You can switch off
the display of the Integrated loudness trace if desired.
You can display the Integrated graph even if the Integrated loudness meter is disabled.

Graph Fixed Period Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, the x-axis is set to the static value set in
the Graph Period option and does not change
dynamically.
When disabled, the x-axis scale is dynamic up to a
maximum period of 2 minutes (120 seconds), after which it
is fixed.

Graph Graticules

When enabled, displays gridlines in the background of
the graph.

Disabled (Default)
EnabledLoudness Meter Activity
Momentary Meter

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When disabled, the Loudness Monitor will not display
momentary loudness values or errors, however, the datais still recorded in the loudness log.

Short Term Meter

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When disabled, the Loudness Monitor will not display
short-term loudness values or errors, however, the data is
still recorded in the loudness log.

Integrated Meter

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When disabled, the Loudness Monitor will not display
integrated loudness values or errors , however, the datais still recorded in the loudness log.

Loudness Targets, Tolerances and Alarm
Momentary Target

Range: − 41 to −14
Default: −23

Set the maximum acceptable Momentary loudness level
for the monitored track or program. This represents thegreen section of the meter and signal.

Momentary Tolerance

Range: 0.0 to 10.0
Default: 0.5

When set to a value above 0.0, the Momentary tolerance
is displayed as the yellow background of the Momentary
Loudness meter. When the monitored momentary
loudness is within the tolerance, the level color changes
to yellow.
A tolerance level provides an acceptable buffer toaccommodate for measurement errors.

Page 10-30

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options

Description
If the Momentary tolerance is set to 0.0 then thetolerance / target feature is disabled so that the meterbackground is completely green and no errors are
displayed.

Short Term Target

Range: − 41 to −14
Default: −23

Set the maximum acceptable Short-term loudness level
for the monitored track or program. This represents thegreen section of the meter and signal.

Short Term Tolerance

Range: 0.0 to 10.0
Default: 0.5

When set to a value above 0.0, the Short-term tolerance
is displayed as the yellow background of the Short-term
Loudness meter. When the monitored short-term
loudness is within the tolerance, the level color changes
to yellow.
A tolerance level provides an acceptable buffer toaccommodate for measurement errors.
If the Short-term tolerance is set to 0.0 then the tolerance/ target feature is disabled so that the meter backgroundis completely green and no errors are displayed.

Integrated Target

Range: − 41 to −14
Default: −23

Set the maximum acceptable Integrated loudness level
for the monitored track or program. This represents thegreen section of the meter and signal.

Integrated Tolerance

Range: 0.0 to 10.0
Default: 0.5

When set to a value above 0.0, the Integrated tolerance
is displayed as the yellow background of the Integrated
Loudness meter. When the monitored integrated
loudness is within the tolerance, the level color changes
to yellow.
A tolerance level provides an acceptable buffer toaccommodate for measurement errors.

True Peak Alarm

Range: 0 to −99
Default: 0

Set the threshold above which the unit generates errors
for the loudness True Peak.

Reset True Peak
Value

System Control

Resets to the current True Peak value at the moment ofreset.

Reset Loudness
Monitoring

System Control

Resets both the Loudness History Graph and the loudness logs. The loudness monitoring session restarts fromtime zero.

Reset Errors

System Control

Resets all error counts from the active loudness meters to
zero. This control does not reset the loudness logs.

Reset Controls

Loudness Log Settings
Log Duration

5 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes (Default)
1 hour2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
12 hours
24 hours

Set the duration of each loudness logfile. When the Log
Duration is met during a monitoring session, the unit
saves the logfile to the repository with the current dateand time-stamp.

Log Lifetime

1 day

Set the retention period for loudness logfiles in the unit's
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-31

Item

Rename File...

Options

Description

7 days (Default)
14 days
30 daysrepository. On expiry of the Log Lifetime period, the unit
deletes the logfile to free-up space in the repository.

System Control - Opens file renaming dialog

Use this control to change the loudness logfile basename from loudness to a different string.

Figure 10-24: Loudness Standard Scales for Momentary Meter & Default Target/Tolerance Settings for All Meters

Page 10-32

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAnalyzer - Dolby Metadata
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-DOLBY

Overview
The Analyzer - Dolby Metadata instrument displays the Dolby E™ metadata present in a selectedaudio stream. It also enables you to check the correct timing of Dolby E packets in the audio signal at
all stages in an SDI or 2022-6 broadcast chain. You can check whether the Dolby E is createdcorrectly and transferred transparently through the broadcast chain unaffected by network
equipment such as routers, switchers, satellite links, etc.
You can choose to monitor the Dolby® audio from any of the SDI, IP 2022-6 or IP 2110 input
embedded audio pairs / channels or the AES input.

Figure 10-25: Analyzer - Dolby Metadata E Instrument (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)

Figure 10-26: Analyzer - Dolby Metadata E Instrument (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

The Dolby E Line Number, displayed in the top-right of the window (for SDI and IP 2022-6 bootmodes), may be displayed in different colors as follows:
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-33

lWhite: Line number within ideal range.

lYellow: Line number within allowable range.

lRed: Line number outside the allowable range for the Dolby start line.

For more information, refer to the Dolby reference documentation.
Dolby E and Dolby ED2 digital audio standards can be transported as audio data over a SMPTE 337M
AES carrier with a 48 kHz sample rate. These standards can be used to transport mono, stereo, Dolby
5.1 and Dolby 7.1 audio programs.

Figure 10-27: Audio Meters, Dolby Decoder and Dolby Metadata Instruments (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)

About Dolby Metadata
Dolby E is an audio technology that carries metadata together with the audio bitstream. The metadata
describes the encoded audio and includes information to control downstream encoders anddecoders. The encoded audio and metadata are usually transmitted together as a bitstream on a pairof standard digital audio channels (for example, AES3).
Dolby E includes metadata parameters required for the transmission encoder. Metadata can be
added during program creation or mastering and then carried through the broadcast transmission.

Dolby E
Dolby E is a production audio encoding and decoding technology, developed by Dolby Laboratories,that allows up to eight channels of audio (mono, stereo, 5.1 or 7.1) for a primary program (Program 1)
and optional ancillary programs. These eight channels are compressed (low loss) into a digital streamthat can be transferred between compatible devices and stored on a standard stereo pair of audio
tracks.
This format is based on video frames and allows switching and further processing and/or
compression.
Page 10-34

PHABRIX Qx User ManualDolby ED2
Dolby ED2 is an extension to Dolby E, designed with future audio technologies in mind and is
backward compatible with Dolby E.

Instrument Menu Options

Figure 10-28: Analyzer - Dolby Metadata Options Menu (SDI / IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

Figure 10-29: Analyzer - Dolby Metadata Options Menu (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

The following menu options are available for configuring the Analyzer - Dolby Metadata Instrument:
Note: The following controls are duplicated in the Audio Meters instrument. The Source
selection affects the Dolby Decoder and consequently also affects the Audio Meters instrument.
Table 10-5 : Analyzer - Dolby Metadata Menu Options
Item
Dolby Source(SDI andIP 2022-6 Boot
Modes)

Options
Group 1: Pair 1
Group 1: Pair 2Group 2: Pair 1
Group 2: Pair 2Group 3: Pair 1
Group 3: Pair 2Group 4: Pair 1
Group 4: Pair 2Group 5: Pair 1
Group 5: Pair 2Group 6: Pair 1
Group 6: Pair 2Group 7: Pair 1
Group 7: Pair 2Group 8: Pair 1
Group 8: Pair 2

Description
Select the source for each audio pair configured as the
Dolby source.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-35

Item

Options

Description

Dolby Source(IP 2110 Boot
Mode)

None
Ch 1-2
Ch 3-4
Ch 5-6
Ch 7-8
Ch 9-10...
Ch 31-32 (Audio Flows set to 4x 32)
Ch 63-64 (Audio Flows set to 2x 64
Ch 79-80 (Audio Flows set to 1x 80

Select the source for each audio channel pair configured
as the Dolby source.

Dolby Source(When AES
Selected as Dolby
Location)

None
AES 1
AES 2
AES 3
AES 4

Select the source for each AES audio input configured as
the Dolby source

Dolby Location(SDI andIP 2022-6 BootMode)

Sub Image 1
Sub Image 2
Sub Image 3
Sub Image 4
AES

Select the appropriate sub-image or the AES input as thelocation of the Dolby metadata.

Dolby Location(IP 2110 Boot
Mode)

With Audio Flows set to 1x 80
Channel:
AUD1
AES

Select the appropriate flow (either 2110-30 or -31) or the
AES input as the location of the Dolby metadata.

With Audio Flows set to 2x 64
Channel:
AUD1
AUD2
AES
With Audio Flows set to 4x 32
Channel:
AUD1
AUD2
AUD3
AUD4
AES
Dolby Gain Values

Show (Default)
Hide

Choose whether to display Dolby gain values in the
Metadata instrument for each of the Dolby channels.

Dolby E Line
Absolute (Default)
Relative to Ideal
Number(SDI and ST 20226 Boot Modes)

Select whether to display the Dolby E timing line number
relative to the ideal for the selected standard, or as an
absolute line number.

Reset Errors

Reset the error counter to zero.

Control

Dolby Program Metadata Display
Generic Information
The following table provides an overview of the generic section in the first two rows of the Analyzer Dolby Metadata instrument.
Page 10-36

PHABRIX Qx User ManualTable 10-6 : Generic Parameters
Parameter
Frame Rate(fps)

Displayed Values
23.98
24
25
29.97
30

Description
Indicates the frame rate, in frames per second, of the video
reference signal to which the device producing themetadata stream is locked.

Original Rate 23.98
24
(fps)
25
29.97
30

Indicates the frame rate, in frames per second, of theoriginal source.

Bit Depth

16
20
24

The number of bits per word used in the Dolby E Frame.

Timecode

hh:mm:ss:ff

Displays the SMPTE timecode associated with the Dolby E
frame in the format:
hours:minutes:seconds:frames

Config5.1 + 2
5.1 + 2 x 1
4+4
4+2x2
Etc.

Program configuration displays the grouping of audio
channels in a Dolby E bitstream. Up to eight channels canbe grouped together in individual programs,
where each program contains its own metadata.
For full details, see the Dolby Metadata Guide.

Programs

1 to 8

Displays the number of Programs in the source Dolby E bitstream. The number of programs ranges from a single program to eight individual programs on a single Dolby E
stream. Each program is discrete, with its own metadata in
the Dolby E stream.

ErrorsError countCount of the number of CRC errors found in the audio
segments, the metadata segments and the synch/framing
segments.
Can be reset to zero using the Reset Errors control in the
instrument options menu.

Dolby Gain Metadata
The Gain section of the Analyzer - Dolby Metadata instrument displays the beginning and end gain
settings for each channel in the Dolby E program.
You can choose to show or hide the Gain section to provide additional screen real-estate for viewing
the program metadata parameters.

Dolby Program Metadata
Program metadata is created as part of Dolby authoring process. The Analyzer - Dolby Metadata
instrument displays the following metadata from the Dolby E Program:
Table 10-7 : Dolby Program Metadata - Displayed Parameters
Dolby MetadataParameter

Displayed Options

Description

Column 1 Metadata
Dialogue Level−1 to −31 dB

The long term average level of dialogue within a

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-37

Dolby MetadataParameter

Displayed Options

Description
presentation.

CenterDownmix Level−3 dB−4.5 dB−6 dB

The weighting factor applied to the Center channel
during a downmix to stereo 2.0 using Legacy Downmix
Metadata.

Surround Downmix
Level

−3 dB
−6 dB
−999 dB

The weighting factor applied to the Surround channels
during a downmix to stereo 2.0 using Legacy Downmix
Metadata.

Lo/Ro Center
Downmix Level+3 dB+1.5 dB
0.0 dB−1.5 dB−3.0 dB−4.5 dB−6.0 dB−999 dB

The weighting factor applied to the Center channel
when downmixing to Left Only / Right Only (Lo/Ro)
stereo 2.0 using extended Metadata.

Lo/Ro SurroundDownmix Level−1.5 dB−3.0 dB−4.5 dB−6.0 dB−999 dB

The weighting factor applied to the Surround channels
when downmixing to Left Only / Right Only (Lo/Ro)
stereo 2.0 using extended Metadata.

Lt/Rt Center
Downmix Level+3 dB+1.5 dB
0.0 dB−1.5 dB−3.0 dB−4.5 dB−6.0 dB−999 dB

The weighting factor applied to the Center channel
when downmixing to Left Total / Right Total (Lt/Rt) stereo
2.0 using extended Metadata.

Lt/Rt SurroundDownmix Level−1.5 dB−3.0 dB−4.5 dB−6.0 dB−999 dB

The weighting factor applied to the Surround channels
when downmixing to Left Total / Right Total (Lt/Rt) stereo
2.0 using extended Metadata.

Audio Production
Information

Yes
No

Indicates whether the bitstream contains information
about the audio production environment used in making
the program.

Lowpass Filter

Enabled/Disabled

Indicates whether a lowpass filter is applied to the main
input channels of a Dolby encoder before encoding.
The filter removes high frequency signals that are notencoded. At suitable data rates this filter operates
above 20 kHz. In all cases it prevents aliasing on decoding and is usually enabled.

Surround Phase Shift Enabled/Disabled

The Surround Channel 90-Degree Phase-Shift feature isapplied when creating an Lt/Rt stereo 2.0 downmix.

Column 2 Metadata
Channel Mode

Page 10-38

1+1
1/0 Mono

Defines the channel configuration for the Program.

PHABRIX Qx User ManualDolby MetadataParameter

Displayed Options

Description

2/0 Stereo
3/0
2/1
3/1
2/2
3/2
RF ModeCompression

Film Light
Film Standard
Music LightMusic Standard
SpeechNone

An Operational Mode / Dynamic Compression Modeused by consumer and professional decoder products.

Room TypeNot Indicated
Large
Small

Describes the equalization used during the final mixing
session.

Dolby SurroundMode

Not Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround
Not IndicatedThis parameter is used to identify whether the bitstream
contains information that was encoded in Dolby Surround. If this is true, after Dolby Digital decoding, the bitstream may be decoded using Dolby Pro Logic.

Dolby Surround Ex
Mode

Not Indicated
Not Surround EX
Surround EX

This parameter is used to identify the encoded audio as
material encoded in Surround EX™

Lfe Channel

EnabledDisabled

The status of the LFE Channel parameter indicates to a
Dolby Digital encoder whether an LFE Channel ispresent within the bitstream.
Channel mode determines whether the LFE Channel
parameter can be set.
You must have at least three channels to be able to add
an LFE channel.

Copyright Bit

Yes
NoThis parameter indicates whether the encoded Dolby
Digital bitstream is copyright protected.

AD Converter TypeStandard
HDCD

Allows audio that has passed through a particular A/D
conversion stage to be marked as such, so that a
decoder may apply the complementary D/A process.

Lfe Lowpass Filter

EnabledDisabled

This parameter determines whether a lowpass filter isapplied to the LFE channel. It is ignored if the LFE channel is disabled.

Dolby Headphone

Not IndicatedNot Dolby Encoded
Dolby Encoded
Reserved

Indicates whether the program has been encoded foruse with Dolby Headphones.

Complete Main
Main M&E
Assc Visual Imp
Assc Hear Imp
Assc Dialogue
Assc Commentary

Indicates the type of audio service that the bitstream
contains. Complete Main is the standard mode of operation and contains a complete audio program including
dialog, music, and effects. Associated services may also
be included in the bitstream.

Column 3 Metadata
Bitstream Mode

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-39

Dolby MetadataParameter

Displayed Options

Description

Assc Emergency
Assc Voice Over
Main Sv Karaoke
Line Mode
Compression

Film Light
Film Standard
Music LightMusic Standard
SpeechNone

Indicates which Dynamic Range Control Profile wasselected during the mastering process.

Mixing Level

80 dB to 111 dB in
1 dB increments

Indicates the peak sound pressure level (SPL) used during the final mixing session at the studio or on the dubbing stage.

Preferred Stereo
Down Mix

Not Indicated
Lt/Rt Downmix preferred
Lo/Ro Downmix preferredReserved

This parameter allows the producer to select either the
Lt/Rt or the Lo/Ro downmix in a consumer decoder thathas stereo outputs.
Consumer receivers are able to override this selection,
but this parameter provides the opportunity for a 5.1channel soundtrack to play in Lo/Ro mode without userintervention. This is especially useful on music material.

Data Rate

32 kbps
40 kbps
56 kbps
64 kbps
80 kbps
96 kbps
112 kbps
128 kbps
160 kbps
192 kbps
224 kbps
256 kbps
320 kbps
384 kbps
448 kbps
512 kbps
576 kbps
640 kbps

Indicates the data rate that should be used to encode
the transmitted bitstream associated with the specified
program.

RF Over-modulation
Protection

EnabledDisabled

Determines whether an RF pre-emphasis filter is used in
the overload protection algorithm to prevent RF overmodulation in set-top box decoders. Usually disabled
but If enabled, displayed in yellow font.

Original Bitstream

Yes
No

Sets the value of a single bit in the Dolby bitstream toindicate whether the bitstream is the master version(Yes) or a copy (No).

DC Filter:

EnabledDisabled

This parameter determines whether a DC-blocking 3 Hz
highpass filter is applied to the main input channels of
the audio encoder.

Surround 3dB
Attenuation

EnabledDisabled

This parameter determines whether the Surroundchannel(s) are to be attenuated by 3 dB before

Page 10-40

PHABRIX Qx User ManualDolby MetadataParameter

Displayed Options

Description
encoding.
The attenuation actually takes place inside the Dolby
Audio encoder.

Table 10-8 : Dolby Program Configuration Settings
Dolby
Program

ProgramCount

Channel
Count

0

2

8

5.1+2

1

3

8

5.1+2x1

2

2

8

4+4

3

3

8

4+2+2

4

4

8

4+2+2x1

5

5

8

4+4x1

6

4

8

2+2+2+2

7

5

8

2+2+2+2x1

8

6

8

2+2+4x1

9

7

8

2+5x1

10

8

8

6x1

11

1

6

5.1

12

2

6

4+2

13

3

6

4+2x1

14

3

6

2+2+2

15

4

6

2+2+2x1

16

5

6

2+2x4

17

6

6

6x1

18

1

4

4

19

2

4

2+2

20

3

4

2+2x1

21

4

4

4x1

22

1

8

7.1

23

1

8

7.1

Program Configuration

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 10-41

11
Data Analysis Instruments
This chapter describes the suite of data analysis Instruments and includes the following sections:lAnalyzer - DataviewlAnalyzer - Ancillary Statusl

Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 11-1

Analyzer - Dataview
Overview
The Analyzer - Dataview instrument displays the raw data present in the signal, be it - 1.5G HD-SDI,
3G-SDI, 6G-SDI, 12G-SDI or ST 2022-6. You can observe the data in hexadecimal, decimal, or binary
formats, and each data word has a sample and line coordinate. The instrument displays the entire
video frame complete with active video, TRS words, and blanking information. Changing the window
size changes the amount of data displayed. For 6G-SDI and 12G-SDI video standards, pre-imposedsync bit correction is provided.
Note: The Analyzer - Dataview Instrument is not currently available in IP 2110 boot mode for the
analysis of IP data flows.

Figure 11-1: Analyzer - Dataview Instrument

Data is presented with a color-coding for both text and background:

Page 11-2lForeground color indicates video sample type: Y (white), Cb (blue), Cr (red)lBackground color indicates data type: TRS words (blue), Blanking (black), Active picture (green)

PHABRIX Qx User ManualYou can quickly navigate the dataview window using
sample and line selection in the Cursor tool or using theNavigate keypad (shown, right).
Both tools are dynamically linked to an enabled Picture
Cursor in the Waveform and Picture instruments.
The Cursor tool provides transport line and sample sliders
to move around the dataview, at the same time as giving
the corresponding Active Picture line and pixel values.
The Navigate keypad allows you to enter the desired
coordinates, and provides buttons for quick navigation to
key locations: first and last samples or lines, end of active
video (EAV) and start of active video (SAV) TRS words,
active picture (AP) furthest - left, right, top, and bottom
positions.

Figure 11-2: Dataview Navigate Keypad

Instrument Menu Options
The following right-click submenu options are available:lCursor > Source > Line > [1 to Total number of Lines for current standard]lCursor > Source > Sample > [1 to Total number of Lines for current standard]lCursor > Source > Sub Image > [Sub Image 1, Sub Image 2, Sub Image 3, Sub Image 4] (standard dependent)lNavigate > [calls up navigation keypad]lBase > [hex, decimal, binary]For 6G-SDI and 12G-SDI video standards the option is provided, to view the data stream before sync
bit removal or after sync bit removal.
lSync Bit Removal > [Enabled, Disabled]

Enabling Sync Bit Removal reverts affected bits to the original value they held prior to sync bit
insertion. You can observe this reversion in the TRS and ADF words.
Note: This feature applies only to 6G-SDI and 12G-SDI video standards, where the inclusion of async bit is defined in the SMPTE standards. Signals not containing sync bits are unaffected.
If you hover the cursor over data cell in the grid, the unit displays a tooltip as shown in Figure 11-3.

Figure 11-3: Analyzer - Dataview Instrument Showing Cursor Tooltip

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 11-3

The coordinates displayed in the Dataview tooltip define the sample and line number pair in theformat: (sample number, line number). The tooltip also displays additional information for each cellover which the mouse pointer is held: whether it is the Y-, Cb, Cr- or Alpha-component, etc. Thisdefines the content of the data cell below the cursor.
The highlighted cells (light-gray background) are the samples that contribute to the definition of asingle pixel. You can then pinpoint that specific pixel using the cursor function of the Picture
instrument. Either left-click in the Picture window or specify the coordinates of the pixel in the options
menu of the Picture instrument. Alternatively, you can also specify the Line Number and Sample
Number using the Cusor definition submenu of the Dataview instrument. These cursor functions map(line number, sample number) pairs to the (line number, pixel number) pairs of the active picture.

Figure 11-4: Analyzer - Dataview Instrument - Cursor Submenu

Page 11-4

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAnalyzer - Ancillary Status
Overview
The Analyzer - Ancillary Status instrument provides a sophisticated, real-time display which analyzes
the ancillary data present in the signal. UHDTV has a new set of rules for carrying this data and a clear
graphical representation is required to establish compliance. Color-coded signal conditions - present,
lost, and error are all available. Additional data is displayed as you resize the instrument.
In addition to the option of a combined view, tabs are provided for separate Grid or List views of theancillary data.

Figure 11-5: Analyzer - Ancillary Status

The Grid view provides a high-level overview of the packets present in the ancillary data.
In the List View tab, you can expand the headings, to allow a granular drill-down of discovered
ancillary packets – providing information on presence, checksum, parity, and data block number(DBN). You can select packets in this window for analysis by the Analyzer – Ancillary Inspector.
Color-coding of displayed data provides further health information at a glance:lWhite - Indicates ANC packets present and correctl

Red - Indicates ANC packets present but in errorlYellow - indicates ANC packets present and correct but there has been a previous error.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 11-5

Instrument Menu Options

Figure 11-6: Analyzer - Ancillary Status Menu Options

From the Analyzer - Ancillary Status instrument submenu, accessible in all views, you can reset the
ancillary status analysis, inspect selected packets and set configuration options as follows:
Table 11-1 : Analyzer - Ancillary Status Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Reset

N/A

Select to reset ancillary status analysis (accessible in all
views).

View

Tab View
Combined

The combined view provides both a high-level overview
grid at the top and an expandable list view below, all in asingle window, as shown in the following screen:

FilterNone
Ancillary Packet Type

Change the ancillary packet type being filtered by simply
selecting a different packet type from the Grid.
See the following table for a list of available ancillary data
identifiers.

Inspect

Selected packets in Analyzer.

Note: If a packet type is not selected in the List view, theInspect... option will be unavailable.
Enables you to select packets from the list and theninitiate ancillary inspection, see for a list of ancillary data
IDs.
For more information on ANC inspection, see the section"Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector" on page 11-9.
Select Inspect... to send the inspection request over tothe Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector Instrument. If the

Page 11-6

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options

Description
Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector is not currently open, therequest opens the instrument. The inspection request is
loaded into the Identifier field of the Inspector instrument
and, depending on the trigger setting, reacts as follows:
None - the request is loaded, but not acted upon
Single Shot - the ANC Inspector searches for the packet
type and displays the result once a matching packet isdetected. (The trigger is then set back to None.)
Continuous - the ANC Inspector continuously searches
for the selected packet type and refreshes the displayed
results each time it detects a matching packet type.

Table 11-2 : List of Ancillary Status Grid Identifiers
Ancillary Status Grid Identifier

Description

S353 MPEG Recoding

MPEG-2 Recoding Information

S305 SDTISDTI transport in active frame space

S348 HD SDTI

HD-SDTI Transport in active frame space

S427 Link Encryption

Link encryption for 1.5 Gb/s Serial Digital Interface

S352 Payload ID

Payload identification, HANC space

S4S2016-3 AFD

AFD and Bar data

S2016-4 PAN

Pan-scan data

S2010 ANSI/SCTEANSI/SCTE 104 messages

S2031 DVB/SCTE

DVB/SCTE VBI data

S2056 MPEG TS

MPEG TS packets in VANC

S2068 3D Packing

Stereoscopic 3D frame compatible packing and signaling

S2064 Lip Sync

Lip sync data as specified by ST 2064-1 or ST 2064-2

ITU-RBT.1685

Structure of inter-station control data conveyed by ancillarydata packets

OP47 Caption

OP47/RDD8 Subtitling distribution packet (SDP)

OP47 VBI/WST

OP47/RDD8 Transport of VBI and/or WST data in a VANC Multipacket

ARIB-TR-B29

Metadata to monitor errors of audio and video signals on abroadcasting chain

RDD18 Metadata

Acquisition metadata sets for video camera parameters

RP214 KLV Metadata

KLV encoded metadata transport

RP223 UMID/ID

Packing UMID and Program Identification Label data into
SMPTE 291M Ancillary Data Packets

S2020 Audio

Compressed audio metadata

S2051 Two Frame

Two frame marker in HANC

RDD8 WSS

Wide-screen signaling data

RP215 Film Codes

Film codes in VANC space

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 11-7

Ancillary Status Grid Identifier

Description

S12M-2 V-TCode

Ancillary time code

EIA-708 Caption

S334-1 EIA 708B Data mapping into VANC spaceEIA-608 Caption

S334-1 EIA 608 Data mapping into VANC space

RP207 Program

Program description in VANC space

S334-1 Data

Data broadcast (DTV) in VANC space

RP208 VBI Data

VBI data in VANC space

Mark Deleted

S291 - Packet marked for deletion

S299-2 3G Audio

Audio data in HANC space (3G)

S299-1 HD Audio

Audio data in HANC space (HDTV)

S272 SD Audio

Audio data in HANC space (SDTV)

S315 Camera Pos

Vamera position (HANC or VANC space)

RP165 EDH

Error detection and handling (HANC space)

S12-3 HFR TCodeTime code for high frame rate signals

S2103 Generic Time

Generic time label

S2108-1 HDR/WCG

Extended HDR/WCG

For tooltips on each of the Status Grid Identifiers, hover the mouse cursor over the identifier.

Page 11-8

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAnalyzer - Ancillary Inspector
Overview
The Ancillary (ANC) Inspector monitors the analyzed signal and displays the contents of selected
Ancillary packets in the received data.

Figure 11-7: Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector Instrument (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)

Figure 11-8: Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector Instrument (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

The window displays both the location of the found packet and the time at which it was found.
The lower part of the window displays the packet in hexadecimal form including individual header
words (gray background), data words (black background), and checksum (blue background). Hoverthe mouse over each header word to reveal more detail.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 11-9

Instrument Menu Options

Figure 11-9: Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector Options Menu (SDI Boot Mode)

Figure 11-10: Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector Options Menu (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

The following menu options are available for configuring the Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector
Instrument:
Table 11-3 : Analyzer - Ancillary Inspector Menu Options
Item
Trigger

Page 11-10

Options
None
Single Shot
Continuous

Description
Set Triggers so that when ancillary data exactly matching
the search parameter(s) is detected, the ANC Inspector triggers and displays the inspection result in the lower part of
the window.
After detecting a matching packet, when the Trigger is set
to Single Shot, the inspection result remains in the results
display area and the trigger state reverts to None. If the
Trigger is set to Continuous, it will remain in the current
state after successful detection, and will continuously
cause the display to refresh with the results of the next suc-

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options

Description
cessful detection.

Identifier

None
Ancillary Packet TypeSet the Identifier parameter to the ancillary packet type
you want to find. For a list of ancillary data identifiers, see
the section "Analyzer - Ancillary Status" on page 11-5.

Sub ImageAny
Sub Image 1
Sub Image 2
Sub Image 3
Sub Image 4
Sub Ima… Link B
Sub Ima… Link B
Sub Ima… Link B
Sub Ima… Link B

Additional ANC inspection parameter to use in the data
search.
Note: Available only in SDI boot mode.

Lines

Any
Inside Range
Outside Range

Additional ANC inspection parameter to use in the data
search.

HANC/VANC

Both
HANC
VANC

Additional ANC inspection parameter to use in the data
search.
Note: Available only in SDI boot mode.

Y-Pos/C-Pos

Both
Y-Pos
C-Pos

Additional ANC inspection parameter to use in the data
search.

Trigger only on
ErrorsEnabledDisabled

When enabled, you can select to enable or disable any of
the following:
Checksum Errors
DBN Errors
Parity Errors
ANC Gap Errors
Note: In IP 2110 boot mode, only checksum and parity
errors are detected.

You can set the Identifier parameter in the submenu of the ANC Inspector to search for the ancillary
packet type you want to find.
l

Identifier > Select from the following available Identifiers:
Table 11-4 : List of Available Ancillary Data Identifiers

Any

Custom

S353 MPEG Recoding
VANC SpaceS353 MPEG Recoding
HANC SpaceS305 SDTI

S348 HD-SDTI

S427 Link Encryption
Message 1

S427 Link Encryption
Message 2

S427 Link Encryption
Metadata

S352 Payload ID

S2016-3 AFD

S2016-4 PAN

S2010 ANSI/SCTE

S2031 DVB/SCTE

S2056 MPEG TS

S2068 3D Packing

S2064 Lip Sync

S2108-1 HDR/WCG

ITU-R BT.1685

OP47 Caption

OP47 VBI/WST

ARIB-TR-B29

RDD18 MetadataRP214 KLV Metadata
VANC SpaceRP214 KLV Metadata
HANC SpaceRP223 UMID/ID

S2020No Pair
AssociatedS2020 Audio Channel
Pair 1/2

S2020 Audio Channel
Pair 3/4

S2020 Audio Channel
Pair 5/6

S2020 Audio Channel
Pair 7/8

S2020 Audio Channel
Pair 9/10

S2020 Audio Channel
Pair 11/12

S2020 Audio Channel
Pair 13/14

S2020 Audio Channel
Pair 15/16

S2051 Two Frame

RDD8 WSS

S12M-2 V-TCode

S2103 Generic Time

EIA-708 Caption

EIA-608 Caption

S12-3 HFR TCodeRP207 Program

S334-1 Data

RP208 VBI Data

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 11-11

Mark Deleted

S299-2 3G Audio Control
Group 8

S299-2 3G Audio Control
Group 7

S299-2 3G Audio Control
Group 6

S299-2 3G Audio Control
Group 5

S299-2 3G Audio AudioGroup 8

S299-2 3G Audio AudioGroup 7

S299-2 3G Audio AudioGroup 6

S299-2 3G Audio AudioGroup 5

S299-1 HD Audio Control
Group 4

S299-1 HD Audio Control
Group 3

S299-1 HD Audio Control
Group 2

S299-1 HD Audio Control
Group 1

S299-1 HD Audio AudioGroup 4

S299-1 HD Audio AudioGroup 3

S299-1 HD Audio AudioGroup 2

S299-1 HD Audio AudioGroup 1

S272 SD Audio Control
Group 4

S272 SD Audio Control
Group 3

S272 SD Audio Control
Group 2

S272 SD Audio Control
Group 1

S315 Camera Pos

RP165 EDH

S272 SD Audio Group 4
Ext

S272 SD Audio AudioGroup 4

S272 SD Audio Group 3
Ext

S272 SD Audio AudioGroup 3

S272 SD Audio Group 2
Ext

S272 SD Audio AudioGroup 2

S272 SD Audio Group 1
Ext

S272 SD Audio AudioGroup 1

When setting any parameters in ANC Inspector, AND logic applies; so note that all active searchparameters must be met before ANC Inspector can successfully display the results of that search. If
ancillary packet data in the analyzed SDI data does not meet even one of the search conditions set, it
will not be displayed.
In searching for specific data events it is recommended to keep the search parameters as wide as
possible first to establish that you are actually seeing data for the selected ANC packet. Only whenthe ANC Inspector is displaying streaming data, should you introduce more specific searchparameters.
ANC Inspector can also be used to search more generally for errors with Trigger only on Errors
enabled (and Identifier set to Any). Where an error is present in a packet, individual data word text will
become red in the display indicating the exact position of an error within a packet.

Page 11-12

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

12
IP Network Traffic Measurement
Note: Requires the PHQXO-IP-MEAS License.

This chapter describes the advanced IP network traffic measurement instruments available with the
IP Measurement option and includes the following sections:l

IP Receive - Interpacket TiminglAnalyzer - 2110-21 Status (IP 2110 Boot Mode)lAdvanced Media Timing Measurement (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 12-1

IP Receive - Interpacket Timing
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-NGT (for ST 2022-6 only) and either:PHQXO-IP-STND (Single Timing Window) or
PHQXO-IP-MEAS (Up to Four Timing Windows)

Overview
Each IP Receive - Interpacket Timing window displays the interpacket arrival timings, in eachsecond, for a single flow.
The number of simultaneously available Interpacket Timing windows depends on the selected modeof the unit as follows:ll

IP 2022-6 Boot Mode: Only one Interpacket Timing window is available.
IP 2110 Boot Mode: Up to four Interpacket Timing windows are available to track the number ofsimultaneous IP flows that can be selected. You can switch each window between the available flows by selecting from the dropdown list in the Instrument submenu.

The Instrument provides analysis of the IP media flow packet reception, and gives a real-time
indication as to the health of the received media flow.
The histogram displays the distribution of all packet arrival intervals, for the selected flow, within agiven second, together with the mean, minimum, and maximum packet intervals for this period.
Outlier times, significantly longer than the expected mean, may indicate significant delays in packet
propagation, or may be indicative of a gapped linear video sender. A high occurrence of such longintervals is characteristic of high jitter in a network.
Features of the Interpacket Timing window include:lStream health reporting using a histogram to visualize the distribution of interpacket arrival
times (with dynamic auto-scaling provided)lPacket counts (log or linear scales) mapped against arrival times (µs)

lEasy diagnosis of congestion with maximum, mean and minimum interpacket arrival timeslZoom capability (and linear Y-axis scale) for closer inspection of narrow distribution regions.

l

Mouse controls to center, select range, and reset range as follows:lllPage 12-2

Single left-click to center on the mouse position without zooming. This can be used to
pan left and right through the histogram.
Click and drag to zoom in on the highlighted range.
Single click of the middle mouse button to reset the scale. This reverts the scale to arange where it shows all the data based on the current Min and Max values. You canalso reset the scale using the instrument submenu.

PHABRIX Qx User ManualInterpacket Timing in IP 2022-6 Boot Mode
In IP 2022-6 boot mode, you can select a single video flow. The interpacket timing window displays
the arrival time of packets, sampled over one second, where a packet contains video, audio andancillary data.

Figure 12-1: IP Receive - Interpacket Timing Instrument (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)

Instrument Menu Options (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode )The menu options available in IP 2022-6 boot mode are as follows:
Table 12-1 : IP Receive - Interpacket Timing Menu Options (IP 2022-6 Boot Mode)
Item

Options

Description

Flow

VID: [SFP A]

This is the only flow that can be selected in IP 2022-6
boot mode.

Y-Axis Scale

Log10 (Default)
Linear

Select whether to plot the number of received packets on
the vertical (Y) axis using either a logarithmic or linear
scale.

Scaling

Auto (Default)
ManualSelect how to control the histogram plot scaling. Whenusing the zoom features, the Scaling setting will default to
Manual mode. When Manual scaling is selected, you canreset by clicking the Reset Scale option, which becomes
available.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 12-3

Interpacket Timing in IP 2110 Boot Mode
In IP 2110 boot mode, one video flow, two audio flows, and a single ancillary flow are available forselection.
Note: Monitoring of audio flows AUD 3 and AUD 4 is not supported in the current software
release.
The Interpacket Arrival Time windows can be set to display the interpacket timing histograms of theflows on either SFP A, SFP B or SFP A + B with the two sets of histograms overlaid on top of eachother. The following screen shows the interpacket timing for the flows on SFP B.

Figure 12-2: IP Receive - Interpacket Timing in IP 2110 Boot Mode

When SFP A and B histograms are displayed together, as shown in the following screen, the unit uses
SMPTE ST 2022-7 Seamless IP Protection Switching (SIPS) to reconstruct error free Video, Audio and
ANC from the flows on both SFP A and SFP B.

Page 12-4l

SFP A histograms are colored pinkl

SFP B histograms are colored bluel

SFP A + B overlaid histograms are colored purple where they overlap.

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 12-3: IP Receive - Interpacket Timing Using SMPTE ST 2022-7 SIPS on Both SFP A and B

Note: The control for selecting SFP A, SFP B or SFP A + B(Seamless A + B) is available from thedropdown menu of the parameter 2022-7 Mode Selection in the IP Receive – Flow SelectInstrument submenu.

Figure 12-4: SMPTE ST 2022-7 Mode Selection of Seamless A+Bl

Select Seamless A+B for 2022-7 Mode Selection to make a single flow, reconstructed fromthe flows selected on both SFP interfaces, available for analysislSelect SFP A to make only SFP A flows available for analysislSelect SFP B to make only SFP B flows available for analysis.

For more information, see the section "IP Receive - Flow Select" on page 5-37.

Instrument Menu Options (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
The following shows the options available in the Instrument submenu:

Figure 12-5: IP Receive - Interpacket Timing Menu Options
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 12-5

The menu options available in IP 2110 boot mode are as follows:
Table 12-2 : IP Receive - Interpacket Timing Menu Options (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Item
Flow

Options

Description

VID: [SFP A], AUD 1: [SFP A],
AUD 2: [SFP A], ANC: [SFPA]

Select a flow to display in the active window.
Note: Available flows are dependent on the option selected in 2022-7 Mode Selection of the IP Receive – Flow
Select Instrument.

VID: [SFP B], AUD 1: [SFP B],
AUD 2: [SFP B], ANC: [SFP
B]
VID: [SFP A+B], AUD 1: [SFP
A+B], AUD 2: [SFP A+B],
ANC: [SFP A+B]
Y-Axis Scale

Log10 (Default)
Linear

Select whether to plot the number of received packets on
the vertical (Y) axis using either a logarithmic or linear
scale.

Scaling

Auto (Default)
ManualSelect how to control the histogram plot scaling. Whenusing the zoom features, the Scaling setting will default to
Manual mode. When Manual scaling is selected, you canreset by clicking the Reset Scale option, which becomes
available.

Page 12-6

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAnalyzer - 2110-21 Status(IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND and PHQXO-IP-MEAS

Overview
The 2110-21 Status instrument performs real-time measurements of the parameters constituting theTransmission Traffic Shaping Leaky Bucket Models as defined in SMPTE ST 2110-21:2017. The
standard describes the following two models:lNetwork Compatibility Model (CMax)l

Virtual Receiver Buffer Model (VRXFull)Use these measurements to determine whether a sender or transmitter meets the requirements to be
defined as one of the following types:lNarrow: Type N (gapped)lNarrow Linear: Type NLlWide: Type W

Figure 12-6: Analyzer - 2110-21 Status Instrument

The graph in the 2110-21 Status instrument displays the number of packets in the leaky bucket buffer.
A hardware-based sender will typically be able to establish a carefully controlled read schedule ofpackets with low levels of packet jitter and highly accurate RTP timestamps and would typically,
therefore, be classified as a Narrow Sender. A software-based sender, without any hardware
assistance, would typically struggle to achieve the same level of control as a hardware-based device
and may, consequently, be classified as a Wide Sender.
This is an important parameter for a receiving device, as a device with a small buffer (with low latency)
may only be capable of handling flows from a Narrow Sender, and is defined as a Narrow Receiver. A
receiver that can accept flows from both Narrow and Wide Senders will have a larger buffer (withlarger latency) and is defined as a Wide Receiver. The unit is a Wide Receiver.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 12-7

The compatibility of the unit is as follows:
Table 12-3 : IP ST 2110-21 Status Compatibility
SenderReceiverNarrow (Gapped or Linear)

Wide

Unit Compatible ?

Narrow

Yes

Wide

Yes

Narrow

No

Wide

Yes

Note: The ST 2110-21 specification is a direct measure of the Sender without any intervening
network, which will typically introduce packet jitter. Practical measurements made with a switch
or router in circuit may not be a true measure of the source. You can use this measurement,
however, to establish whether a source, in conjunction with a real network, requires a Narrow orWide Receiver; a consideration which may be useful in low-latency applications.
The thresholds for the maximum values of CFull and VRXFull for Narrow and Wide Senders varies withvideo format and bit depth. A sender must satisfy both criteria, for example:
Table 12-4 : Narrow and Wide Sender Thresholds for Max CFull and VRXFull by Video Format
V

H

T

Color

Bit

CMaxN

CMaxW

VRXFullN

VRXFullW

1280

720

50

4:2:2

10

4

16

8

720

1280

720

60

4:2:2

10

4

16

8

720

1920

1080

25

4:2:2

10

4

16

8

720

1920

1080

50

4:2:2

10

4

16

8

720

1920

1080

60

4:2:2

10

5

16

8

726

1920

1080

50

4:2:2

12

5

16

8

726

1920

1080

60

4:2:2

12

5

16

8

726

Note: Minimum reported values represent the value of the gap in a gapped flow as the2110-21 Status measurements are not windowed.

Measurements and Instrument Menu Options
Measurement Prechecks
Before starting any measurements ensure that the video format parameters entered in the Analyzer 2110 Format Setup Instrument match the video format of the sender.

Network Compatibility Model Measurement (CINST)
The Analyzer - 2110-21 Status submenu for the CInst parameter contains the following options:Page 12-8

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 12-7: Analyzer - 2110-21 Status Menu Options for the CINST Parameter

The CINST measurement represents the instantaneous number of packets in the leaky-bucket buffer
model, averaged over one (1) second.
This measurement is performed with a drain rate (beta) of 1.1, that is, the measurement buffer is being
drained 1.1 times faster than it is being filled. The residue of packets in the buffer model is, therefore,
an indication of the peak rate at which packets were being delivered into the buffer by the sender.
The configurable parameters available for the CINST measurement are as follows:
Table 12-5 : Analyzer - 2110-21 Status - CINST Measurement Options
Item

Options

Description

Interface

SFP A
SFP B

Select the target interface for the Analyzer - 2110-21 instrument. When analyzing 2022-7 flows, you switch between
SFP A and SFP B.

Parameter

CINST
VRX

Select the target measurement for the Analyzer - 2110-21
Status Instrument.

GraphGrid

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, displays a graphical grid pattern in the
instrument background.

System TR Offset

TRO Default (Default)
CustomDefines the timing reference offset (TR Offset) setting.
The TR Offset is either a default value based on the current video standard (TRO Default) or a value defined by
the sender to account for network delay. Select whether
to use the default (TRO Default) as the time at which theread schedule begins on each frame, or select Custom tooverride the default with a manual TR Offset by adjusting
the TR Offset sliders described below to set the granularity in ms, µs and ns. The read schedule must be set tomatch that of a Gapped or Linear source, see the Gapped
Mode option below.

TR Offset Slider Controls

ms, μs, ns

Adjust the slider controls to compensate for the source
Video Timing (TR Offset) to obtain an accurate and consistent measurement of CINST.

TR Offset ms

0 to 9Set the timing reference offset in milliseconds (ms).

TR Offset μs

0 to 999

Set the timing reference offset in microseconds (μs).

TR Offset ns

0 to 999

Set the timing reference offset in nanoseconds (ns).

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 12-9

Item

Options

Description

Gapped Mode

EnabledDisabled

For a Gapped source, ensure that you enable the option
Gapped Mode.

Packet Read Schedule

Gapped (Default)
Linear

Select the appropriate packet read schedule for use with
the SMPTE ST 2110-21 standard; either Gapped or Linear.

Scaling factor x1000 (Use1100)

100 to 2000

Use the Scaling factor control to change the drain ratepresented as 1000 x the drain rate. The default setting is1100 (x 1.1). If you reduce the scaling factor to 1000, thenthe drain rate becomes equal to the write rate (x 1.0) andthe value of CINST represents the size of the buffer.

Reset Measurements

System control

Use this control to reset the measurement to the start.

Note: It is possible to make this measurement if the underlying media is not locked to PTP,
however, the encapsulator of the sender should be locked to PTP for this measurement to bevalid.

Virtual Receiver Buffer Measurement (VRX)
A Video RTP sender is required to ensure that the variation in the interval between packets (theinstantaneous ( or INST) rate) meets the parameters for either a narrow or wide sender. These
packets are written into the leaky-bucket buffer and are then drained at a precise read schedule. The
sender is required to ensure that the maximum size of the leaky-bucket buffer does not exceed thevalue of VRXFull for that format and does not underflow, that is, the minimum value of VRX should not
be negative.
The Analyzer - 2110-21 Status submenu for the VRX parameter contains the following options:Figure 12-8: Analyzer - 2110-21 Status Menu Options for the VRX Parameter

Page 12-10

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

The configurable parameters available for the VRX measurement are as follows:
Table 12-6 : Analyzer - 2110-21 Status - VRX Measurement Options
Item

Options

Description

Interface

SFP A
SFP B

Select the target interface for the Analyzer - 2110-21 instrument. When analyzing 2022-7 flows, you switch between
SFP A and SFP B.

Parameter

CINST
VRX

Select the target measurement for the Analyzer - 2110-21
Status Instrument.

GraphGrid

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, displays a graphical grid pattern in the
instrument background.

System TR Offset

TRO Default (Default)
CustomDefines the timing reference offset (TR Offset) setting.
The TR Offset is either a default value based on the current video standard (TRO Default) or a value defined by
the sender to account for network delay. Select whether
to use the default (TRO Default) as the time at which theread schedule begins on each frame, or select Custom tooverride the default with a manual TR Offset by adjusting
the TR Offset sliders described below to set the granularity in ms, µs and ns. The read schedule must be set tomatch that of a Gapped or Linear source, see the Gapped
Mode option below.

TR Offset Slider Controls

ms, μs, ns

Adjust the slider controls to compensate for the network
delay, any PTP phase offset, and if required the source
Video Timing (TR Offset), to obtain an accurate and consistent measurement.

TR Offset ms

0 to 9Set the timing reference offset in milliseconds (ms).

TR Offset μs

0 to 999

Set the timing reference offset in microseconds (μs).

TR Offset ns

0 to 999

Set the timing reference offset in nanoseconds (ns).

Gapped Mode

EnabledDisabled

For a Gapped source, ensure that you enable the option
Gapped Mode.

Packet Read Schedule

Gapped (Default)
Linear

Select the appropriate packet read schedule for use with
the SMPTE ST 2110-21 standard; either Gapped or Linear.

Read Offset

From Epoch (Default)
Toward Epoch

The Read Offset is the time at which packets are readfrom the leaky bucket. Enables you to set the custom offset relative to the Epoch time, where the Epoch is
00:00:00 UTC on 01 January 1970.

Read Offset Slider Controls

ms, μs, ns

Adjust the slider controls to compensate for the network
delay, any PTP phase offset, and if required the source
Video Timing (TR Offset), to obtain an accurate and consistent measurement of VRX.

Read Offset ms

0 to 100

Set the timing reference offset in milliseconds (ms).

Read Offset μs

0 to 999

Set the timing reference offset in microseconds (μs).

Read Offset ns

0 to 999

Set the timing reference offset in nanoseconds (ns).

Reset Measurements

System control

Use this control to reset the measurement to the start.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 12-11

You can use the Read Offset control for either of the following tasks:l

To perform a SMPTE ST 2110-21 measurementl

To measure the required Read Offset to ensure that the leaky-bucket does not underflow.

To perform the 2110-21 measurement: set the value of the Read Offset to match the value of the
network delay. The 2110-21 Instrument will now report the peak sizes (both positive and negative) of
the leaky-bucket buffer. A negative minimum value indicates that the buffer has underflowed.
To measure the Read Offset: adjust the Read Offset controls so that the VRXMin value is zero andsimultaneously that the VRXMax value is also minimized. The value of the Read Offset with theminimum value for VRXMax and with VRXMin of zero is an indication of the required read offset toensure that there is no underflow. This measurement will be affected by the network latency, PTP
Phase of the sender and the unit, and the Video Timing (TROffset).
The measurement is sensitive to the time difference between the Write and Read schedules and willvary with the source Video Timing (TROffset). If the Source Video Timing is not equal to TRODefault,
then, if required, you can compensate for this by choosing Custom mode and entering the value fromthe Video Timing & System Reference Instrument.
Note: For this measurement to be valid, both the underlying media and the source encapsulator
must be locked to PTP.

Page 12-12

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Advanced Media Timing Measurement(IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND and PHQXO-IP-MEAS

Overview
The Advanced Media Timing measurement functions are provided with the license PHQXO-IPMEAS.
These advanced functions give you access to additional measurements from the standard Video
Timing & System Reference instrument , which provide critical information on the performance of yourmedia network.
The advanced Video Timing & System Reference instrument is extended in width, by default, todisplay the actual flow data to complement the visual information in the flow timing meters.
Note: The unit must be locked to PTP for the advanced media timing measurements to be valid.

Note: The unit has a PTP phase control that you can use to align the one pulse per second (1 PPS)of the unit with that of the PTP Grandmaster. The use of this control reduces any PTP-related
timing measurement uncertainty caused by PTP network asymmetry, however, there may still be
a PTP phase uncertainty introduced by the sending device. For more information, see the section"SFP A/B - PTP Info (IP 2110 Boot Mode)" on page 5-26.
When your system includes the PHQXO-IP-MEAS license, the Video Timing & System Reference
window includes the following three tabs, providing access to different timing data:lVideo TiminglMedia LatencylExternal Reference vs PTP

Figure 12-9: Components of the Video Timing & System Reference Instrument (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 12-13

Using the Advanced Video Timing Tab
The Advanced Video Timing tab provides listings of the actual historical minimum, mean andmaximum values in the Min, Mean and Max columns to the right of the timing meters.
The advanced Video Timing tab displays the following measurements:lVideo Timing ( μs )lMargin ( μs )l

RTP Offset ( μs )Detailed information about the Video Timing tab and these measurements is provided in the
Appendix "Advanced Media Timing Measurements" on page B-2.

Using the Advanced Media Latency Tab
The advanced Media Latency tab provides additional media latency measurements to those in thestandard instrument.

Figure 12-10: Media Latency Tab of the Video Timing & System Reference Instrument (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

The displays the media latency data in the following columns for each flow:l

Min: Minimum historical flow latency (since last reset)l

Mean: Mean current flow latency (since last reset)lMax: Maximum historical flow latency (since last reset)

l

l

l

l

From Vid: Displays the difference in latency for the audio (A AUD 1 and A AUD 2) and ancillary(A ANC) flows from their related video (A VID) flow. If the flow arrives earlier than its related
video flow, the value is negative and if it arrives later, the value is positive.
RTP clks: Actual value of the RTP Clock, averaged over one second. For more information, see
the section "Advanced Media Timing Measurement (IP 2110 Boot Mode)" on the previous page
TSs: Number of timestamps received over one second. For more information, see the section"Advanced Media Timing Measurement (IP 2110 Boot Mode)" on the previous page
RTP clks/TS: Quotient of RTP clks and TS provides a measure of the number of RTP Clocks pertimestamp. For more information, see the section "RTP Clocks per Timestamp Quotient (RTP /TS)" on page B-10.

Note: Monitoring of audio flows AUD 3 and AUD 4 is not supported in the current software
release.
To see more detail about the media latency, you can zoom in on a specific area of interest by clicking
anywhere on a timing meter of interest, which changes the scale to match the values of the specificflow. For example, when zooming into a video flow, the scale changes from milliseconds (ms) toPage 12-14

PHABRIX Qx User Manualmicroseconds (µs). Click the meter again to zoom out and return to the overview. You can also switch
between overview and zoom for individual flow meters by selecting the specific meter from the
instrument submenu, as described in the Instrument options table.

Figure 12-11: Media Latency Tab of the Video Timing & System Reference Instrument (IP 2110 Boot Mode)

Detailed information about the Media Latency measurement is provided in the Appendix "Advanced
Media Timing Measurements" on page B-2.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 12-15

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the options available in both the standard and advanced Video Timing &System Reference Instrument submenu:
Table 12-7 : Video Timing & System Reference - Menu Options
Item
System Reference

Options
PTP
External Reference

Description
System reference locking controls define the reference
to which the unit and any signal it generates is locked. In
IP 2110 boot mode, make sure that the system referenceis stably locked to the same PTP source as the sending
device.
System reference lock status information is displayed in
the upper-right corner of the instrument, and any error in
the health state of the reference is displayed in red.

Reference Timing Meter
Range+/− 0.1 line, +/− 0.5 line, +/−0.5 frame

Adjusts the displayed range of the reference timing meterin the upper section of the Instrument to display readings
at frame scale, or to zoom in to a fraction of a line.

System TR Offset

TRO Default
CustomDefines the timing reference offset (TR Offset) setting.
The TR Offset is either a default value based on the current video standard (TRO Default) or a value defined by
the sender to account for network delay. When you selectTR Offset, you can set the TR Offset by adjusting the
TR Offset sliders described below to set the granularity in
ms, µs and ns.

TR Offset ms

0 to 9Set the timing reference offset in milliseconds (ms).

TR Offset μs

0 to 999

Set the timing reference offset in microseconds (μs).

TR Offset ns

0 to 999

Set the timing reference offset in nanoseconds (ns).

Wrap Video Timing

Enabled /Disabled (Default)

When enabled, displays video timing values exceeding
half a TV frame period as a negative time value relative tothe next TV frame, rather than as a positive value. For
example, for a frame of 20 ms, if the frame end is measured at 30 ms, the unit will display this as − 10 ms insteadof 30 ms.

Wrap Margin

Enabled /Disabled (Default)

When enabled, displays margin timing values exceeding
half a TV frame period as a negative time value relative tothe next TV frame, rather than as a positive value.

Wrap RTP Offset

Enabled /Disabled (Default)

When enabled displays RTP Offset timing values exceeding half a TV frame period as a negative time value relative to the next TV frame, rather than as a positive value.

Latency Meters Zoom

Overview, A VID, A AUD 1, A Select a specific timing meter to switch between overAUD 2, A ANC, B VID, B
view and zoomed-in view.
AUD 1, B AUD 2, B ANC

Anchor time scale start in
Overview mode

Zero (0) or less, Any value

Set the start point of the timescale when in Overview.

Clear Min, Max values

N/A

Set the historical minimum and maximum values back to
zero.

Page 12-16

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

13
12G Physical Layer Analysis
Note: Requires the PHQXM--01E Mezzanine hardware option.

This chapter describes the Instruments available with the 12G-SDI Physical Layer Analysis Toolset
option and includes the following sections:l

Eye - SDI In Al

Jitter - SDI In A

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 13-1

Eye - SDI In A
(Physical Layer Analysis Mode)
Requires Option(s):PHQX01E-3G

Overview
The optional instrument Eye - SDI in A, available in the Physical Layer Analysis toolset, enables you
to analyze physical layer compliance measurements at up to 12 Gbps. An analog front-end provides a
bandwidth of more than 30 GHz (5th harmonic of the 6 GHz fundamental for 12G-SDI.) The GUI uses
PHABRIX RealTime Eye (RTE™) to generate a reliable, AC coupled, instantaneous physical layer
display with automatic measurements to SMPTE standards.
You can receive accurate measurements within seconds of connecting an SDI signal. The unit
enables you to measure both rise and fall overshoot at the top and bottom of the waveform. In
addition, the unit displays amplitude, rise and fall overshoot delta and DC offset - all compulsory
measurements when testing against SMPTE standards. The unit highlights any measurements
exceeding the specification (for example, an eye amplitude greater than 10 %) in red.

Figure 13-1: Standard SDI Eye Pattern Display (3G) with 100 kHz Jitter Filter (SDI Boot Mode)

Page 13-2

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 13-2: 3G-SDI Eye Pattern Set to Display 12 Eyes (Using Green Display Color) (SDI Boot Mode)

Note: A black (or red) nut fitted to the SDI In A BNC identifies the connector with access to theeye and jitter circuitry.

Note: The use of SDI SFP inputs with Eye - SDI In A is not supported.
The Eye - SDI In A instrument display also provides:lTiming jitter thermometer color-coded according to the analyzed SDI standardl

Alignment jitter thermometer color-coded according to the analyzed SDI standardlPositive and negative Eye amplitude valuesl

On screen indication of 20 % and 80 % levels for rise and fall time measurementlHorizontal time histogram of eye crossing point (0 mV threshold)lVertical amplitude histogram indicating energy distribution across all samplesl

Eye coupled to AC with display of DC offset measurement.

Instrument Menu Options
The Physical Layer Analysis toolset provides the following options in the right-click submenu.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 13-3

Figure 13-3: Eye - SDI In A Menu Options
Table 13-1 : Menu Options for the Eye - SDI In A Instrument (SDI Boot Mode)
Item

Options

Description

Standard Physical Layer Analysis Tools
Eyes

1 to 20(Default = 2)

Sets the default number of eyes displayed in the Instrument window.

Color

Green
Heat
Red
FerraraGreen-red
Blacklight

Sets the color scheme for the eye display.

Eye and Jitter Filter

10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz

Sets the frequency of the default jitter filter.
Note: This setting controls the filter applied both to theEye - SDI In A instrument and
the Jitter - SDI A instrument.

Infinite Mode

Disabled (Default)
EnabledWhen disabled, eye data points are displayed for a fixed
persistence interval and then removed from the display.
When enabled, infinite mode ensures that no data points
are removed from the eye display over time, so you willprobably observe the eye shape thickening and becoming less distinct. This can be useful when attempting to
identify anomalies in the signal which appear sporadicallyover time and might be missed in the standard mode.

Show Rise/Fall Cross

Disabled (Default)
EnabledToggle the display of the rise/fall crossing point, which
gives a visual indication of the rise and fall time measurements.

Show eye for unsupported
rates

Disabled (Default)
EnabledToggle the display of eyes for rates currently unsupported by the unit. Note: This setting is transient, enabling
support of officially unsupported rates. The setting reverts
to default following a reboot.

A table showing the SMPTE tolerances for each standard is provided in the section "SMPTE UHDTV:SDI Physical Layer Tolerances" on page C-1.)

Page 13-4

PHABRIX Qx User ManualJitter - SDI In A
(Physical Layer Analysis Mode)
Requires Option(s):PHQX01E-3G

Overview
The Jitter toolset is available on the SDI In A BNC - the rear panel connector fitted with the black (orred) nut.

Figure 13-4: Jitter SDI In A Instrument (SDI Boot Mode)

The Jitter SDI in A instrument displays automated measurements to SMPTE standards. A Jitter
histogram, displayed at the right of the window in yellow, provides additional information about thejitter waveform.
Readings for each of the filters are displayed as an overlay in the top-right corner of the instrument
window. Any values displayed in red text indicate a reading outside the current specification.
A signal lock status indicator (Locked / Unlocked) in the bottom-left corner of the window indicatesthe quality of the Eye pattern as follows:l

Unlocked (grayed-out): No signal availablel

Unlocked (red font): Eye pattern is unlocked or jitterylLocked (white font): Eye pattern is locked, stable and not jittery.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 13-5

The Jitter and Eye analysis instruments, used in conjunction with the Jitter Insertion Mode feature ofGenerator – Video Standard - available in SDI boot mode together with the optional Stress Toolkit[option: PHQXO-SDI-STRESS], provide an end-to-end toolset for jitter generation and analysis.
Note: The use of SDI SFP inputs with the Jitter - SDI In A toolset is not supported.

Instrument Menu Options

Figure 13-5: Jitter - SDI In A Instrument Menu Options

The following table lists the configurable parameters in the Jitter instrument options menu:
Table 13-2 : Jitter - SDI In A Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

Scale

1 UI (Default) to 128 UI

Adjust the scale of the Y-axis in graticule adjustmentsfrom 1 UI to 128 UI

Trigger

None (Default)
Single Line
Two Lines
Single Field
Frame

Select a trigger for jitter measurement.
Trigger modes are useful to correlate jitter content to line
and frame-rate frequencies.

Eye and Jitter Filter

10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz (Default)This setting controls the high-pass filter applied to both
the Jitter - SDI In A instrument and the Eye - SDI In A instrument. If you hover over the HPF field in the top-left of thescreen, a tooltip displays the frequency response of thecurrent high-pass filter.

Infinite Mode

EnabledDisabled (Default)

When disabled, jitter data points are displayed for a fixed
persistence interval and then removed from the display.
When enabled, infinite mode ensures that no data points
are removed from the display over time.

Jitter Color

White (Default)
Select from the color map.

Color selection is by way of an HSV tool providing two
cursors. The left-hand color rectangle allows you to selectthe hue (horizontal) and saturation (vertical). The righthand vertical bar selects color lightness.

Show Jitter for
Unsupported Rates

EnabledDisabled (Default)

Toggle the display of jitter for rates currently unsupportedby the unit. Note: This setting is transient, enabling support of officially unsupported rates. The setting reverts todefault following a reboot.

Page 13-6

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

14
Stress-testing Analysis Instruments
Note: Requires the PHQXO-SDI-STRESS License.

The Stress-testing analysis Instruments provide additional SDI stress-testing functions andcomplement the Physical Layer Analysis Instruments described in the previous chapter.
This chapter describes the advanced stress testing Instruments available with the SDI-Stress Toolset
option and includes the following sections:lAdvanced Generation Toolsl

Eye - SDI In Al

PRBS Analysis

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 14-1

Advanced Generation Tools(SDI Boot Mode - Stress Option)
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-GEN, PHQX01E-3Gand PHQXO-SDI-STRESS

Overview
As part of the Advanced SDI Stress Toolset [PHQXO-SDI-STRESS], advanced generation tools areprovided in the Generate - Video instrument submenu, in SDI boot mode. The toolset provides thefollowing:lControl over SDI scrambler switch-offlSync bit insertionl

A PRBS (pseudo-random binary sequence) mode for end-to-end bit error rate testing (BERT)l

SDI BER ModelAdvanced jitter generation controls – facilitating the generation and bespoke adjustment of jitter measurement parameterslSlew rate adjustmentl

SDI output gain controllDriver pre-emphasislCable compensation.

These tools support a wide range of advanced testing and troubleshooting.

Figure 14-1: Advanced Generation Tools Option Menu (SDI Boot Mode)
Page 14-2

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Advanced Generation Tools Options
The optional Advanced Generation Tools provide the following:
Table 14-1 : Advanced Generator Tools - Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

SDI Scrambler Options
SDI Scrambler

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

The selected video standard datastream can be made to bypass
the SMPTE scrambler, just before the output stage. To bypass thescrambler, select Disabled.
Note: . For the generation of conventional video, the default state
for the SDI Scrambler is Enabled.

Sync Bit Insertion (6G / 12G) Options
Sync Bit Insertion

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

Sync bit insertion prevents the occurrence of a pathologicalcondition that results in the removal of sync bits, also referred toas potholing. Before the output, a sync bit is applied to the Timing
Reference Signal (TRS) and Ancillary Data Flag (ADF) words of thegenerated video standard. To prevent sync bit insertion,
deactivate this feature by selecting Disabled.
You can observe the insertion of the sync bit in the video signal
TRS and ADF words seen in the Analyzer - Dataview instrument
when the option Sync Bit Removal is disabled.
Note: This feature applies only to 6G- and 12G-SDI video
standards.

PRBS Mode Options
PRBS Mode

Disabled (Default)
PRBS-7
PRBS-9PRBS-15
PRBS-23
PRBS-31

In addition to SDI test signal generation, for the stress testing of
SDI infrastructure the unit offers end-to-end BERT capability, withthe addition of pseudorandom bit sequence (PRBS) generation
and analysis tools.
When enabled, you can generate a variety of PRBS signals ofdifferent .bit lengths.
PRBS signal analysis is available in the instrument PRBS –Analysis.
Note: The Generator – Status instrument indicates when a PRBS
signal is being generated.

PRBS Signal Inver- Enabled
Disabled (Default)sion

When enabled, inverts the PRBS signal.

PRBS Insert
Single Error

System Control

When selected, inserts a single PRBS error at that point in thegenerated standard signal.

PRBS Constant
Error Rate

System Control
Slider at 0.0/Day (Default)

Set constant error rate between 10.0/day (minimum) and 9.2/sec(maximum). The rate can be defined as a number of errors
introduced per day, hour, minute or second.

SDI BER Mode Options
SDI BER Mode

Disabled (Default)
Single Shot

The SDI BER Mode function enables you to insert an SDI error totest CRC and CS errors. A bit error is inserted at the appointed

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 14-3

Item

Options

Description

Constant BER

time and can affect any word in the current frame (or field) of the
SDI flow. Consequently, ANC words, video words and audio
words can all potentially be affected.
Select either mode Single Shot or Constant BER to activate
SDI BER Mode and display additional parameters.

SDI BER
Output A

Disabled (Default)
Enabled

Select SDI Out A as the target channel for insertion of the single
bit error or constant BER.

SDI BER
Output B

Disabled (Default)
Enabled

Select SDI Out B as the target channel for insertion of the single
bit error or constant BER.

SDI BER
Output C

Disabled (Default)
Enabled

Select SDI Out C as the target channel for insertion of the single
bit error or constant BER.

SDI BER
Output D

Disabled (Default)
Enabled

Select SDI Out D as the target channel for insertion of the single
bit error or constant BER.

SDI Single Bit
Error

System Control

When selected, inserts a single bit error at that point in the generated standard signal.

SDI BER Interval

System Control
Slider at 4295.0ms (Default)

Use the slider to set the time interval at which the bit errors areinserted. The unit will insert bit errors as long as the SDI BER
Mode is set to Constant BER.
Range: 10 ns to 10,000 ms

Jitter Insertion Mode Options
Jitter Insertion
Mode

Disabled (Default)
Sine

In order to stress the interface and ensure that receivers comply
with SMPTE recommended practice you can insert jitter into any
generated SDI signal. You can insert sinusoidal jitter with a frequency ranging from 10 Hz to 10 MHz and adjust the peak-to-peakjitter amplitude.

Frequency

System Control
Slider at 300.0Hz (Default)

When active, adjust the frequency of the sinusoidal jitter between
1.0 Hz and 10.0 MHz.
Note: For precise setting adjustment and frequencies below 10
Hz use the up / down arrow buttons or input values using a USB
keyboard.

Amplitude P-P

System Control
Slider at 1.00UI (Default)

Jitter amplitude is measured in terms of signal Eye Unit Interval(UI).
When active, adjust peak-to-peak jitter amplitude between 0.01 to
127.99 UI, depending on the jitter frequency.
Caution: SDI outputs B, C and D may be corrupted when jitter isinserted.

Slew Rate Options
Slew Rate

Page 14-4

Default (Default)
Slow
Fast

Adjust the slew rate of the generated signal from its default
setting.
l Fast is the standard slew rate for 12G signals.
l Slow (10% slower than Fast) is the standard slew rate forHD, 3G, and 6G signals.
l Default automatically provides the standard slew rate forany signal being generated.
If required, you can select a slower slew rate for 12G signals or afaster slew rate for HD, 3G, and 6G signals.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Item

Options

Description

Driver Output Control Options
Driver A Gain

100% (Default)(Adjustable between
85 and 115%)

You can increase or decrease the signal gain of SDI Out A by up
to 15 % in increments of 1 %.
Note: Units upgraded from software release 2.3 or earlier will firstrequire Driver A calibration. For instructions on driver calibration,
see the section "Driver Calibration" on page 16-6.

Driver A PreEmphasis

Disabled (Default)
0.5 dB
1.0 dB
1.5 dBYou can adjust driver pre-emphasis for SDI Out A to boost thesignal at the beginning of the rising edge of the eye pattern to
optimize signal integrity.
For more information on the Eye pattern display, see the section"Eye - SDI In A (SDI Boot Mode - Stress Option)" on the next page.

Time-ConstantDefault (Default)
Div 2
Div 4
Div 8

With Driver Pre-Emphasis enabled, the pre-emphasis time constant can be left as default, or divided by 2, 4, or 8 to adjust thelength of time the signal is boosted:

Cable Compensation Options
Cable Compensation

Disabled
Enabled (Default)

By default the unit compensates for the attenuation across a one
meter length of SDI cable to ensure that the Eye amplitude at theend of the 1 m cable meets the SMPTE standard of 800 mV.
If required, you can use the Cable Compensation option todisable the default attenuation compensation.

Figure 14-2: Advanced Generation Tools - SDI BER Mode Options

Note: Jitter can be observed in the Eye – SDI In A and Jitter – SDI In A instrument windows. For
analysis, apply filters and other settings in the Eye and Jitter instruments as required. For more
information on Eye and Jitter analysis, see the sections:"Eye - SDI In A (Physical Layer Analysis Mode)" on page 13-2 and "Jitter - SDI In A (Physical Layer
Analysis Mode)" on page 13-5.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 14-5

Eye - SDI In A
(SDI Boot Mode - Stress Option)
Requires Option(s):PHQX01E-3G, PHQXO-GEN and PHQXO-SDI-STRESS

Overview
The optional instrument Eye - SDI in A, available in the Stress Testing Analysis toolset, provides
additional tools for stress testing and R&D evaluations of your SDI interfaces at up to 12 Gbps. An
analog front-end supplies a bandwidth of more than 30 GHz (5th harmonic of the 6 GHz fundamental
for 12G-SDI.) The GUI uses PHABRIX RealTime Eye (RTE™) to generate a reliable, AC-coupled,instantaneous physical layer display with automatic measurements to SMPTE standards.
You can receive accurate measurements within seconds of connecting an SDI signal. The unit
enables you to measure both rise and fall overshoot at the top and bottom of the waveform. In
addition, the unit displays amplitude, rise and fall overshoot delta and DC offset - all compulsory
measurements when testing against SMPTE standards. The unit highlights any measurements
exceeding the specification (for example, an eye amplitude greater than 10 %) in red.

Figure 14-3: 12G-SDI Eye Pattern Display with 100 kHz Jitter Filter (SDI Boot Mode)Use the eye amplitude histogram, showing the distribution of samples over the complete visible eye
waveform, to calculate the automatic eye amplitude measurement. The default analysis method is
Mode.
Note: A black (or red) nut fitted to the SDI In A BNC identifies the connector with access to theeye and jitter circuitry.
Page 14-6

PHABRIX Qx User ManualNote: The use of SDI SFP inputs with Eye - SDI In A is not supported.
The Eye - SDI In A instrument display also provides:lTiming jitter thermometer color-coded according to the analyzed SDI standardl

Alignment jitter thermometer color-coded according to the analyzed SDI standardlPositive and negative Eye amplitude valuesl

On screen indication of 20 % and 80 % levels for rise and fall time measurementlHorizontal time histogram of eye crossing point (0 mV threshold)lVertical amplitude histogram indicating energy distribution across all samplesl

Eye coupled to AC with display of DC offset measurementl

A pair of vertical Eye time cursors to generate and display time measurements across the Eyedisplay.

Using the Eye Time Cursors
When enabled, the Eye time cursors are displayed as a pair of vertical dashed lines, when static.
You can choose to position the Eye time cursors independently or link the cursors together so thatthey move as a single unit with a fixed time separation. In addition, cursor readings below the trace
display the time measurements in picoseconds (ps) from the start of the trace, and show the delta
between the two cursors.

Figure 14-4: Advanced SDI Stress Option: Eye Time Cursors (SDI Boot Mode)

You can use the mouse connected to the unit to click then drag a cursor or both cursors to a newposition. When in motion, the dashed line of the cursor changes to a solid white line for improved
visibility. You will see the time measurements below the Eye change in real-time as you adjust the
cursor(s).
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 14-7

However, if using remotely, use the Cursor One and Cursor Two / Cursor Delta fields in theInstrument submenu to adjust the time cursor positions.

Instrument Menu Options
The Stress Testing toolset provides the following options in the right-click submenu.

Figure 14-5: Eye - SDI In A Menu Showing Advanced Stress Testing Options

Figure 14-6: Advanced SDI Stress Option: Amplitude Window (SDI Boot Mode)

Page 14-8

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

The following table lists the configurable parameters for the Eye - SDI In A Instrument in SDI bootmode, with the SDI Stress option (PHQXO-SDI-STRESS).
Table 14-2 : Menu Options for the Eye - SDI In A Instrument (SDI Boot Mode)
Item

Options

Description

Standard Physical Layer Analysis Tools
Eyes

1 to 20(Default = 2)

Sets the default number of eyes displayed in the Instrument window.

Color

Green
Heat
Red
FerraraGreen-red
Blacklight

Sets the color scheme for the eye display.

Eye and Jitter Filter

10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz

Sets the frequency of the default jitter filter.
Note: This setting controls the filter applied both to theEye - SDI In A instrument and
the Jitter - SDI A instrument.

Infinite Mode

Disabled (Default)
EnabledWhen disabled, eye data points are displayed for a fixed
persistence interval and then removed from the display.
When enabled, infinite mode ensures that no data points
are removed from the eye display over time, so you willprobably observe the eye shape thickening and becoming less distinct. This can be useful when attempting to
identify anomalies in the signal which appear sporadicallyover time and might be missed in the standard mode.

Show Rise / Fall Cross

Disabled (Default)
EnabledToggle the display of the rise/fall crossing point, which
gives a visual indication of the rise and fall time measurements.

Show eye for unsupported
rates

Disabled (Default)
EnabledToggle the display of eyes for rates currently unsupported by the unit. Note: This setting is transient, enabling
support of officially unsupported rates. The setting reverts
to default following a reboot.

Stress Option: Amplitude Window
Amplitude Window

The Amplitude Window, available in the Advanced SDI Stress Testing toolset, is an additional tool for more detailed analysis and measurement of the eye amplitude.

Amplitude Window offset−49 to 50%
0% Default

Only active when the amplitude window size is set to any
value between 0 and 99%. Use the offset to move the
Amplitude window to an optimum position on the eye foryour measurement. A negative offset moves the window
to the left and a positive offset, to the right.

Amplitude Window size

1 to 100%
100% (Default)

The amplitude window is defined by the enclosed area
containing the eye data points used for eye amplitude
measurements. All samples in the window area are usedin the amplitude histogram measurement.
You can use this option to define a window to focus on a
specific part of the eye on which to take the amplitude
measurements. When the size is set to the default 100%,

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 14-9

Item

Options

Description
the amplitude window is the entire active window of theInstrument.
The size percentage relates to the percentage width of asingle eye, so when set to 50% the Amplitude window
covers 50% of an eye width and so on.

Stress Option: Analysis Method
Analysis Method

Mode (Default)
Shorth Mean

Switches the statistical analysis method used for the eyeamplitude data. Select between either standard Modeanalysis or Shorth Mean analysis.

Stress Option: Eye Time Cursors
Time Cursors

Independent
LinkedDisabled (Default)

When selected, the Independent option allows you tomove the two cursors independently of each other.
When selected, the Linked option allows you to move
both cursors together, separated by a fixed time delta.
You can increase or decrease the separation by adjusting
the Cursor Delta setting (see below).

Cursor One

Slider and incremental
combo box

Use the slider or combo box to move the left-hand cursor(when set to Independent) or both cursors (when set to
Linked) across the Eye display. Increase the time (in ps) tomove to the right or decrease to move to the left. Whenset to Independent, you will see the delta measurement
between the two cursors increase or decrease.
The left hand y-axis is equivalent to 0 ps.

Cursor Two (Independent
Cursors)

Slider and incremental
combo box

Use the slider or combo box to move the right-handcursor across the Eye display. Increase the time (in ps) tomove to the right or decrease to move to the left. You will
see the delta measurement between the two cursors
increase or decrease.
The left hand y-axis is equivalent to 0 ps.

Cursor Delta (Linked Cursors)

Slider and incremental
combo box

Use the slider or combo box to adjust the separation
between linked cursors across the Eye display. Increase
the time (in ps) to increase the separation or decrease to
reduce the separation. You will see that the deltameasurement between the two cursors remains constantas you position the two cursors as a single unit.
The left hand y-axis is equivalent to 0 ps.

A table showing the SMPTE tolerances for each standard is provided in the section "SMPTE UHDTV:SDI Physical Layer Tolerances" on page C-1.)

Page 14-10

PHABRIX Qx User ManualPRBS Analysis(SDI Boot Mode - Stress Option)
Requires Option(s):PHQX01E-3G, PHQXO-GEN and PHQXO-SDI-STRESS

Overview
The PRBS - Analysis instrument displays the signal details, PRBS detection status, total amount ofreceived pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) data, total number of errors, bit error rate (BER) per
second, and OK time (since last error), for each SDI input link (BNC or SFP) on the unit.

Figure 14-7: PRBS - Analysis

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters in the PRBS - Analysis instrument options menu:
Table 14-3 : PRBS - Analysis Menu Options
Item

Options

Description

PRBS auto scan
mode

EnabledDisabled (Default)

For SDI BNC inputs only, automatic PRBS analysis isavailable. By enabling auto scan mode, the unit willautomatically cycle once through all available PRBS
Analysis modes and select the correct mode for theincoming signal type.
Once auto scan is complete, the function is automaticallydisabled.

PRBS Analysis Mode

Disabled (Default)
PRBS-7
PRBS-9PRBS-15
PRBS-23
PRBS-31

For BNC and SDI SFP inputs, you can manually enable
PRBS analysis. When enabled, you can select the incoming PRBS signal type, if known.

PRBS Data Rate /DivisorNone (Default)
Rate: 1G5 Divisor: 1000

For PRBS analysis on SDI SFP inputs this parameter
enables you to ensure the accuracy of the PRBS analysis

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 14-11

Item

Options

Description

Rate: 1G5 Divisor: 1001
Rate: 3G Divisor: 1000
Rate: 3G Divisor: 1001
Rate: 6G Divisor: 1000
Rate: 6G Divisor: 1001
Rate: 12G Divisor: 1000
Rate: 12G Divisor: 1001

by selecting the appropriate signal data rate and divisor.

PRBS Signal
Inversion

EnabledDisabled (Default)

When enabled, inverts the incoming PRBS signal.

Reset

N/A
Active Control

Resets the counts in the PRBS analysis table.

Note: To select a PRBS signal generation mode, launch the Generator - Configuration
instrument and open the Options menu from the Generate - Video tab. Select the option
Advanced Generation Tools, then select the desired PRBS Mode from the dropdown list.
The optional Advanced Generation Tools are available in SDI boot mode with the SDI Stressoption (PHQXO-SDI-STRESS).

Page 14-12

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

15
HDR Analysis Instruments
Note: This option requires the Advanced High Dynamic Range (HDR) License: PHQXO-HDR .

This chapter describes the Instruments available with the High Dynamic Range (HDR) Toolset option
and includes the following sections:lAdvanced HDR ToolsetlAnalyzer - CIE Chartl

HDR Heat-map (False Color Overlay Tools)

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 15-1

Advanced HDR Toolset
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-HDR

Overview
The comprehensive advanced HDR toolset includes a signal generator for HDR test patterns, CIE
chart Analyzer, Luma false color highlighting (or heat map), a waveform monitor and vectorscope. The
HDR toolset supports all the main live production formats for both SDR and HDR.
For Standard Dynamic Range (SDR), the toolset supports:lBT.709lBT.2020For High Dynamic Range (HDR), the toolset supports:lBT.2100 HLG

l

PQ

l

Sony S-Log3lSony SR Live

The Waveform provides a Cd/m2 (Nits) graticule along with BT.2048 diffuse white markers. The
flexible user-controlled HDR heatmap highlights signals beyond SDR with seven simultaneous
programmable color overlay bands with presets for HDR and SDR ranges, plus a user-definable
preset. The CIE 1931 x,y display provides overlays for BT.709, BT.2020 and ST.2086 gamut (P3) toenhance the visualization and analysis of your HDR/WCG content.
An extensive set of test patterns include BT.2111 HDR color bars for HLG, PQ and SR Live as well as afull set of SDR 709 patterns mapped using display light to each of the four HDR formats for line
checks, comparative monitor set-up and evaluation of HDR to SDR converters.

HDR Test Patterns
In addition to the standard SDR test patterns which are converted to HDR, the Advanced HDR toolset
provides an additional two native HDR test patterns. These test patterns are available when you
select one of the following HDR WCG (Wide Color Gamut) options from the Gamut dropdown list of
the Generate - Video Instrument:l

HDR HLG 2020l

HDR PQ 2020l

HDR S-Log3 2020l

HDR SR LiveThe list of available test patterns for a selected video standard is displayed at the bottom or in theright hand column of the Generate - Video Instrument. The native HDR test patterns are as follows:

ITU-R BT.2111-0 HDR Color BarsITU-R BT.814-4 PLUGE – 4 variants

Figure 15-1: Available HDR Test Patterns

In addition, all other test patterns are converted to HDR in HDR mode, see the section "Test Patterns"
on page 6-4 for a detailed list.
Page 15-2

PHABRIX Qx User ManualBoth S-Log3 and SR Live [S-Log3(HDR Live)] test pattern variants are available.

Figure 15-2: Selecting HDR Gamut from the Generator Dropdown List

Transfer Curve and Colorimetry Overrides
HDR content may still contain the SMPTE payload ID for SDR and Rec.709 color space (as standard).
When analyzing HDR and WCG content, therefore, you can choose to enable overrides in thesubmenu of the Analyzer - Video Standard Instrument for the appropriate HDR transfer curve andcolor space as follows:lEnable Transfer Curve Override > [Enabled, Disabled]lTransfer Curve Override > [SDR-TV, HLG, PQ, S-Log3]lEnable Colorimetry Override > [Enabled, Disabled]lColorimetry Override > [Rec.709, Rec.2020]

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 15-3

Analyzer - CIE Chart
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-HDR

Overview
The CIE 1931 x y chart provides a display of signal chromaticity - complete with Rec. 709, Rec. 2020,
ST 2086 gamut overlays and the Illuminant D65 white point reference.

Figure 15-3: Analyzer - CIE Chart Instrument

Note: When analyzing a YCbCr 422 source, with software release 4.8 and above, the CIE chart
displays co-sited pixels with improved precision.

Instrument Menu Options
The following table lists the configurable parameters in the Analyzer - CIE Chart instrument submenu:

Figure 15-4: Analyzer - CIE Chart Options Menu
Page 15-4

PHABRIX Qx User ManualTable 15-1 : Analyzer - CIE Chart Options
Item

Options

Description

Rec.709 Triangle

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, displays the triangle for the Rec. 709 color
primaries.

Rec.2020 Triangle

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, displays the triangle for the Rec. 2020
color primaries.

ST 2086 Triangle

P3 (Default)
Disabled

This triangle shows the location of the SMPTE ST 2086
Mastering Display Primaries. Default is P3.

D65 White Point

Enabled (Default)
Disabled

When enabled, displays a marker for the D65 white pointin the CIE Chart.

Single Line Mode

EnabledDisabled (Default)

Enable single line mode analysis of the source.

Line Number

System Control
1 to Total number of activelines in the selected
standard.

Total no. of Active Lines for current standard

Zoom

Slider control;
1.00 (Default) to 4.00

Zoom in/out of the chart for detailed inspection.
You can also zoom in/out of the chart by hovering themouse crosshairs over the chart and scrolling the mousewheel up or down.

x Position

Slider control;

Pan the zoomed image along the x-axis of the chart.
You can also pan across the x-axis by hovering the mousecrosshairs over the x-axis and scrolling the mouse wheel
up or down.

y Position

Slider control;

Pan the zoomed image along the y-axis of the chart.
You can also pan across the y-axis by hovering the mousecrosshairs over the y-axis and scrolling the mouse wheel
up or down.

Brightness

Slider control; 1 to 31
8 (Default)

Adjust the brightness of the instrument trace.

Gamma

Slider control; 1 to 255
127 (Default)

Adjust the gamma component of the instrument trace.

Persistence

Slider control; 1 to 255
70 (Default)

Adjust the persistence of the instrument trace.

S-Log3 Mode

S-Log3 (Default)
SR Live

For HDR video signals, see the section "Advanced HDR
Toolset" on page 15-2

Note: Software release 4.8 provides improved instrument Brightness, Gamma and Persistence
control range.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 15-5

HDR Heat-map (False Color Overlay)
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-HDR

A false color overlay can be applied to the picture view, to highlight luminance ranges in the image
that are of particular interest, whether High Dynamic Range (HDR) or otherwise.
The picture can also be displayed in monochrome using grayscale shades. If enabled at the sametime as False Color Highlighting, all image elements outside of the enabled false color overlay
luminance range(s) are displayed in monochrome; leaving the false color highlight elements to standout more.
Different types of false color overlay may be applied to visualize different image details clearly, andthe custom mode is provided to enable you to create a modified or bespoke overlay.
The range(s) and colors of a selected false color overlay can be modified by adjusting the sevenoverlay bands. Up to seven distinct ranges can be simultaneously enabled in a single overlay. If
adjusted, the new or modified overlay is designated as the Custom overlay type.

Figure 15-5: Configuring the False Color Overlay

When False Color Highlighting is enabled, a scale with numeric and graphic display of the luminancerange(s) of the overlay in use, is available and the required luminance units for the scale can beselected.

Page 15-6

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure 15-6: False Color Overlay Applied

Instrument Options (HDR)

Figure 15-7: Analyzer - Picture Instrument Menu Showing HDR Options

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 15-7

The following table lists the options available with the Advanced HDR Toolset for the Analyzer Picture and Analyzer - Picture Copy Instrument submenus:
Table 15-2 : HDR Menu Options for the Analyzer - Picture Instrument
Item

Options

Grayscale Mode

Disabled (Default)
EnabledWhen enabled, displays the Picture using grayscale
shades rather than color.

False Color Overlay Scale

Disabled
Enabled (Default)

Displayed when False Color Highlighting is enabled.
When active, displays a scale, showing both numeric andgraphic representation of the luminance range(s) of theselected overlay, at the left-hand side of the window.

Luminance
Measurement

Decimal Level (Default)
PQ Nits

Selects the measurement units for luminance used infalse color highlighting.

False Color Ranges

Disabled, PQ HDR, SDR All
Bands, SDR Shadow, SDR
Skin Tones, SDR Highlights,
Out of Range, S-Log3 Out
of Range, Custom

Opens False Color Highlighting window. Adjust any of theseven overlay bands to modify the range(s) and colors ofa selected false color overlay. You can enable up toseven distinct ranges simultaneously in a single overlay. If
adjusted, the new or modified overlay is designated as
the Custom overlay type.

Page 15-8

Description

PHABRIX Qx User Manual16
Additional System Information
This chapter provides additional information on using the REST API and driver calibration. It includes
the following sections:lUsing the REST API for Remote Accessl

Using REST API RequestslDriver Calibration

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 16-1

Using the REST API for Remote Access
You can use a standard REST API Client to interrogate the unit remotely by requesting data and status
information, or to submit operational control commands.

Activating the REST API
Activate the REST API on the unit as follows:
1. Open the instrument: Qx Network & Automation.
2. Right-click in the window to open the submenu.
3. Enable the option: REST API.
When enabled, the REST API status in the Qx Network & Automation window displays the port
number (8080) on which the unit is listening.

Figure 16-1: REST API Enabled in Network & Automation Window

Connecting Using the REST API
Connect to the unit using the REST API as follows:
1. Run your chosen REST API client application on the computer you will use to connect to theunit.
2. Use either the IP Address or mDNS Hostname (if mDNS is enabled on your computer) of the target unit, together with the port number, to connect to the unit.
For example, to submit a GET request, enter the specific IP Address or mDNS Hostname of the target
unit, in one of the following formats:l

http://192.168.0.70:8080/apil

http://qx-020094.local:8080/api

See the section "Using REST API Requests" on the facing page for an overview of the GET and PUT
requests for the REST API.
You can script the following REST API requests for use in automated testing:

Page 16-2

l

PUT

l

GET
PHABRIX Qx User Manuall

DELETEl

POST

Contact PHABRIX for full details of all available REST API requests.

Using REST API Requests
Using REST API Requests in SDI Boot Mode
The REST API request examples provided in this section for guidance use an example IP address(192.168.0.142) and the REST API Port (8080).
The target base resource for REST API requests is: /api.
The target base URL for requests (GET) is in the format:l

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api orl

http://qx-020094.local:8080/api

You can submit REST API requests to:lReport the current analyzed standard (GET):ll

Report the currently generated standard (GET):ll

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/generator/status

Navigate through a list of available standards that can be generated (GET):lll

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/analyser/status

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/generator/standards
Select the required URL from the tree structure and use GET again to drill-down to theappropriate color format, bit depth, level, SDR or HDR format, and test pattern.

Generate a specific standard (PUT) by drilling-down through the available listed items:ll

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/generator/standards/1920x1080p60/ \YCbCr%3A422%3A10/3G_A_Rec.709/100%25%20Bars
You can also add a pathological overlay, specifying its type and number of pairs by
including a raw payload of, for example:llReport the currently generated audio standard (GET):ll

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/generator/audio

Audio generation (PUT):l

http://192.168.0.39:8080/api/v1/generator/audiolInclude a raw payload for QuickConfig of the structure, for example:lll{"mode":"Fixed Tone","quickConfig":{"gainType":"Fixed Levels", \"gain":-10,"pitch":"E 3"}}

For Custom config raw payload structure, refer to the GET request output structure.

View instantaneous Eye readings (GET):ll{"action":"start","pathological":{"type":"CheckField","pairs":100}}

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/eye/status

View instantaneous Jitter readings (GET):l

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/jitter/status
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 16-3

lRetrieve the event logs (GET):ll

Report current CRC analysis status (GET):ll

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/eventlog/logs

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/analyser/crcSummary

Manage the event logs (PUT):l

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/eventlog/config/restApilWith a raw payload of:ll{"action":"enable"}In this example, to enable REST API event logging.

Using REST API Requests in IP 2022-6 Boot Mode
Specifically in IP 2022-6 boot mode, you can use REST API requests to:lReport the currently active multicast request (GET):ll

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/ipReceive/multicastRequests

Request a new multicast (PUT):l

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/ipReceive/multicastRequestslWith a raw payload of the form:lll

In this example, to join a multicast group of destination IP address: 230.0.0.15

Report the list of currently available IP media streams (GET):ll

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/ipReceive/mediaStreams

Select the IP media stream for analysis (PUT):l

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/ipReceive/mediaStreamslWith a raw payload of the form:ll{"action":"analyseStream","destinationIpAddress": "230.0.0.15", \"destinationUdpPort":16,"matchSsrc":true,"sourceIpAddress": "192.168.10.30",\"sourceUdpPort":16,"ssrc":123456}

Report the IP media stream currently being analyzed (GET):ll{"action":"request","destinationIpAddress":"230.0.0.15"}

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/ipReceive/requestedMediaStreams

Clear the list of IP media streams (PUT):l

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/ipReceive/mediaStreamslWith a raw payload of:l{"action":"clearList"}

Using REST API Requests in IP 2110 Boot Mode
Specifically in IP 2110 boot mode, you can use REST API requests to:lReport the currently active multicast request (GET):ll

Page 16-4

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/2110/receive/multicastRequests

Request a new multicast (PUT):PHABRIX Qx User Manuallhttp://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/2110/receive/multicastRequestslWith a raw payload of the form:lll

In this example, to join a multicast group of destination IP address: 230.0.0.15

Report the list of currently available IP media streams (GET):ll

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/2110/receive/mediaStreams

Select the IP media stream for analysis (PUT):l

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/2110/receive/mediaStreamslWith a raw payload of the form:ll{"action":"analyseStream","destinationIpAddress": "230.0.0.15", \"destinationUdpPort":16,"matchSsrc":true,"sourceIpAddress": "192.168.10.30",\"sourceUdpPort":16,"ssrc":123456}

Report the IP media stream currently being analyzed (GET):ll{"action":"request","destinationIpAddress":"230.0.0.15"}

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/2110/receive/requestedMediaStreams

Clear the list of IP media streams (PUT):l

http://192.168.0.142:8080/api/v1/2110/receive/mediaStreamslWith a raw payload of:l{"action":"clearList"}

Contact PHABRIX for full details of all available REST API requests.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 16-5

Driver Calibration
Requires Option(s):PHQX01E-3G

Overview
All PHABRIX units are calibrated and verified before dispatch. Over time, however, the optional SDI
generator outputs of the unit may require recalibration as described in this section.

Figure 16-2: Driver Calibration Window

On units with PHABRIX RTE™ (RealTime Eye) capability, the SDI generator outputs of the unit can eachbe calibrated using the SDI In A input.
Note: Recalibration relies upon the calibration status of the Eye/Jitter analyzer. If in doubt
consider returning the unit to PHABRIX for calibration.

SDI Output Calibration Steps
Warning: Before attempting to calibrate the unit, make sure that you use a 12G cable thatcomplies with the specification described below. If in doubt, do not attempt to perform calibration
on your unit.
Calibrate the unit as follows:
Note: If the unit includes the SDI Stress option (PHQXO-SDI-STRESS) first disable Jitter Insertion
Mode before beginning driver calibration. See the section "Advanced Generation Tools (SDI
Boot Mode - Stress Option)" on page 14-2 for further details.
1. Connect a one meter long cable between the SDI In A input (black or red nut) and the SDI output to be calibrated. A 12G-SDI grade or compatible cable with 12G-SDI BNCs must be used. A
suitable cable type is Belden 1694A.
Page 16-6

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

2. Open the Instrument Launch Menu and select: System Settings > Driver Calibration to open
the calibration window.
3. Select the output to calibrate from the dropdown menu, for example, for SDI Output A, selectDriver A and so on.
4. Click Start to begin calibration. It can take up to five minutes to calibrate an output.
5. On completion of calibration for SDI Output A, connect the output side of the cable to SDI Output B and repeat the steps above, until you have calibrated all SDI Outputs. It may take about
20 minutes to calibrate all four outputs.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page 16-7

A
Technical Specifications
This Appendix defines the technical specifications of your unit and includes the following sections:
l

Power

l

External Locking Referencel

SDI Instrument Outputl

HDMI Instrument Outputl

USB ConnectorslNetworkinglRear Panel D26 Connector

l

GPIO

l

AES Input/OutputlLongitudinal Timecode (LTC)lAnalog Audio Output

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page A-1

Technical Specifications
Power
Connector

4-pin XLR, Male

Voltage

10 - 18 V, 12 V DC nominal.
DC Power adapter provided.
Overvoltage, undervoltage and reverse voltage protection.

Power

50 W nominal, 70 W maximum.

Connector Pinouts

Connector View from Rear of Unit (male):l

Pin 1: Screen Groundl

Pin 2: Not Connectedl

Pin 3: Not Connectedl

Pin 4: Core 12 V

External Locking Reference
Label

REF

Input Signal

Tri-level or Bi-Level (black burst) syncs 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz

Connector

2 x BNC

Input Impedance> 10 kohm

Input Return Loss

> 40 dB to 6 MHz (typical)

Maximum Input voltage+/− 2 V

Specification

Tri-level syncs (SMPTE 274M and SMPTE 296M) 600 mV pk-pk
PAL Black Burst (ITU 624-4/SMPTE 318) 1 V pk-pk,
Composite NTSC (SMPTE 170M) 1 V pk-pk

SDI Instrument Output
Label

SDI OUT

Connector

BNC

Output Impedance

75 ohmOutput Level

800 mV p-p +/− 10 %Purpose3 Gbps SDI instrument output

HDMI Instrument Output
Label

HDMI

Connector

Type A

Video Format

1920 x 1080 RGB 4:4:4

Page A-2

PHABRIX Qx User ManualAudio Format

4 x PCM stereo audio at 48 kHz

PurposeMonitor output that allows up to 16 individual instrument panels (or windows) to
be displayed. Supports auto DVI mode over HDMI to connect
DVI KVM Extenders for remote installations.

USB
USB

USB 2

USB Connector

Type A

Quantity

3 (1 x front-mounted, 2 x rear-mounted)

PurposeKeyboard and mouse control of the HDMI® monitor output of instrument andsoftware installation.

Networking
Ethernet

IEEE 802.3 10 / 100 / 1000 Mb/s (10 / 100 / 1000 base-T)

Ethernet Connector

RJ-45

Rear panel D26
Label

I/O Expansion

Connector

26-way D-type

Purpose8 x GPI I/O, 4 x AES I/O, LTC input, stereo analog audio out

PinoutTable A-1 : D26 Connector Pin-outs
Pin NumPin Nameber

Description

Hardwired
GPIO Assignments(Non-IP 2110 Boot
Modes)

Hardwired
GPIO Assignments(2110 IP Boot Mode)1

AES_IO1

Bidirectional AES I/O - 75 ohm unbalanced

N/A

N/A

2

AES_IO2

Bidirectional AES I/O - 75 ohm unbalanced

N/A

N/A

3

AES_IO3

Bidirectional AES I/O - 75 ohm unbalanced

N/A

N/A

4

AES_IO4

Bidirectional AES I/O - 75 ohm unbalanced

N/A

N/A

5

LTC_RX_P

LTC Receive (RX) P (RS-422 compatible)

N/A

N/A

6

LTC_RX_N

LTC Receive (RX) N (RS-422 compatible)

N/A

N/A

7

AUDIO_R Audio Line Out - right

N/A

N/A

8

AUDIO_L

Audio Line Out - left

N/A

N/A

9

5V0_
GPIO

5 V current limited GPIO supply (500 mA)

N/A

N/A

10, 11, 12,
13, 14, 15,
16, 17, 18

GND

0V

N/A

N/A

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page A-3

Pin NumPin Nameber

Description

Hardwired
GPIO Assignments(Non-IP 2110 Boot
Modes)

Hardwired
GPIO Assignments(2110 IP Boot Mode)

19

GPIO-0Open drain,
10 kohm pull-up to + 5 V

Pathological signal
output on SDI A
Pulses on detectionof a PLL pathologicalcondition.

1 PPS output for theselected PTP engine
when System
Reference set to
PTP.
Off when System
Reference set toFree Run.

20

GPIO-1

Open drain,
10 kohm pull-up to + 5 V

Pathological signal
output on SDI A
Pulses on detectionof an Equalizer
pathological condition.

1 PPS for SFP A when
PTP Engine isenabled; off when
not enabled.

21

GPIO-2

Open drain,
10 kohm pull-up to + 5 V

Pathological signal
output on SDI B
Pulses on detectionof a PLL pathologicalcondition.

1 PPS for SFP B when
PTP Engine isenabled; off when
not enabled.

22

GPIO-3

Open drain,
10 kohm pull-up to + 5 V

Pathological signal
output on SDI B
Pulses on detectionof an Equalizer
pathological condition.

N/A

23

GPIO-4

Open drain,
10 kohm pull-up to + 5 V

Pathological signal
N/A
output on SDI C
Pulses on detectionof a PLL pathologicalcondition.

24

GPIO-5

Open drain,
10 kohm pull-up to + 5 V

Pathological signal
output on SDI C
Pulses on detectionof an Equalizer
pathological condition.

25

GPIO-6

Open drain,
10 kohm pull-up to + 5 V

Pathological signal
N/A
output on SDI D
Pulses on detectionof a PLL pathologicalcondition.

26

GPIO-7

Open drain,
10 kohm pull-up to + 5 V

Pathological signal
output on SDI D
Pulses on detectionof an Equalizer
pathological condition.

Page A-4

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

N/A

N/A

GPIO
Connector

26-way D-type (see previous table)

Pins

19 (GPIO - 0), 20 (GPIO - 1), 21 (GPIO - 2), 22 (GPIO - 3),
23 (GPIO - 4), 24 (GPIO - 5), 25 (GPIO - 6), 26 (GPIO - 7)
Open drain with 10 kohm pull-up to +5 Volts

FormatPower
Purpose5 V (pin 9), current-limited GPIO supply for open drain input/outputs. 0 V / signal
ground (pins 10 to 18)
Generator Pathological Rate Detection

AES I/O
Connector

26-way D-type

Pins

1 (AES I/O 1), 2 (AES I/O 2), 3 (AES I/O 3), 4 (AES I/O 4)

Input Impedance

75 ohm terminatedMaximum Input voltage+/− 2 V

Input Sample Rate

48 kHz synchronous audio

Input Bit Depth

20 bit or 24 bit

Output Sample Rate

48 kHz synchronous to system reference

Output Bit Depth

24 bitSpecification

Conforming to AES3-2003 and SMPTE-276M

Purpose4 x AES I/O audio

Longitudinal Timecode (LTC)
Connector

26-way D-type

Pins

5 (RX - P), 6 (RX - N)

FormatRS-422 Compatible

PurposeNot currently supported in software

Analog Audio Output
Connector

26-way D-type

Pins

7 (Audio Line Out - Right), 8 (Audio Line Out - Left)Type

Stereo Pair

Level

(1 V peak-to-peak analog audio, full scale 0 dBFS)

PurposeAudio Monitoring output

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page A-5

B
Advanced Media Timing Information
This Appendix provides additional information about the advanced media timing measurements you
can make using the Video Timing & System Reference instrument and includes the following
sections:l

OverviewlMeasurements in the Video Timing Tabl

Measurements in the Media Latency Tab

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page B-1

Advanced Media Timing Measurements
Requires Option(s):PHQXO-IP-STND and PHQXO-IP-MEAS

Overview
This appendix provides additional detail on the advanced media timing measurements available inthe Video Timing & System Reference instrument when the PHQXO-IP-MEAS license is installed.
For information on using the Instrument, see the sections "Video Timing & Setting External Referencein IP Boot 2110 Mode" on page 5-35 and "Video Timing & System Reference (IP 2110 Boot Mode)" onpage 5-52

Advanced Media Timing Definitions
The following terms are used in this section and are defined as follows:
Table B-1 : Advanced Media Timing Definitions
Term

Definition

TPA0

The PTP arrival time of the first packet of a frame, for progressive video, or field one, forinterlaced video, as measured.

TPR0

The time when the receiver is expected to read the packet from its receive buffer. It isset by TROffset which can be either the default value or set in the Session Description
Protocol (SDP).

N*TFrame

The Epoch-aligned start of the last frame as defined in ST 2059-1.

TVD

A time-point at which N*TFrame + TROffset is an integer and the time-scale has its origin
at the SMPTE Epoch as defined in SMPTE ST 2059-1.

RTPTimestamp

The time contained in the timestamp within the received packet.

Video IP Packet Timing Schematics
The graphics on the following pages are provided to illustrate the subsequent descriptions of theadvanced media timing measurements. The first, Figure B-1, shows the IP video packet timing at theSender and Figure B-2 shows the IP video packet timing at the receiver.

Page B-2

PHABRIX Qx User ManualFigure B-1: Sender Gapped Packet Schedule
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page B-3

Figure B-2: Receiver Gapped Packet Schedule

Page B-4

PHABRIX Qx User ManualMeasurements in the Video Timing Tab
Video Timing (First Packet Time) Measurement
The Video Timing measurement is analogous to the SDI or Analog vertical interval timing
measurement where the start of frame is measured with respect to an analog external reference. The
unit calculates Video Timing as follows:
Video Timing = TPA0 − N * TFrame (averaged over 1 second)
Where:ll

TPA0 is the arrival PTP time of the first packet of a frame for progressive or field one for interlaced video as measured as measured by the unit
N * TFrame is the Epoch-aligned start of the last frame as defined in ST 2059-1, as reconstructedby the unit.

By default, the Video Timing value is always positive, however, if you enable the Wrap frame option in
the submenu, the unit displays any values greater than half a TV frame period as negative values withrespect to the next TV frame.
This measurement is affected by:l

The PTP Lock and Phase Offset of the Sender and unit (Receiver)l

The network propagation delayll

The timing relationship between the Source media Frame Sync and the PTP-derived Frame
Sync
The relationship of the underlying Media Clock to PTP, and whether the media is locked to PTP.

The unit measures Video Timing using the receiver time reference for the two sampling points anddoes not make use of RTP timestamps. Consequently, Video Timing can be measured with highprecision as it is not quantized by source RTP clocks. The measurement uncertainty is a function of
the hardware timestamp, which has a resolution of approximately 100 ns. The measurement varies
with the unit's PTP estimated phase offset, and the PTP delay control.
SMPTE ST 2110-21 defines a nominal or ideal value of the sender's Video Timing (TRODefault) for each
video format as shown in the following table:
Table B-2 : SMPTE ST 2110-21 Nominal Sender's Video Timing TRODefault by Video Format
Video Format

Frame Rate ( F/s )TRODefault ( μs )TRODefault Integer ( μs )525i

29.97002997

1271.111

1271

625i

25

1664.000

1664

720p

23.97602398

1557.111

1557

24

1555.556

1556

25

1493.333

1493

29.97002997

1245.689

1246

30

1244.444

1244

47.95204795

778.556779

48

777.778778

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page B-5

Video Format

1080i

1080p

1080PsF

Frame Rate ( F/s )TRODefault ( μs )TRODefault Integer ( μs )50746.667747

59.94005994

622.844623

60

622.222622

23.97602398

815.63816

24814.815815

25

782.222782

29.97002997

652.504653

30

651.852652

23.97602398

1594.185

1594

24

1592.593

1593

25

1528.889

1529

29.97002997

1275.348

1275

30

1274.074

1274

47.95.204795

797.093797

48796.296796

50

764.444764

59.94005994

637.674638

60

637.037637

23.97602398

815.63816

24814.815815

25

782.222782

29.97002997

652.504653

30

651.852652

47.95204795

407.815408

48407.407407

50

391.111391

59.94005994

326.252326

60

325.926

326

Note: If the underlying Media Clock is not locked to PTP (for example, if it originates from an SDI
player that cannot be generator locked (genlocked) being played through an SDI-to-2110
gateway) then the Video Timing measurement will have a value that is determined mainly by thevideo source to PTP timing relationship.

Page B-6

PHABRIX Qx User ManualNote: If the source is not locked to PTP, then the value of the Video Timing measurement will drift
continuously.

Margin Measurement
The Margin is the difference between the First Packet Time (video timing measurement) and the timeof the first video buffer read in the receiver. The indicated TROffset is used to control the readschedule of the receiver buffer and the Margin is the amount of buffer pre-fill prior to the start of thebuffer read process. The Margin is calculated as follows:
Margin = TPA0 − (N*TFrame + TROffset) = First Packet Time − TROffset
The Margin measurement will be affected by the following:l

TROffsetl

The PTP Lock and Phase Offset of the Sender and unit (Receiver)l

The network propagation delayll

The timing relationship between the Source media Frame Sync and the PTP derived Frame
Sync
The relationship of the underlying Media Clock to PTP, and whether the media is locked to PTP.

The unit provides a facility to enter a manual value for the TROffset in the Instrument submenu. In theabsence of a manual value of TROffset the unit will use the TRODefault value for that video format, see
the table in "Measurements in the Video Timing Tab" on page B-5.
A negative value indicates that the packets are arriving earlier than expected for an idealized system,
implying that the receiver has more time to buffer and consequently, has more margin.
A positive value indicates that the packets are arriving later than expected for an idealized system,and that the size of the available buffer is being reduced.
If the video phase of the source is adjusted so that the Margin is zero, then the measured Video
Timing should then be equal to the TROffset.
Note: If the underlying Media Clock is not locked to PTP (for example, if it originates from an SDI
player that cannot be genlocked being played through an SDI-to-2110 gateway) then the Margin
measurement will have a value that is determined mainly by the video source to PTP timing
relationship.

RTP Offset Measurement
This measurement is the difference between the time encoded in the RTP timestamp and the start of
the frame for progressive or first field for interlaced since the epoch, averaged over 1 second. A
camera will typically timestamp at the image capture instant. An SDI gateway will timestamp at thestart of the frame, and a synthetic source can timestamp at the start of the frame or at the time the first
packet egresses from the sender. For an SDI to ST 2110 gateway, when the source video timing has
been adjusted to give a Video Timing measurement value that is equal to TRDefault (a Margin of zero),then the RTP Offset is an indication of the timing relationship of the source video to PTP. The RTP
Offset is calculated as follows:
RTP Offset = RTPTimestamp – N * TFrame (averaged over 1 second)
Where:ll

RTPTimestamp is the time contained in the timestamp within the received packet, created by thesourceN * TFrame is the Epoch-aligned start of the last frame as defined in ST 2059-1 as reconstructedby the unit.
PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page B-7

In principle, the RTP Offset measurement will be affected by:l

The PTP Lock and Phase Offset of the Sender and unit (Receiver)l

The relationship of the underlying Media Clock to PTP, and whether the media is locked to PTP.

The unit calculates the RTP Offset by subtracting the Video Latency measurement from the Video
Timing measurement; a method that is insensitive to the PTP phase offset of the unit, and the PTP lockor phase of the source.
The PTP time of the RTPTimestamp is limited by the resolution of the source RTP Media Clock. For ST
2110-20 Video this clock is 90 kHz and has a quantization of 11 μs. The true PTP time at which a packet
is assembled in the sender output buffer will be a point within this 11 μs RTP window so, even in aperfect system, the measurements may include an error of up to 11 μs.
PTP Phase offset can be affected by network asymmetric delay, which differs for both source andreceiver, plus the inherent phase drift of the PTP daemon.
Note: If the underlying media clock is not locked to PTP (for example, if it originates from an SDI
player that cannot be generator locked (genlocked) being played through an SDI-to-2110
gateway) then the RTP Offset measurement will have a value that is determined mainly by thevideo source to PTP timing relationship.
The RTP Offset is a valid measurement for all ST 2110 flows (gapped, linear, wide, narrow) and ST
2022-6 flows that use PTP, where the timing point in ST 2022-6 video is the first active pixel or Frameor Field sync.

Measurements in the Media Latency Tab
Media Latency Measurement
The Media Latency measure is the difference between the arrival time of a packet and the timeencoded in the RTP timestamp of that packet, averaged over 1 second. This measurement applies tovideo, ANC, and audio since it does not depend on a frame structure. For video, it applies to the first
packet of the frame and is calculated as follows:
Latency = TPA0 – RTPTimestamp (averaged over 1 second)
Where:ll

TPA0 is the arrival PTP time of the first packet of a frame, for progressive video, or field one, forinterlaced video, as measured by the unit.
RTPTimestamp is the time contained in the timestamp within the received packet created by thesource.

For Video and ANC flows, the RTP timestamp is constant for the entire Frame, so the latency is only
measured when the RTP timestamp changes. This occurs on the first packet of a frame for a
progressive flow, or field for an interlaced flow, with the results averaged over 1 second.
For Audio flows, as the RTP timestamp increments with each audio packet the latency is measured forevery packet with the results averaged over 1 second.
This measurement will be affected by:Page B-8l

The Sender Encapsulation Time (packet time)l

PTP Lock and Phase Offset of the Sender and unit (Receiver)l

Network propagation delayl

The relationship of the underlying Media Clock to PTP and whether the media is locked to PTP.

PHABRIX Qx User ManualThis is an indication of the true latency of each flow from source to destination and the time difference
that a receiver or gateway will need to accommodate in order to co-time the flows. The longest
latency of the associated flows is therefore the minimum co-timed delay through the network.
The PTP time of TPA0 is calculated by the receiving hardware timestamp and is not limited by the RTP
or Media Clock rate. This timestamp has a resolution of approximately 100 ns and the measurement
varies with the PTP estimated phase offset, and the PTP delay control.
The PTP time of the RTPTimestamp is limited by the resolution of the source RTP Media Clock. For ST
2110-20 Video and ST 2110-40 ANC this clock is 90 kHz and has a quantization of 11 μs. The true PTP
time at which a packet is assembled in the sender output buffer will be a point within this 11 μs RTP
window so, even in a perfect system, the measurements may include an error of up to 11 μs.
For ST 2110-30 and ST 2110-31 Audio the Media Clock is 48 kHz and the measurement error increases
to 20.8 μs. For an audio packet time of 1 ms this equates to an uncertainty of 2 %, however, a 125 μs
audio packet time increases the uncertainty to 16.64 %.
When measuring Audio and ANC to Video timing these RTP timing errors are compounded and are at
the limits of the 2110 system.
PTP Phase offset can be affected by network asymmetric delay that differs for the source andreceiver, plus the inherent phase drift of the PTP daemon.
Note: If the underlying Media Clock is not locked to PTP (for example, if it originates from an SDI
player that cannot be genlocked being played through an SDI-to-2110 gateway) then the source
encapsulator will be forced to add or drop packets in order to accommodate the differences intime-bases and this will manifest itself as a change in the nominal 90 kHz or 48 kHz RTP ticks andmeasured latency. In this case, you will notice that the measured latency value will cyclically andslowly increment or decrement and then jump back.

Note: If the source is not locked to PTP, then the latency measurement will continuously drift.

RTP Clock and Timestamps
IP media systems apply the concepts of the Media Clock, the RTP Clock and the RTP Timestamp.
The Media clock is a clock, defined in SMPTE ST 2110-10 to be frequency-locked to PTP, and it
advances at an exact rate for each type of media essence. This is not necessarily the same as theMedia sampling clock, for example, 74.25 or 74.25/1.001 MHz for HD Video, but happens to be thesame for 48 kHz sampled PCM Audio.
The RTP clock is the clock used to derive the RTP Timestamp carried in the RTP packet header. The
RTP timestamp increments at the rate of the RTP clock, and the timestamp has a value of zero, the
SMPTE Epoch defined in ST 2059-1, which is the same as the PTP Epoch defined in IEEE 1588-2008.
For reference, the SMPTE Epoch is defined as midnight International Atomic Time (TAI) on the 01
January 1970 [1970-0101T00:00:00TAI] and is 63092010 seconds before the UTC Epoch 1972-0101T00:00:00Z (UTC), that is, PTP time is not the same as UTC time.
The RTP Clock is defined to be identical to its associated Media Clock in ST 2110-10.
The RTP (or Media) Clock rates are defined in the SMPTE standards ST 2110-20 (Video), ST 2110-30
and ST 2110-31 (Audio) and ST 2110-40 (ANC), and are listed in the following table:
Table B-3 : RTP Clock Rates for ST 2110-20, -30, -31 and -40
Media Essence TypeVideo

SMPTE Standard
ST 2110-20

RTP/Media Clock Rate
90 kHzPHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page B-9

Media Essence TypeSMPTE Standard

RTP/Media Clock Rate

Audio

ST 2110-30/31

48 kHzANC

ST 2110-40

90 kHzThe Video and ANC Media/RTP clock rate is constant for all video frame rates and should not changeeven with 1000/1001 non-integer frame rates.
The unit measures the actual value of the RTP clock averaged over 1 second and reports the value in
the RTP clks data column. If the reported values do not match the specified values, this is anindication that either media flows or the sender is not correctly locked to PTP.
While the Video and ANC Media/RTP clock rate is 90 kHz (that is, the value of the timestamp
increments every 11.111... μs) the value of the RTP Timestamp is chosen to be a constant for an entire
video frame and is analogous to the timecode of that frame. The chosen timestamp value for theframe is the nearest value of the 90 kHz derived timestamp at the start of the frame.
Video and ANC Timestamps/Second (TS/s)
The unit measures the received number of unique timestamps per second for each media essence
type and updates the reported value every second in the TSs data column. The measured number of
unique timestamps in each second will be an integer value.
For example, for a video or ANC flow with a frame rate of 50 Hz there will be 50 unique timestamps
per second.
Audio Timestamps/Second (TS/s)
For Audio flows conforming to ST 2110-30 and ST 2110-31, the number of unique timestamps per
second will vary with the audio packet time. This version of software supports Audio packet times of 1
ms and 125 μs, as shown in the following table:
Table B-4 : Audio Timestamps per Second
Audio Packet Time

Unique Timestamps per Second (TS/s)

1 ms

1000

125 μs8000

RTP Clocks per Timestamp Quotient (RTP / TS)
The RTP / TS quotient is a measure of the number of RTP Clocks per Timestamp and is reported by
the unit in the RTP clks/TS data column. For Video and ANC flows, the number of RTP clocks pertimestamp will vary with the video frame rate. The nominal values are shown in the following table:
Table B-5 : Nominal RTP Clocks per Timestamp for Video
Video Frame Rate (Hz)RTP Clocks per Time Stamp (RTP/TS)

60

1500

59.94

1501.5

50

1800

30

3000

29.97

3003

25

3600

24

3750

Page B-10

PHABRIX Qx User ManualVideo Frame Rate (Hz)23.98

RTP Clocks per Time Stamp (RTP/TS)
3753.75

For Audio flows the number of RTP clocks/Timestamp will vary with the Audio Packet Time, and isequal to the number of audio samples per packet. For 48 kHz sampled audio the relationshipbetween the Audio Packet Time and the RTP Clocks per timestamp per second is shown in thefollowing table:
Table B-6 : Nominal RTP Clocks per Timestamp for Audio
Audio Packet Time

RTP Clocks per timestamp (RTP / TS)

1 ms

48

125 μs6

Working with Non-integer Frame Rates
For non-integer Video and ANC frame rates such as 60/1.001 (59.94 Hz) the unit receives 60 uniquetimestamps for 15 or 16 seconds, followed by one second that will contain 59 unique timestamps. For
a 59.94 Hz system, the unit will, therefore, report 60 TS/s for 15 or 16 seconds followed by 59 TS/s forone second, resulting in a long-term average of 59.94 TS/s.
Similarly, the measured Video and ANC RTP/Media clock rate for a 59.94 Hz system will be 90,090
Hz (90,000 * 1.001) for 15 or 16 seconds, followed by a single second where the measured RTP Clockwill be 88688 Hz or 88687 Hz, resulting in a long-term average of 90,000 Hz.
The reported number of RTP clocks per timestamp will also typically move away from the long-term
nominal value for one second. The typical combination of measured values for the RTP Clock Rate,
Timestamps/s and RTP Clocks per Timestamp for non-integer Frame and Field rates are given in thefollowing table:

Table B-7 : Typical Reported RTP Clocks per Timestamp for Fractional Frame and Field Rates
ReportedTimestamps per
Second (TS/s)

Frame or Field Rate
(Hz)

Reported RTP/MediaClock Rate60

90,000

60

1500

N/A

59.94

90,09060

1501.516 or 1788,588591501.49

88,589591501.51

50

90,000

50

1800

N/A

30

90,000

30

3000

N/A

29.97

90,09030

3003

33 or 34

87,087293003

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

RTP Clocks per
Timestamp (RTP/TS)

Interval(s)Page B-11

Reported
Timestamps per
Second (TS/s)

Frame or Field Rate
(Hz)

Reported RTP/MediaClock Rate

RTP Clocks per
Timestamp (RTP/TS)

25

90,000

25

3600

N/A

24

90,000

24

3750

N/A

23.98

90,090243753.75

41 or 42

86,336233753.74

86,337233753.76

Interval(s)Un-locked Media Sources
It is possible to a situation where the 2110 Sender is locked to PTP, but the underlying media source ofVideo, Audio, ANC (for example, originating from a free-running SDI player being passed through an
SDI-to-2110 gateway with no synchronizer) is not locked to PTP.
In this case, the reported media clock rate for the video, audio and ANC flows will not match any ofthe expected values shown in the previous table. In addition, the average latency measurement willgo through a cyclical sequence where the latency will first increment, then jump back and repeat thecycle.

Sources Not Locked to PTPWhen the sending device is not locked to PTP, the value of the latency measurement will drift
continuously. This is over and above any cyclical behavior resulting from the underlying media notbeing locked to PTP.

Page B-12

PHABRIX Qx User ManualC
On-going Development
PHABRIX is committed to developing the toolsets available on the unit, including upgrades to existing
instruments and the introduction of new instruments. Please do not hesitate to contact PHABRIX at
any time to discuss your requirements for the product or current product timelines.

SMPTE UHDTV: SDI Physical Layer Tolerances
The unit will automatically measure the SMPTE UHDTV tolerances listed in the following table:
Table C-1 : SMPTE UHDTV Tolerances
Data Rate

1.485 Gbps

2.97 Gbps

5.94 Gbps

11.88 Gbps

Standard

SMPTE ST292-1:2012

SMPTE ST424:2012

SMPTE ST2081-1, 10

SMPTE SMPTE ST2082-1,
10

CodingScrambled NRZI

Scrambled NRZI

Scrambled NRZI

Scrambled NRZI

Amplitude

800 mV +/− 10 %800 mV +/− 10 %800 mV +/− 10 %800 mV +/− 10 %DC Offset

0.0 V +/− 0.5 V

0.0 V +/− 0.5 V

0.0 V +/− 0.5 V

0.0 V +/− 0.5 V

Rise/Fall Time< 270 ps

< 135 ps

< 80 ps< 45 psRise/Fall Time Difference< 100 ps

< 50 ps< 35 ps< 18 psRise/Fall Overshoot< 10 % of Amplitude< 10 % of Amplitude< 10 % of Amplitude< 10 % of Amplitude

Timing Jitter< 1 UI (10 Hz to 148.5 MHz)

< 2 UI (10 Hz to 297 MHz)

< 4 UI (10 Hz to 594 MHz)

< 8 UI (10 Hz to 1188 MHz)

Alignment Jitter< 0.2 UI (100 kHz to 148.5
MHz)< 0.3 UI (100 kHz to 297
MHz)< 0.3 UI (100 kHz to 594
MHz)< 0.3 UI (100 kHz to 1188
MHz)

75 ohm Coaxial Cable
Length (Belden 1694A)

200 m

200 m

100 m

70 m

The complexity of both analyzing and generating signals for UHDTV is exemplified in the table. The
data bandwidth testing from HD through to UHDTV at 12 Gbps, standard on the unit, is immense andthe parameters set by SMPTE require that the instruments measure these critical values forcompliance.

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page C-1

D
Supported SFPs
For information on the SFPs supported by the current software version, please contact PHABRIXSupport at:lwww.phabrix.com/support

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page D-1

E
Supported Video Standards
Please contact PHABRIX if you require support for any standards not listed here. The current software
version supports the following standards:

2K/HD Supported Formats
The following ST 2022-6 formats are supported by Qx option: PHQXO-IP-STND:
Table E-1 : Supported 2K/HD Video Standards (SDI and IP 2022-6 Boot Modes)
SMPTE Stnds.
Link (Content)

Interface

Resolution

Sampling
Structure

Pixel Depth

Frame / Field Rate

SDIHDR

SDISDR

2022-6

ST 292 (ST 296)

HD

1280 x 720

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 292 (ST 274)

HD

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060i, 59.94i, 50i, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○⬤⬤⬤ST 292 (RP 211)

HD

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

10

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF,
23.98psF○⬤⬤⬤

ST 292 (ST 2048-2)

HD2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p, 30psF,
29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.98psF

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 372 (ST 274)

Dual Link HD

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p

○⬤

⬤

-

ST 372 (ST 274)

Dual Link HD

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1060i, 59.94i, 50i 30PsF, 29.97PsF,
25PsF, 24PsF, 23.98PsF 30p, 29.97p,
25p, 24p, 23.98p

○⬤

⬤

-

ST 372 (ST 274)

Dual Link HD

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1260i, 59.94i, 50i 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○⬤⬤-ST 372 (ST 274)

Dual Link HD

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1260i, 59.94i, 50i 30PsF, 29.97PsF,
25PsF, 24PsF, 23.98PsF 30p, 29.97p,
25p, 24p, 23.98p

○⬤

⬤

-

ST 372 (ST 274)

Dual Link HD

2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.95p

○⬤

⬤

-

ST 372 (ST 274)

Dual Link HD

2048 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1030PsF, 29.97PsF, 25PsF, 24PsF,
23.98PsF 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○⬤⬤-ST 372 (ST 274)

Dual Link HD

2048 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

12

30PsF, 29.97PsF, 25PsF, 24PsF,
23.98PsF 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○⬤⬤-ST 372 (ST 274)

Dual Link HD

2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)
4:2:2:4 (YCbCrA)

1230PsF, 29.97PsF, 25PsF, 24PsF,
23.98PsF 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○⬤⬤-

ST 425-1 (ST 274)

3G Level A (1)1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 2048-2)

3G Level A (1)2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.95p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 296)

3G Level A (2)1280 x 720

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 30p, 29.97p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 274)

3G Level A (2)1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1060i, 59.94i, 50i, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p, 30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF,
24psF, 23.98psF

○⬤

⬤

⬤

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page E-1

SMPTE Stnds.
Link (Content)

Interface

ST 425-1 (ST 2048-2)

3G Level A (2)ST 425-1 (ST 274)

Resolution

Sampling
Structure

Pixel Depth

Frame / Field Rate

SDIHDR

SDISDR

2022-62048 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p, 30psF,
29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.98psF

○⬤

⬤

⬤

3G Level A (3)1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1260i, 59.94i, 50i, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○⬤⬤⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 2048-2)

3G Level A (3)2048 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p, 30psF,
29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.98psF

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 274)

3G Level A (4)1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1260i, 59.94i, 50i, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p, 30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF,
24psF, 23.98psF

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 2048-2)

3G Level A (4)2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr) 4:2:2:4(YCbCrA)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p, 30psF,
29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.98psF

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 274)

3G Level B-DL
(I)

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 2048-2)

3G Level B-DL
(I)

2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.95p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 274)

3G Level B-DL
(II)

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1060i, 59.94i, 50i
30PsF, 29.97PsF, 25PsF, 24PsF,
23.98PsF
30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 2048-2)

3G Level B-DL
(II)

2048 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1030PsF, 29.97PsF, 25PsF, 24PsF,
23.98PsF
30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 274)

3G Level B-DL
(III)

1920 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RBG)

1260i, 59.94i, 50i
30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 2048-2)

3G Level B-DL
(III)

2048 x 1080

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RBG)

1230PsF, 29.97PsF, 25PsF, 24PsF,
23.98PsF
30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 274)

3G Level B-DL
(IV)

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1260i, 59.94i, 50i 30PsF, 29.97PsF,
25PsF, 24PsF, 23.98PsF
30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

ST 425-1 (ST 2048-2)

3G Level B-DL
(IV)

2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)
4:2:2:4 (YCbCrA)

1230PsF, 29.97PsF, 25PsF, 24PsF,
23.98PsF
30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p

○⬤

⬤

⬤

Key to table:

Page E-2l⬤ - Generator with Option PHQXO-GEN and Analyzerl○ - Optionall

A - Analyzer Onlyl

- - Not supported

PHABRIX Qx User ManualTable E-2 : Supported 2K/HD Video Standards (IP 2110 Boot Mode)
Resolution

Sampling
Structure

Pixel
Depth

Frame / Field Rate

Qx
2110-HDR

2110-SDR

1280 x 720

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

860p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

1280 x 720

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.97p○A

A

1280 x 720

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

860p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

1280 x 720

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

860I, 59.94I, 50I○AA

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060i, 59.94i, 50i○AA

1920 x 1080

4:2:2(YCbCr)

1260i, 59.94i, 50i○AA

1920 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

8

60I, 59.94I, 50I○AA

1920 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

1060i, 59.94i, 50i○AA

1920 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

1260i, 59.94i, 50i○AA

1920 x 1080

4:2:2(YCbCr)

860p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1260p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

860p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

1260p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

8

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

10

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

12

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

8

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

10

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

1920 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

12

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

860p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1260p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

860p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,
23.98p○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

1260p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.97p, 30p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p,

○A

A

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page E-3

Resolution

Sampling
Structure

Pixel
Depth

Frame / Field Rate

Qx
2110-HDR

2110-SDR

23.98p2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

8

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

10

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

12

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

8

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

10

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

2048 x 1080

4:4:4(YCbCr/RGB)

12

30psF, 29.97psF, 25psF, 24psF, 23.97psF○A

A

Key to table:

Page E-4l⬤ - Generator with Option PHQXO-GEN and Analyzerl○ - Optionall

A - Analyzer Only

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

4K/UHD Supported Formats
Table E-3 : Supported 4K/UHD SDI Video Standards
SMPTE Stnds.
Link (Content)

Interface

Resolution

Sampling
Structure

Pixel Depth

Frame / Field Rate

SDIHDR

SDISDRST 425-3 Annex B.1(ST 2036-1)

Quad-link HD-SQ

3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-3 Annex B.1(ST 2048-1)

Quad-link HD-SQ

4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-3 Annex B.2(ST 2036-1)

Dual 3G-B-DS

3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-3 Annex B.2(ST 2048-1)

Dual 3G-B-DS

4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2081-10 M1(ST 2036-1)

6G-2SI

3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2081-10 M1(ST 2048-1)

6G-2SI

4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

Quad-link 3G-A (1) 2SI

3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p○⬤○

ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

Quad-link 3G-A (1) 2SI

4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.95p○⬤○

ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

Quad-link 3G-A (2) 2SI

3840 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

Quad-link 3G-A (2) 2SI

4096 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

Quad-link 3G-A (3) 2SI

3840 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

Quad-link 3G-A (3) 2SI

4096 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

Quad-link 3G-A (4) 2SI

3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

Quad-link 3G-A (4) 2SI

4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)
4:2:2:4 (YCbCrA)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 Annex B(ST 2036-1)

Quad-link 3G-A, B (1) SQ

3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p○⬤○

ST 425-5 Annex B(ST 2048-1)

Quad-link 3G-A, B (1) SQ

4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.95p○⬤○

ST 425-5 Annex B(ST 2036-1)

Quad-link 3G-A, B (2)SQ

3840 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 Annex B(ST 2048-1)

Quad-link 3G-A, B (2)SQ

4096 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 Annex B(ST 2036-1)

Quad-link 3G-A, B (3)SQ

3840 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 Annex B(ST 2048-1)

Quad-link 3G-A, B (3)SQ

4096 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 Annex B(ST 2036-1)

Quad-link 3G-A (4) SQ

3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 425-5 Annex B(ST 2048-1)

Quad-link 3G-A (4) SQ

4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)
4:2:2:4 (YCbCrA)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2081-11 M1,
ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

Dual-link 6G-2SI (I)3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p○⬤○

ST 2081-11 M1,
ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

Dual-link 6G-2SI (I)4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.95p○⬤○

ST 2081-11 M1,
ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

Dual-link 6G-2SI (II)3840 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

Page E-5

SMPTE Stnds.
Link (Content)

Interface

ST 2081-11 M1,
ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

Dual-link 6G-2SI (II)ST 2081-11 M1
ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

Resolution

Sampling
Structure

Pixel Depth

Frame / Field Rate

SDIHDR

SDISDR

4096 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

Dual-link 6G-2SI (III)3840 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2081-11 M1,
ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

Dual-link 6G-2SI (III)4096 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2081-11 M1,
ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

Dual-link 6G-2SI (IV)3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2081-11 M1
ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

Dual-link 6G-2SI (IV)4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)
4:2:2:4 (YCbCrA)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2082-10 M1,
ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

12G-2SI (I)3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p○⬤○

ST 2082-10 M1,
ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

12G-2SI (I)4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)

1060p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, 47.95p○⬤○

ST 2082-10 M1
ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

12G -2SI (II)3840 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2082-10 M1
ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

12G -2SI (II)4096 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)
4:4:4:4 (YCbCrA/RGBA)

1030p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2082-10 M1
ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

12G-2SI (III)3840 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2082-10 M1
ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

12G-2SI (III)4096 x 2160

4:4:4 (YCbCr/RGB)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2082-10 M1
ST 425-5 (ST 2036-1)

12G-2SI (IV)3840 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)
4:2:2:4 (YCbCrA)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

ST 2082-10 M1
ST 425-5 (ST 2048-1)

12G-2SI (IV)4096 x 2160

4:2:2 (YCbCr)
4:2:2:4 (YCbCrA)

1230p, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p○⬤○

Key to table:

Page E-6l⬤ - Generator with Option PHQXO-GEN and Analyzerl○ - Optional

PHABRIX Qx User Manual

www.phabrix.com

PHABRIX products are continuously being updated
Please visit www.phabrix.com for latest product information